GBSS Reconfiguration Guide(V900R012C01_05)

GBSSV900R012C01

Reconfiguration Guide

Issue 05

Date 2011-03-07

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 05 (2011-03-07) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes how to reconfigure the BSC6900 during network optimization and howto configure the optional features.

Product VersionsThe following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R012C01

BTS3900 BTS3900V100R002C00SPC011

BTS3000 BTS3000V100R009C00SPC011

BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3012II/BTS3006C/BTS3002E

BTS3000V100R008C11SP03 and laterversions

DBS3900 BTS3000V100R008C11 and later versions

BTS3900/BTS3900A BTS3000V100R008C11 and later versions

BTS3900B/BTS3900E V100R008 and later versions

BTS30/BTS312/BTS3012A V302R007 and later versions

BTS30 and macro BTS312 (EDGE) G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and laterversions

BTS30 and macro BTS312 (PCS1900) G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and laterversions

Macro BTS3X (AMR) G3BTS32V302R002C06SP05 and laterversions

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

GBSSReconfiguration Guide About This Document


iii

l Technical support engineersl Maintenance engineersl Field engineersl Network optimization engineers

Organization1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide.

2 Introduction to Reconfiguration

This chapter defines reconfiguration and describes the reconfiguration tools.

3 Checking the License

This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license.

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running BSC6900 or expand its capacity.

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

This chapter describes how to reconfigure a BTS. In the case of traffic imbalance, you can adjustthe distribution of hardware resources. Reconfiguring BTSs can help to balance the traffic.

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running base station subsystem (BSS) as required.

7 Configuring GBSS Features

This section describes how to configure the features of the GBSS.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

About This DocumentGBSS


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Symbol Description

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

GBSSReconfiguration Guide About This Document


v


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.

About This DocumentGBSS


vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide.....................................................................1-1

2 Introduction to Reconfiguration.............................................................................................2-12.1 Definition........................................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Tools................................................................................................................................................................2-2

3 Checking the License.................................................................................................................3-1

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900......................................................................................................4-14.1 Changing Signaling Points..............................................................................................................................4-24.2 Adding Boards and Subracks..........................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Adding a Subrack...................................................................................................................................4-44.2.2 Adding the XPUa/XPUb Board ............................................................................................................4-84.2.3 Adding Interface Boards......................................................................................................................4-11

4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A Interface...................................................................................4-134.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater Interface.......................................................................4-154.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface.................................................................................4-174.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis Interface..............................................................................4-18

5 Reconfiguring a BTS..................................................................................................................5-15.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTS......................................................................................................5-3

5.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTS...........................................................................................5-35.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment Mode....................................................................................5-45.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis Timeslots................................................................................................5-5

5.2 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated Mode...................................................................5-55.3 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base Stations................................................................5-6

5.3.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU Ring.............................................................................................5-65.3.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU Chain.........................................................................................5-8

5.4 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSs.........................................................5-95.5 Changing the Frequency Hopping.................................................................................................................5-10

5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FH..............................................................................................................5-115.5.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FH....................................................................................................5-115.5.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH........................................................................................................5-125.5.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH........................................................................................................5-13

GBSSReconfiguration Guide Contents


vii

5.5.5 Changing RF FH to None FH..............................................................................................................5-135.5.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FH....................................................................................................5-145.5.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH............................................................................................................5-145.5.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH........................................................................................................5-15

5.6 Adjusting the BTS Ring Topology................................................................................................................5-155.7 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS Standard...................................................................................................5-165.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario)..................................................................................5-16

5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data.....................................................................................................5-195.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IP Scenario)..........................................................................5-21

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network...........................................................................................6-16.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in Batches..........................................6-26.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface.................................................................6-36.3 Reconfiguring a Cell.......................................................................................................................................6-4

6.3.1 Changing the TRX Power......................................................................................................................6-56.3.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a Cell.....................................................................................................6-56.3.3 Changing TRX Frequencies...................................................................................................................6-66.3.4 Changing Neighboring Cell Relations...................................................................................................6-7

6.4 Reconfiguring Channels..................................................................................................................................6-96.4.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHs.............................................................................................................6-96.4.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half Rate...........................................................................6-10

7 Configuring GBSS Features.....................................................................................................7-17.1 Overview of Feature Configuration..............................................................................................................7-157.2 Activating the GSM License.........................................................................................................................7-457.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)...............................................................................................7-467.4 Configuring IMSI Detach..............................................................................................................................7-467.5 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover...............................................................................................................7-477.6 Configuring Directed Retry...........................................................................................................................7-537.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment..................................................................................7-547.8 Configuring Call Reestablishment................................................................................................................7-557.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignment..................................................................................................................7-577.10 Configuring Radio Link Management........................................................................................................7-587.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs.................................................................7-597.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.................................................................7-647.13 Configuring System Information Sending..................................................................................................7-657.14 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.............................................................................................................7-667.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment................................................................................................7-677.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)............................................................................................7-697.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code................................................................................................7-727.18 Configuring DRX........................................................................................................................................7-737.19 Configuring BTS Power Management........................................................................................................7-747.20 Configuring Connection with TMA............................................................................................................7-757.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt.............................................................................................................7-78

ContentsGBSS


viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity..................................................................................................7-797.23 Configuring BTS Clock..............................................................................................................................7-807.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)................................................................7-817.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)..............................................................................................7-837.26 Configuring Transmit Diversity..................................................................................................................7-857.27 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity......................................................................................................7-867.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity..................................................................................................7-887.29 Configuring Dynamic PBT.........................................................................................................................7-897.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage.....................................................................................................7-917.31 Configuring Extended Cell..........................................................................................................................7-937.32 Configuring Concentric Cell.......................................................................................................................7-947.33 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell........................................................................................................................7-957.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC.................................................................................................7-987.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network...............................................................................................7-997.36 Configuring Flex MAIO............................................................................................................................7-1027.37 Configuring ICC........................................................................................................................................7-1037.38 Configuring EICC.....................................................................................................................................7-1047.39 Configuring Frequency Hopping..............................................................................................................7-1067.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping......................................................................................7-1077.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping................................................................................................7-1097.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.................................................................................7-1107.43 Configuring IBCA.....................................................................................................................................7-1117.44 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network.................................................................................................7-1147.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization...................................................................................................7-1177.46 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet...........................................................................................................7-1187.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm...............................................................................7-1197.48 Configuring DTX......................................................................................................................................7-1237.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown........................................................................7-1257.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.........................................7-1277.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass................................................................................................7-1287.52 Configuring Active Backup Power Control..............................................................................................7-1297.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.......................................................................7-1307.54 Configuring PSU Smart Control...............................................................................................................7-1317.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization...........................................................7-1317.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off......................................................................................................7-1337.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment......................................................................................7-1347.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment......................................................................7-1357.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management................................................................................7-1357.60 Configuring Flex Abis...............................................................................................................................7-1367.61 Configuring BTS Local Switch.................................................................................................................7-1387.62 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization..........................................................................................7-1407.63 Configuring Flex Ater...............................................................................................................................7-140



ix

7.64 Configuring BSC Local Switch.................................................................................................................7-1417.65 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission...........................................................................................7-1437.66 Configuring BTS Ring Topology..............................................................................................................7-1457.67 Configuring TRX Mutual Aid...................................................................................................................7-1467.68 Configuring MSC Pool..............................................................................................................................7-1487.69 Configuring the SGSN Pool......................................................................................................................7-150

7.69.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)..............................................................................................7-1507.69.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)............................................................................................7-152

7.70 Configuring Abis Bypass..........................................................................................................................7-1547.71 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup...................................................................................................7-1577.72 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy........................................................................................................7-1587.73 Configuring TC Pool.................................................................................................................................7-161

7.73.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)...........................................................................................7-1617.73.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)................................................................................................7-164

7.74 Configuring OML Backup........................................................................................................................7-1687.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)..............................................................................7-1707.76 Configuring Fast Move Handover.............................................................................................................7-1717.77 Configuring Chain Cell Handover............................................................................................................7-1737.78 Configuring Multi-Site Cell......................................................................................................................7-1747.79 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability...........................................................................................7-1767.80 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability......................................................................................7-1777.81 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover............................................................................7-1817.82 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover................................................................................7-1827.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.........................................................................7-1837.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.........................................................................7-1857.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface...........................................................................7-1867.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface................................................................................7-1887.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface...........................................................................7-1897.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface..............................................................................7-1907.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface..............................................................................7-1927.90 Configuring High Speed Signaling ..........................................................................................................7-1937.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points...........................................................................................7-1947.92 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection................................................................................................7-1967.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.......................................................................................7-1977.94 Configuring Active Power Control...........................................................................................................7-1987.95 Configuring Ciphering..............................................................................................................................7-1997.96 Configuring Speech Version.....................................................................................................................7-2017.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR..........................................................................7-2027.98 Configuring the Cell Broadcast.................................................................................................................7-203

7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)............................................................7-2047.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast............................................................................................7-205

7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)..........................................................................................7-206

ContentsGBSS


x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)....................................................................................7-2087.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)......................................................................................7-2097.102 Configuring TFO.....................................................................................................................................7-2107.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).............................................................................7-2127.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)...............................................................7-2127.105 Configuring Voice Quality Index............................................................................................................7-2147.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report......................................................................................7-2157.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation..............................................................................................7-2177.108 Configuring VQE3.0...............................................................................................................................7-2197.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User Experience ........................................................................................7-2197.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment..........................................................7-2217.111 Configuring WB AMR............................................................................................................................7-2237.112 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR).........................................................................................................7-2247.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THP..................................................................................................................7-2267.114 Configuring PS Active Package Management........................................................................................7-2287.115 Configuring PoC QoS.............................................................................................................................7-2297.116 Configuring PS Service in Priority..........................................................................................................7-2307.117 Configuring NC2.....................................................................................................................................7-2317.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)......................................................................7-2337.119 Configuring GPRS..................................................................................................................................7-2357.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode I.................................................................................................7-2367.121 Configuring EGPRS................................................................................................................................7-2377.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access........................................................................................................7-2387.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding...............................................................7-2427.124 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching...............................................................................................7-243

7.124.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.............7-2447.124.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.........................................................................................7-2457.124.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario...............................................7-246

7.125 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination...................................................................................................7-2477.126 Configuring PS Handover.......................................................................................................................7-2487.127 Configuring PS Power Control...............................................................................................................7-2517.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds...........................................................7-2527.129 Configuring EDA....................................................................................................................................7-2547.130 Configuring DTM...................................................................................................................................7-2557.131 Configuring Class11 DTM......................................................................................................................7-2577.132 Configuring HMC DTM.........................................................................................................................7-2587.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data.......................................................................................7-2597.134 Configuring Resource Reservation.........................................................................................................7-2617.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)...........................................7-2627.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call...............................................................................................7-2637.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority..................................................................................7-2657.138 Configuring Network Support SAIC.......................................................................................................7-266



xi

7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)..........................................................................................7-2687.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)..........................................................................................7-2697.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA)......................................................................................7-2707.142 Configuring Lb Interface.........................................................................................................................7-2717.143 Configuring Abis over IP........................................................................................................................7-2757.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.............................................................................................................7-2767.145 Configuring Abis MUX..........................................................................................................................7-2787.146 Configuring A over IP.............................................................................................................................7-2797.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1..................................................................................................................7-2817.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission..........................................................................................7-2837.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface....................................................................7-2847.150 Configuring Gb over IP...........................................................................................................................7-2867.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFD........................................................................................7-2877.152 Configuring Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................................7-2887.153 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning............................................7-2907.154 Configuring PICO Synchronization........................................................................................................7-2927.155 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.........................................................................................7-2937.156 Configuring PICO USB Encryption .......................................................................................................7-2967.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode..........................................................................................................7-2967.158 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization...........................................................................................7-2987.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.....................................................................7-2997.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization................................7-3007.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off.......................................................................................7-3027.162 Configuring Local User Management.....................................................................................................7-3047.163 Configuring VGCS/VBS.........................................................................................................................7-3057.164 Configuring GSM-T Relay......................................................................................................................7-3077.165 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover........................................................................................................7-3087.166 Configuring Handover Re-establishment................................................................................................7-3157.167 Configuring RAN Sharing......................................................................................................................7-3167.168 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell.............................................................................................................7-3187.169 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover........................................................................................................7-3207.170 Configuring MSRD.................................................................................................................................7-3227.171 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..................................................................................................7-3237.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-A....................................................................................................................7-3247.173 Configuring Latency Reduction..............................................................................................................7-3267.174 Configuring License Control for Urgency..............................................................................................7-3277.175 Configuring Access Control Class..........................................................................................................7-3287.176 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g....................................................................7-3297.177 Configuring NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS......................7-3317.178 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g .............................................................7-3337.179 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g..............................................................7-3377.180 Configuring GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority .......................................7-340

ContentsGBSS


xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.181 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE..........................................................................7-3417.182 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage...............................................7-3437.183 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality...................................................7-3457.184 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...............................................7-3487.185 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE...........................................................................................7-3517.186 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE........................................................................................7-3527.187 Configuring SRVCC...............................................................................................................................7-3537.188 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA................................................................7-3557.189 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g...........7-3577.190 Configuring Multiple CCCHs.................................................................................................................7-3587.191 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).....................................................................7-3597.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).............................................7-361

7.192.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.........................7-3617.192.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.............................7-367

7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)................7-3717.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).........................................................7-377

7.194.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock............................................................7-3777.194.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference Clock................................................................7-384



xiii

Figures

Figure 4-1 Floating nuts installation....................................................................................................................4-6Figure 4-2 Checking the subrack configuration mode.........................................................................................4-7Figure 5-1 RXU ring and RXU chain examples..................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-2 RXU ring and RXU chain examples..................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-3 Adjusting BTS connection data between BSCs...............................................................................5-17Figure 5-4 Adjusting BTS connection data within a BSC.................................................................................5-18Figure 7-1 Signaling messages...........................................................................................................................7-56Figure 7-2 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.............................................................................7-60Figure 7-3 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups.........................................................................................7-61Figure 7-4 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface......................................................7-82Figure 7-5 Connections between the DTRU and DDPU in PBT mode.............................................................7-84Figure 7-6 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell................................................................................7-94Figure 7-7 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell..........................................................................7-94Figure 7-8 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled......................................................7-157Figure 7-9 Position of the SMLC in the network.............................................................................................7-272Figure 7-10 Assignment request message in TDM transmission.....................................................................7-285Figure 7-11 Assignment request message in IP transmission..........................................................................7-285Figure 7-12 Messages traced on the interface between BSCs..........................................................................7-358Figure 7-13 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side.............................................7-362Figure 7-14 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side........................................7-362Figure 7-15 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side............................................7-363Figure 7-16 IP-over-FE/GE GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side...........................................7-367Figure 7-17 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side............................................7-368Figure 7-18 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission..................................................7-372Figure 7-19 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission..........................................7-373Figure 7-20 Common GPS reference clock.....................................................................................................7-378Figure 7-21 Common BITS reference clock....................................................................................................7-379Figure 7-22 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU).......................................................7-379Figure 7-23 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT).....................................................7-380Figure 7-24 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT).................................................7-380Figure 7-25 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)...........................................................7-381

GBSSReconfiguration Guide Figures


xv

Tables

Table 2-1 Reconfiguration tools...........................................................................................................................2-2Table 4-1 Boards Supporting the Ater Interface................................................................................................4-16Table 5-1 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3012...........................5-9Table 5-2 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3006C.........................5-9Table 5-3 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number when cabinet groups are configuredbetween the BTS3012 and BTS312....................................................................................................................5-10Table 7-1 GBSS Basic Feature List....................................................................................................................7-15Table 7-2 GBSS Optional Feature List...............................................................................................................7-20Table 7-3 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3012 series)..............7-92Table 7-4 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3900E)......................7-92Table 7-5 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control.........................................................................7-120Table 7-6 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S4...............................................................................7-155Table 7-7 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S5...............................................................................7-155Table 7-8 KPIs that are based on user experience............................................................................................7-220

GBSSReconfiguration Guide Tables


xvii

1 Changes in the GBSS ReconfigurationGuide

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide.

05 (2011-03-07)This is the fifth commercial release of V900R012C01.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30), this issue incorporates the following changes.

Content Description

4.1 Changing Signaling Points The description of the procedure aremodified.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-11-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2010-11-30)This is the fourth commercial release of V900R012C01.

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20), this issue includes the following new topics:

l Adjusting OMU Slots


Content Description

Changing the Work Mode of a Board The description of the procedure aremodified.


GBSSReconfiguration Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


1-1

03 (2010-09-20)This is the third commercial release of V900R012C01.

Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FHl 5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario)l 4.2 Adding Boards and Subracks

Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not incorporate any changes.


02 (2010-06-21)This is the second commercial release of V900R012C01.

Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not include any new topics.


Content Description

4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode onthe A Interface

The description of the prerequisites aremodified.

4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode onthe Gb Interface


4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode onthe Abis Interface



01 (2010-04-10)This is the first commercial release of V900R012C01.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following newtopics:

l 7.10 Configuring Radio Link Managementl 7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSsl 7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failurel 7.20 Configuring Connection with TMAl 7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical Tiltl 7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversityl 7.23 Configuring BTS Clockl 7.37 Configuring ICCl 7.38 Configuring EICC

1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration GuideGBSS


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l 7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hoppingl 7.45 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronizationl 7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)l 7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS

side (GBTS)l 7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)l 7.70 Configuring Abis Bypassl 7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)l 4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater Interfacel 6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not incorporate anychanges.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 1 Changes in the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide


1-3

2 Introduction to Reconfiguration

About This Chapter

This chapter defines reconfiguration and describes the reconfiguration tools.

2.1 DefinitionReconfiguration refers to a process of adding, deleting, or modifying the data of the BSS system(consisting of at least one BSC6900 and one base station) after it starts operating.

2.2 ToolsThe Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Configuration Management Express (CME)can be used to configure the BSC6900.

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 2 Introduction to Reconfiguration


2-1

2.1 DefinitionReconfiguration refers to a process of adding, deleting, or modifying the data of the BSS system(consisting of at least one BSC6900 and one base station) after it starts operating.

The BSS is reconfigured in the following scenarios:

l Network optimizationNetwork optimization is a process of adjusting and optimizing the network performancebased on the data that is obtained from performance measurements or drive tests when thenetwork is in service.

l System capacity expansionSystem capacity expansion enables the BSC system to serve more users through hardwareaddition or configuration modification in the existing network.

l Feature configurationFeature configuration is a process of activating an optional feature by configuring its keyparameters.

This document focuses on the data to be prepared and reconfiguration procedures. However, itdoes not focus on the data analysis process of network optimization and the number of boardsand links for capacity expansion that are subject to actual network conditions.

Feature configuration provides guidelines for activating a feature, but it cannot guarantee theoptimum feature performance in the network.

2.2 ToolsThe Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the Configuration Management Express (CME)can be used to configure the BSC6900.

Table 2-1 describes the tools used in reconfiguration. This document describes only the datareconfiguration through MML commands on the LMT.

Table 2-1 Reconfiguration tools

Data Configuration Tool Function

LMT Online or offline configuration of the BSC6900 can beperformed through MML commands.

CME BSC6900 configuration can be performed through the CMEgraphic user interface.l In integrated mode, the configuration data can be sent to

the BSC6900 through the M2000 immediately or at aspecified time. This mode is used for data reconfiguration.

l In standalone mode, the configuration file needs to beexported after the configuration and then loaded to theBSC6900 through the LMT or M2000 for the data to takeeffect. This mode applies to BSC6900 initialconfiguration.

2 Introduction to ReconfigurationGBSS



Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 2 Introduction to Reconfiguration


2-3

3 Checking the License

This chapter describes how to check the newly granted license.

Prerequisitel A new license is granted.

l The BSC6900 is in the minimum configuration.

l The license file is loaded. For details, see FTP Server.

Context

A new license is required in the following situations:

l A network is deployed.

l New license control items are introduced to the C version to be upgraded. These licensecontrol items, however, are not defined in the license file of the earlier version.

l New license control items are introduced to the C version to be upgraded. These licensecontrol items are defined in the license file of the earlier version, but their values areincorrect.

l The R version is upgraded.

l The Equipment Serial Number (ESN) is changed.

l The functions restricted by the license need to be enabled.

l The license is about to expire.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the CHK DATA2LIC command to check the license. In this step, set File Name.

----End

Example

/*Check the license file named ON1020691_GU2.dat*/

CHK DATA2LIC: FN="ON1020691_GU2.dat";

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 3 Checking the License


3-1

Follow-up ProcedureAfter checking the license, run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license.

3 Checking the LicenseGBSS



Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running BSC6900 or expand its capacity.

4.1 Changing Signaling PointsWhen the BSC6900 is relocated or network optimization is performed, the originating signalingpoint code (OPC) and destination signaling point code (DPC) are changed. In this case, therelated settings must be changed.

4.2 Adding Boards and SubracksAs traffic volume increases, the BSC6900 cannot meet the increasing service requirements. Inthis case, you can add boards or subracks to expand system capacity.

4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A InterfaceTo improve the transmission efficiency and speech quality on the A interface, you can changethe transmission mode on the A interface from TDM to IP.

4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the Ater InterfaceThe TDM transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adjusted to IP transmission modebased on the service requirements.

4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb InterfaceTo improve the transmission efficiency, increase the throughput, and reduce the transmissiondelay on the Gb interface, you can change the transmission mode on the Gb interface from FRto IP.

4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis InterfaceTo improve the transmission resource utilization, you can change the transmission mode on theAbis interface from TDM to IP.

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900


4-1

4.1 Changing Signaling PointsWhen the BSC6900 is relocated or network optimization is performed, the originating signalingpoint code (OPC) and destination signaling point code (DPC) are changed. In this case, therelated settings must be changed.

Prerequisitel The LMT runs normally.l The LMT communicates with the BSC6900 properly.l A BSC license is ready.

Context

CAUTIONChanging signaling points will interrupt BSC6900 services. Therefore, change signaling pointsat midnight when the traffic load is light.

l When an Originating Signaling Point Code (OPC) or Destination Signaling Point Code(DPC) changes, the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of the BSC changes. The ESN of theBSC is bound with a license. Therefore, after the OPC or DPC changes, you must applyfor a new BSC license based on the new ESN and then activate it.

NOTERun the LST ESN command with the Query Type parameter set to CUSTOM(Custom ESN) toquery the new ESN corresponding to the new signaling point.

l Deactivate all the GSM cells before changing a signaling point.l When an OPC is used by an M3UA local entity (M3LE), set all subracks to ineffective

mode and then change the OPC.l If the OPC to be changed is not used by an M3LE, change the OPC in online mode.

Procedurel Change an OPC.

1. Run the LST M3LE command to query whether the OPC to be changed is used byan M3LE.– If the OPC to be changed is used by an M3LE, change the OPC as follows:

(1) Run the DEA GCELL command to deactivate all the GSM cells.(2) Run the SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE command to set all subracks to

ineffective mode.(3) Run the MOD OPC command to change OSP name and OSP code.(4) Run the MOD GCELLOSPMAP command to set the OPCs mapping the

GSM cells.(5) Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to set all subracks to

effective mode.

4 Reconfiguring the BSC6900GBSS



Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

(6) Run the FMT DATA command to create a data configuration file.(7) Run the RST BSC command to reset the BSC6900.(8) Activate GSM licenses by referring to 7.2 Activating the GSM License.(9) Run the ACT GCELL command to activate all the GSM cells.

– If the OPC to be changed is not used by an M3LE, change the OPC as follows:

(1) Run the DEA GCELL command to deactivate all the GSM cells.(2) Run the MOD OPC command to change OSP name and OSP code.(3) Run the MOD GCELLOSPMAP command to set the OPCs mapping the

GSM cells.(4) Activate GSM licenses by referring to 7.2 Activating the GSM License.(5) Run the ACT GCELL command to activate all the GSM cells.

l Change a DPC.1. Run the MOD N7DPC command to change DSP name and DSP code.2. Activate GSM licenses by referring to 7.2 Activating the GSM License.

----End

Example//Change an OPC.

// To query whether the OPC to be changed is used by an M3LE, run the following command:DSP M3LE:

// To deactivate a GSM cell, run the following command:DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;

// To set a subrack to ineffective mode, run the following command:SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE:

// To change an OPC, run the following command:MOD OPC: SPX=1, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=10001;

// To set an OPC mapping a GSM cell, run the following command:MOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, OPC=10001;

// To set a subrack to effective mode, run the following command:SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE:

// To create a data configuration file, run the following command:FMT DATA:;

// To reset the BSC6900, run the following command:RST BSC: BSCID=1;

// To reactivate the BSC license, run the following command:ACT LICENSE: FN="license.dat";

// To activate a GSM cell, run the following command:ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;

// To change a DPC, run the following command:



4-3

MOD N7DPC: DPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=1002;

// To reactivate the BSC license, run the following command:ACT LICENSE: FN="license.dat";

4.2 Adding Boards and SubracksAs traffic volume increases, the BSC6900 cannot meet the increasing service requirements. Inthis case, you can add boards or subracks to expand system capacity.

4.2.1 Adding a SubrackThis section describes procedures and precautions for adding subracks.

4.2.2 Adding the XPUa/XPUb BoardThis section describes procedures and precautions for adding the XPUa/XPUb board.

4.2.3 Adding Interface BoardsThis section describes procedures and precautions for adding interface boards.

4.2.1 Adding a SubrackThis section describes procedures and precautions for adding subracks.

Prerequisitel Network design is complete.

Network design involves planning of traffic volume in each subrack, planning of thequantity of subracks, and planning of the quantity of boards and types of boards.Contact Huawei to obtain the detailed network design and planning scheme.

l Tools required for adding subracks are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillipsscrewdriver, straight screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

l The parts needed for adding subracks are all ready. The parts include subracks, screws,power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables connecting new subracks and NEs.

l Subracks to be added are ready.l If there is space in the cabinet, add a subrack there. If idle space is not available, another

cabinet is needed.l Check whether the program files of the OMU board in the OMU active workspace

installation directory\bin\fam are correct.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Context

CAUTIONl To avoid damage to the boards, ASIC chips, or other electronic components, wear an ESD

wrist strap properly. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is properly connected to the ESDconnector on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap or no proper grounding point is available,wear ESD gloves.

l It is recommended that you use a board of the same type to replace the board. To use a boardof the different version to replace the board (for example, the board of version a replace theboard of version b), contact Huawei for technical support.

When original subracks are in effective mode, adding subracks does not affect ongoing service.When original subracks are in ineffective mode, the BSC6900 needs restarting to add a subrack.Restarting the BSC6900 interrupts the ongoing services. Therefore, adding new subracks whenoriginal subracks are in effective mode is recommended.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the DIP switches according to the location of the new subrack, by referring to DIP Switchon the Subrack.

CAUTIONl Checking and Setting the Subrack DIP Switch; then, power on the subracks. Set the DIP

switches before powering on the subrack. Settings of the DIP switches after powering on thesubrack are invalid.

l Set the DIP switches for the new subrack by referring to Checking and Setting the SubrackDIP Switch. Different subracks must have different settings of DIP switches. If two subracksin the BSC6900 share the same settings of the DIP switches, services on the two subrackswill be disrupted.

Step 2 Turn off the power switch for the new subrack by referring to Distribution of Power Switcheson the Common Power Distribution Box.

Step 3 Make sure floating nuts are installed in the mounting bar at the front side of the cabinet. If nofloating nuts are available, take floating nuts out of the ESD bag at the bottom of the cabinet andinstall them in the place highlighted in yellow shown in Figure 4-1.



4-5

Figure 4-1 Floating nuts installation

NOTE

Three holes in the mounting bar are known as one U space. One subrack occupies 36 holes.

One subrack is fixed by 4 pairs of floating nuts installed symmetrically. The floating nuts are installed in the3rd, the 12th, the 25th, and the 34th holes in the mounting bar where the subrack will be installed.

Step 4 Two people hold the mounting ears and support the base of the subrack. Slide the subrack alongthe guiding rail into the cabinet, and then fasten the screws to fix the subrack.

Step 5 Install the power cables for the new subrack by referring to Connections of Power Cables andPGND Cables in the Cabinet.

Step 6 Install the boards in the new subrack by referring to Installing Boards and Setting Board DIPSwitches.

Step 7 Install the total four network cables connecting the active/standby SCUa in the MPS subrackwith the active/standby SCUa in the new subrack by referring to Installing the Inter-SCUa CablesBetween Different Subracks.

Step 8 Install other connecting cables for the new subrack by referring to Installing the Signal Cables.

Step 9 Check whether cables in the new subrack are connected correctly.

Step 10 Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.

Step 11 Turn on the power switch for the new subrack.

Step 12 Log in to the LMT, and check the subrack configuration mode at the top right corner of the GUIas shown in a red circle in Figure 4-2.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

If... Then...

Some subracks are in ineffectivemode.

1. Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE commandin MML to set all the subracks in effective mode.

2. Go to step Step 13.

All the subracks are in ineffectivemode.

Go to step Step 13.

Figure 4-2 Checking the subrack configuration mode

Step 13 Run the ADD SUBRACK MML command to add a subrack.

Step 14 Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command in MML to set the new subrack to effectivemode.

After adding the subrack by running the ADD SUBRACK command, Data Configuration Modesof the new subrack is set to ineffective mode by default.

Step 15 Add the XPUa/XPUb board.

Step 16 Add the DPU board.

Step 17 Add the interface board.

Step 18 Check the process of adding the boards in the Device Maintenance window on the LMT. Whenall the boards in the subrack are added ten minutes later, the subrack begins to work normally.Open the Device Maintenance window on the LMT, and check whether all the boards worknormally in the BSC Device Panel tab page.

Step 19 In the Browse Alarm tab page on the LMT, check whether alarms such as board fault alarmsare reported.



4-7

If... Then...

Alarms such as board fault alarms arereported.

1. Find out the reason according to the alarmsand clear them.

2. Go back to step Step 19.

Alarms such as board fault alarms are notreported.

Go to step Step 20.

Step 20 Run the DSP BRDVER to query the software version of the new board. Compare the queryresults with the version configuration information file of the boards to check whether softwareversions of the new boards follow the version mapping of the boards.

If... Then...

Software versions of the new boardsfollow the version mapping of the boards.

Go to step Step 21.

Software versions of the new boards donot follow the version mapping of theboards.

1. Check whether the program files of the OMUboard in the OMU active workspaceinstallation directory\LoadData are correct.If the program files are not correct, contactengineers in Huawei to obtain the correctfiles.

2. Run the RST BRD command to reset theboard.


NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version mapping table by referring to section "Board Versions" in therelease notes.

Step 21 Perform dialing tests and browse webpages to check that the boards provide functions properly.

----End

4.2.2 Adding the XPUa/XPUb BoardThis section describes procedures and precautions for adding the XPUa/XPUb board.


Network design involves planning of the quantity of NodeBs carried by each subrack,planning of the quantity of NodeBs carried by the XPUa/XPUb board or by each subsystem,and planing of slots for holding the boards.

Contact Huawei to obtain the detailed network design scheme.

l The XPUa/XPUb board is ready.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Tools required for installing boards are ready. Tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillipsscrewdriver, straight screwdriver, ESD box or bag, and dustfree cotton cloth.

Context




When binding the boards, various boards must be evenly bound to the MPU subsystem.

WARNINGWhen the board types bound to the MPU subsystem are not complete or when the proportion ofthe boards is inappropriate, the exchange message through the MPU subsystems surges, whichaffects the system stability.

If the board types bound to the MPU are not complete, either of the following situations exists:

l SPU boards are bound, not DPU boards or interface boards.l DPU boards are bound, not SPU boards or interface boards.l Interface boards are bound, not SPU or DPU boards.

Inappropriate proportion of boards indicates that the SPU, DPU and interface boards are notproperly arranged in the MPU subsystem.

In the case of two MPU subsystems, three pairs of SPUs, three pairs of DPUs and three pairs ofGOUcs in one subrack,

Inappropriate proportion is as follows:

l Two pairs of SPUs, one pair of DPUs and one pair of GOUcs are bound to one MPUsubsystem.

l One pair of SPUs, two pairs of DPUs and two pairs of GOUcs are bound to the other MPUsubsystem.

Appropriate proportion is as follows:

l Two pairs of SPUs, two pairs of DPUs and two pairs of GOUcs are bound to one MPUsubsystem.

l One pair of SPUs, one pair of DPUs and one pair of GOUcs are bound to the other MPUsubsystem.

The principles for the binding boards to the MPU subsystem are as follows:



4-9

l At least one MPU subsystem must be configured in each subrack. If there are two pairs ormore XPUb boards, two MPU subsystems must be configured in the subrack.

l It is recommended that you configure the MPU subsystem in slot 0 and slot 2. Accordingto the load balancing principle, bind XPUb boards to two MPU subsystems respectivelyfor load sharing.

– For example, MPU subsystems are configured in slot 0 and slot 2.

– Bind the XPU boards in slot 4 and 8 to the MPU subsystem in slot 0.

– Bind the XPU boards in slot 10 and 12 to the MPU subsystem in slot 2.

Procedure

Step 1 Install the SPUb boards by referring to Inserting a Board.

Step 2 Run the ADD BRD command to add the XPUa/XPUb board.For example,ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=SPUb, LGCAPPTYPE=UCP, SN=4, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

Step 3 When the RUN on the board blinks every second (1s on, 1s off), run the DSP BRD commandto query the new board status.

If... Then...

The XPUb board does not work in active/standby mode. CPU statusis Active normal.

Go to step Step 5.

The XPUb boards work in active/standby mode. CPU status isStandby normal.

Go to step Step 5.

CPU status is set to another value. Go to step Step 4.


If... Then...





Go to step Step 5.

Step 5 Run the ADD BRD command to add the next XPUa/XPUb board.l Add the XPUa/XPUb board one by one.l Check board status after adding the board. If the board is normal and no alarm is generated,

add the next board.

Step 6 Configure the new board by referring to Configuring the BTS.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

If the BTSs need to be reparented from another SPUa/SPUb to the new board, perform thereparenting by referring to section "Reparenting GSM BTSs" in GBSS Reconfiguration Guide(CME-Based).

Visit http://support.huawei.com to download the GBSS Reconfiguration Guide (CME-Based).

----End

4.2.3 Adding Interface BoardsThis section describes procedures and precautions for adding interface boards.


Network design involves planning of transmission methods of connecting the interfaceboards to other NEs, planning of types of interface boards, planning of overloads in eachinterface board, and planning of slots for holding interface boards.Contact Huawei to obtain the detailed network design and planning scheme.

l Cables for connecting the interface boards are ready.

NOTE

Cables for connecting the interface boards are prepared according to the site survey report.

Check cables used in the BSC6900 by referring to Cables.

l Peer equipment and transmission equipment connected to interface boards are ready.l Tools required for installation are ready. The tools are the ESD wrist strap, Phillips

screwdriver, straight screwdriver, ESD box or bag, dustfree cotton cloth, and fiber cleaner.

Context




l When the Data Configuration Modes of the subrack is effective mode, adding interfaceboards does not interrupt ongoing services of the BSC6900.

l When the subrack is in ineffective mode, the subrack needs to be restarted to add boards.Restarting subracks interrupts ongoing services.

Procedure

Step 1 If the new interface board adopts E1/T1 transmission or transmission over channelized STM-1ports, the DIP switch for the board must be set. For example: AEUa/PEUa/EIUa, AOUa/POUa.



4-11

See DIP Switches on Components to obtain the rules for setting the DIP switches.

Step 2 Install the signal cable (Ethernet cable or optical fiber) and cables for extracting clock signalsby referring to Installing the Signal Cables.

Step 3 Install interface boards by referring to Inserting a Board.

Step 4 Attaching the Engineering Labels to the Signal Cables.

Step 5 Configure the new interface boards by referring to Configuring the Interfaces.

Step 6 Check the port according to the board type. For example, if the AOUa board is added, run theDSP OPT command to query the optical port status.

Step 7 When the RUN on the board blinks every second (1s on, 1s off), run the DSP BRD commandto query the new board status.

If... Then...

The CPU Status is ACTIVE or STANDBY. Go to step Step 9.

The CPU Status is other status. Go to step Step 8.


If... Then...





Go to step Step 9.

Step 9 Run the CMP BRDVER command to check whether software versions of the new boards followthe version mapping of the boards.

If... Then...

The software versions of the new boardsfollow the version mapping of the boards.

Go to Step 10.

The software versions of the new boardsdo not follow the version mapping of theboards.

1. Check whether the program files of theOMUa board in the OMU active workspaceinstallation directory\bin\fam are correct. Ifthe program files are incorrect, contactHuawei engineers to obtain the correct files.

2. Run the RST BRD command to reset theboard.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

You can obtain the correct board version mapping table by referring to section "Board Versions" in therelease notes.

Step 10 Perform dialing test and browse websites to check that the new board provides functionsproperly.

Step 11 Verifying Network Reliability.

----End

4.3 Changing the Transmission Mode on the A InterfaceTo improve the transmission efficiency and speech quality on the A interface, you can changethe transmission mode on the A interface from TDM to IP.

Prerequisitel The peer end supports the A over IP mode.l The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured in the MPS/EPS subrack.l Networking planning is complete.l The license A over IP has been activated.l The DPUc board is configured in MPS/EPS ofBSC6900.

Context

CAUTIONIn A over IP mode, only system clock is supported. The line clock is not supported.

Changing the transmission mode on the A interface involves the following scenarios:

l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GEl Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1

Procedurel Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE

1. Optional: Run the RMV ATERCONSL/RMV ATERSL, RMV ATEROML, andRMV ATERE1T1/RMV ATERCONPATH commands to remove Ater interfacedata.

NOTE

This step needs to be performed only for TDM transmission in BM/TC separated mode.

2. Run the RMV MTP3RT/RMV MTP3LNK, RMV MTP3LKS, and RMV AE1T1commands to remove A interface data.

3. Run the RMV BRD command to remove the TDM-based interface boards from allthe subracks and other service processing boards from the TCS.



4-13

NOTE

Before removing the A interface board, ensure that the line clock carried on the A interfaceboard in the TCS is removed. For details on how to remove the line clock and the clock source,see the description of the SET CLK command and the RMV CLKSRC command.

4. Optional: Run the RMV SUBRACK command to remove TCS data.

NOTE


A subrack can be removed only after all the service processing boards in the subrack areremoved.

5. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP).NOTE

After the service mode of the BSC is changed, the resources to each subrack need to be reloaded.Therefore, you need to run the RST BSC to reset the BSC.

6. Run the ADD BRD in the MPS/ESP subrack to add an IP-based board.7. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the

FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board.8. Perform the operations in Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).9. Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and

Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.10. Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E11. Optional: Run the RMV ATERCONSL/RMV ATERSL, RMV ATEROML, and

RMV ATERE1T1/RMV ATERCONPATH commands to remove Ater interfacedata.

NOTE


2. Run the RMV MTP3RT/RMV MTP3LNK, RMV MTP3LKS, and RMV AE1T1commands to remove A interface data.

3. Run the RMV BRD command to remove the TDM interface boards and other serviceprocessing boards from the TCS.

4. Run the RMV SUBRACK command to remove TCS data.

NOTE


Before removing the A interface board, ensure that the line clock carried on the A interfaceboard in the TCS is removed. For details on how to remove the line clock and the clock source,see the description of the SET CLK command and the RMV CLKSRC command.

A subrack can be removed only after all the service processing boards in the subrack areremoved.

5. Run the SET BSCBASIC command. In this step, set Service mode to AIP(AIP).6. Run the ADD BRD in the MPS/ESP subrack to add an IP-based board.7. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.

– Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer forthe PEUa Board.

– Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer forthe POUc Board.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

8. Run the ADD ADJNODE command. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to A(AInterface).

9. Perform the operations in Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types andTransmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.

10. Perform the operations in Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

----End

Example

/*Change the transmission mode on the A interface*/

SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=AIP;

/*Configure the physical layer, data link layer, and network layer on the A interface*/

ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, IPADDR="162.4.5.12", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=4, IPTYPE=PRIMARY, IPADDR="161.70.2.104", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD IPRT: DSTIP="161.66.2.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="161.70.2.201", PRIORITY=HIGH;

/*Configure the control plane on the A interface*/

ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="BSC"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc0", DPX=11, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'1000, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=11, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="dpc0"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="M3UALINKSET0"; ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="RT0"; ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCPN=2004, LOCIP1="162.4.5.12", PEERIP1="161.66.2.210", PEERPN=2004, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, NAME="link0";

/*Configure the user plane on the A interface*/

ADD ADJNODE: ANI=5, NAME="A", NODET=A; ADD IPPATH: ANI=5, PATHID=1, ITFT=A, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="162.4.5.12", PEERIPADDR="161.66.2.213", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ADD TRMMAP: TMI=13, ITFT=A; ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=1, REMARK="A IP"; ADD ADJMAP: ANI=5, ITFT=A, TMIGLD=13, FTI=1;

Follow-up ProcedureVerifying Network Reliability.

4.4 Reconfiguring the Transmission Mode on the AterInterface

The TDM transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adjusted to IP transmission modebased on the service requirements.

Prerequisitel The POUc board is configured in the TCS and the MPS/EPS.

l The optical cable on the POUc board is connected.

l Network planning is complete.



4-15

Context

CAUTIONReconfiguring the transmission mode applied over the Ater interface will interrupt the servicesof the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is low, for example, in theearly morning.The whole process (including board restart) takes about 20 minutes.

The Ater interface does not support IP over E1/T1/FE/GE. It supports only IP over STM-1, andonly the POUc board supports IP over Ater.

Table 4-1 Boards Supporting the Ater Interface

Board Logical Function Transmission Mode

POUc IP STM-1

OIUa TDM STM-1

EIUa TDM E1/T1

Procedurel Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over STM-1

1. Run the RMV ATEROML command to remove the Ater OML between the MPSand the main TCS.

2. Remove the Ater connection path.

(1) Run the RMV ATERCONPATH command to remove the Ater connection pathbetween the MPS and the main TCS.

(2) In TC Pool scenarios, run the RMV ATERE1T1 command to remove the Aterconnection path between the BSC6900 and the TC.

3. Add an Ater connection path.

(1) Run the ADD ATERCONPATH command to add an Ater connection pathbetween the MPS and the main TCS.

(2) In TC Pool scenarios, run the ADD ATERE1T1 command to add an Aterconnection path between the BSC6900 and the TC.

4. Run the ADD ATEROML command to add the Ater OML between the MPS and themain TCS.

NOTE

l The Ater OML must use four or more successive timeslots, excluding timeslot 1

l It is recommended that an active Ater OML and a standby Ater OML are configured.

l When the BIOS version of the EIUa/OIUa board is lower than V215, the active Ater OML mustbe configured on the Ater connection path of port 0.

l In TC Pool scenarios, there is no need to configure the Ater OML for the slave BSC6900.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5. Run the ADD ATERSL command to add an Ater signaling link between the MPS/EP and the TCS.

NOTE

l Timeslot 1 of the local main subrack or remote main subrack is reserved and not allowed forconfiguration, whereas timeslot 1 of other subracks is allowed for configuration.

l The Ater signaling links on each Ater interface board can occupy up to 64 timeslots.

----End

Example

/*Remove the Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS.*/

RMV ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=1;

/*Remove the Ater connection path.*/

RMV ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0;

/*Add an Ater connection path.*/

ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=18, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=14, TCPN=0;

/*Add the Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS.*/

ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1;

/*Add the Ater signaling link between the MPS/EPS and the TCS.*/

ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=0, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;


4.5 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Gb InterfaceTo improve the transmission efficiency, increase the throughput, and reduce the transmissiondelay on the Gb interface, you can change the transmission mode on the Gb interface from FRto IP.

Prerequisitel The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured.l The peer end supports the Gb over IP mode.l A PEUa board is replaced by FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board.l Networking planning is complete.l The license Gb over IP has been activated.



4-17

Procedure

Step 1 Run the RMV PTPBVC command to remove the PTPBVC corresponding to the cell.

Step 2 Run the RMV NSVC command to remove NSVC data.

Step 3 Run the RMV BC command to remove BC data.

Step 4 Run the RMV NSE command to remove NSE data.

Step 5 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the interface board for FR transmission mode.

Step 6 Run the ADD NSE command to add the NSE.

Step 7 Configure the NSVL.

1. Run the ADD NSVLLOCAL command to add an NSVL at the BSC6900 side.2. Optional: When the NSE is in static configuration mode, run the ADD

NSVLREMOTE command to add the NSVL at the SGSN side.

Step 8 Run the ADD PTPBVC command to add the PTPBVC and to bind the GPRS cell with the NSE.

----End

ExampleADD NSE: NSEI=18013, SRN=0, SN=0, PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=STATIC, CNOPNAME="46000", CNID=0; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=130, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13000, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=131, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13001, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=132, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13002, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=133, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13003, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=134, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13004, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=135, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13005, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=136, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13006, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=137, NSEI=18013, IP="21.1.1.21", UDPPN=13007, SRN=0, SN=14; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=130, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13000; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=131, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13001; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=132, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13002; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=133, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13003; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=134, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13004; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=135, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13005; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=136, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13006; ADD NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=137, NSEI=18013, IP="19.1.1.20", UDPPN=13007;

4.6 Changing the Transmission Mode on the Abis InterfaceTo improve the transmission resource utilization, you can change the transmission mode on theAbis interface from TDM to IP.

Prerequisitel The peer end supports the Abis over IP mode.l The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc is configured.l Networking planning is complete.l The license Abis over IP has been activated.l The built-in PCU is used.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l The DPUc board is configured in MPS/EPS of BSC6900.

Context

Changing the transmission mode on the Abis interface consists of the following scenarios:

l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GEl Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E1

Procedurel Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over FE/GE

1. Run the RST BTS command to set the Reset Level to 4-LEVEL to perform a level-4reset for a BTS.

2. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate a BTS.3. Run the RMV BTSCONNECT command to remove the connection to the BTS.4. Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based interface board on the BSC.5. Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the

FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board.6. Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node.7. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane.

NOTE

When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTSin L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at theBSC side.

8. Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Service mode to IP and IP Phy TransType to IP_OVER_FE/GE.

9. Run the ADD BTSESN command to add the ESN of the BTS.10. Run the ADD BTSBRD command to add a board for IP transmission mode to a BTS.

NOTE

Perform this step only when the BTS is a double-transceiver BTS.

11. Run the SET BTSETHPORT command to set the port IP address of the BTS.12. Run the SET BTSIP command. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device

IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC.

NOTE

When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTSin L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at theBTS side.

13. Run the SET BTSIPCLKPARA command to configure the IP clock for the BTS.14. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS.

l Changing the transmission mode from TDM to IP over E11. Run the RST BTS command to set the Reset Level to 4-LEVEL to perform a level-4

reset for a BTS.2. Run the DEA BTS command to deactivate the BTS.3. Run the ADD BRD command to add the IP-based interface board on the BSC.



4-19

4. Configure the physical layer and the data link layer.– Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for

the PEUa Board.– Perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for

the POUc Board.5. Run the ADD ADJNODE command to add an adjacent node.6. Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP-based user plane.

NOTE

When the IP address of the BSC6900 is not on the same network segment as that of the BTSin L3 networking, you need to run the ADD IPRT command to configure the IP route at theBSC side.

7. Run the MOD BTS command. In this step, set Service mode to IP and IP Phy TransType to IP_OVER_E1.

8. Run the MOD BTSCONNECT command to connect the BTS to the port on the newIP-based interface board.

9. Run the ADD BTSESN command to add the ESN of the BTS.10. Run the SET BTSIP command. In this step, set BSC IP to the same value as Device

IP or Port IP of the IP-based interface board on the BSC.11. Run the ACT BTS command to activate the BTS.

----End

Example

MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/GE; ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, SRN=0, SN=3, BT=PTU; ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=1, IPADDR="11.12.13.14", MASK="255.255.255.0"; SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, CLKPRTTYPE=HW_DEFINED, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT, MASTERIPADDR="10.22.13.22", SYNMODE=CONSYN; ADD BTSESN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, MAINDEVTAB="030GMU1085000422", BAKDEVTAB="1111111111111111"; SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, PN=0; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=8, BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, BTSIP="11.12.13.15", BSCIP="11.12.13.14"; ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="BTS3900", NODET=ABIS, BTSID=8; ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=8; ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5 Reconfiguring a BTS

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to reconfigure a BTS. In the case of traffic imbalance, you can adjustthe distribution of hardware resources. Reconfiguring BTSs can help to balance the traffic.

5.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTSChanging timeslot assignment on a BTS consists of changing the BTS multiplexing mode andchanging the Abis timeslot assignment mode.

5.2 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to Separated ModeWhen a multi-transceiver unit is used in system capacity expansion, you need to change the BTSfrom the non-separated mode to the separated mode.

5.3 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series Base StationsChanging the networking mode of the 3900 series base stations consists of changing the RXUchain into an RXU ring and changing an RXU ring into an RXU chain.

5.4 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups Between BTSsA single BTS cabinet has limited capacity. To deploy a site of high capacity, you can configurecombined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs.

5.5 Changing the Frequency HoppingFrequency hopping (FH) is a commonly used spread spectrum communication technology. It ischaracterized by strong anti-interference, strong anti-attenuation, and high security. Theapplication of FH in the GSM can reduce the interference and increase the system capacity.

5.6 Adjusting the BTS Ring TopologyThis section describes how to change the non-ring topology to ring topology for a BTS.

5.7 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS StandardThis section describes how to adjust the multi-carrier BTS standard.

5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario)This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data in the scenario using static IPaddresses.

5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IP Scenario)

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 5 Reconfiguring a BTS


5-1

This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data within a BSC6900 in the scenariousing non-static IP addresses.

5 Reconfiguring a BTSGBSS



Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5.1 Changing Timeslot Assignment on a BTSChanging timeslot assignment on a BTS consists of changing the BTS multiplexing mode andchanging the Abis timeslot assignment mode.

5.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTSWhen the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for timeslots also changes.You can change the multiplexing mode on the Abis interface of a BTS to maximize the resourceutilization.

5.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment ModeWhen the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for Abis timeslots alsochanges. You can change the Abis timeslot assignment mode to maximize the utilization of Abistimeslot resources.

5.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis TimeslotsThis describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot assignment onthe Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoringtimeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also manually assigntimeslots on the Abis interface if required.

5.1.1 Changing the Multiplexing Mode of a BTSWhen the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for timeslots also changes.You can change the multiplexing mode on the Abis interface of a BTS to maximize the resourceutilization.

Prerequisitel The BTS is configured and works properly.

Context

CAUTIONChanging the BTS multiplexing mode may reset the BTS and affect the ongoing services on theBTS. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.

Multiplexing mode of Abis timeslots on a BTS is classified into 64 kbit/s statistical multiplexingmode and 16 kbit/s physical multiplexing mode. In addition, the 64 kbit/s statistical multiplexingmode is further classified into the following modes: 1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, and 6:1.

It is recommended that the BTS multiplexing mode be changed in the following situations:

l A channel is changed from full rate to half rate.

l A channel is changed from half rate to full rate.

l Flex Abis Mode is changed from FIX_16K_ABIS to FLEX_ABIS.

l Flex Abis Mode is changed from FLEX_ABIS to FIX_16K_ABIS.



5-3

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to change the multiplexing mode of a BTS.

Step 2 Optional: If the command execution in Step 1 fails, run the BSC6900 MML command ADDBTSCONNECT to add a connection to the BSC, and then repeat Step 1.

----End

Example// To add a connection to the BSC, run the following command: ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1;// To change the BTS multiplexing mode, run the following command: MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MPMODE=MODE4_1;

5.1.2 Changing the Abis Timeslot Assignment ModeWhen the traffic volume of a TDM-based BTS changes, the demand for Abis timeslots alsochanges. You can change the Abis timeslot assignment mode to maximize the utilization of Abistimeslot resources.


Context

CAUTIONWhen Flex Abis Mode is changed from FIX_16K_ABIS to FLEX_ABIS, the BTS is reset,thus affecting the BSC services.

When enabling or disabling the flex Abis function, you need to change the Abis timeslotassignment mode. The Abis timeslot modes are as follows:

l FIX_16K_ABIS

l FLEX_ABIS

l FIX_64K_ABIS

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to change the Abis timeslot assignment mode.

Step 2 Optional: If the command execution in Step 1 fails, run the BSC6900 MML command ADDBTSCONNECT to add a connection to the BSC, and then repeat Step 1.

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Example// To add a connection to the BSC, run the following command: ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1;// To change the Abis timeslot assignment mode, run the following command: MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS;

5.1.3 Manually Assigning the Abis TimeslotsThis describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot assignment onthe Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoringtimeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also manually assigntimeslots on the Abis interface if required.


Context

CAUTIONManually assigning Abis timeslots may reset the BTS and affect the ongoing services. Therefore,perform this operation with caution.Among the timeslots on the Abis interface, only the timeslot for OML can be assigned manually.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLTS to set Time Slot NO. and Sub TimeslotNo. for the OML of the BTS.

----End

Example// To set the OML timeslot distribution of a BTS, run the following command: SET BTSOMLTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PN=1, TS=31, SUBTS=0;

5.2 Changing a BTS from Non-Separated Mode to SeparatedMode

When a multi-transceiver unit is used in system capacity expansion, you need to change the BTSfrom the non-separated mode to the separated mode.




5-5

l The current BTS supports the separated mode and is configured with a multi-transceiverunit.

Context

CAUTIONOnly the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3012 II support this operation.

After this operation, the BTS is reset. Therefore, perform this operation with caution.

In non-separated mode, the binding between the TRX board and the logical TRX in a BTS isfixed. In separated mode, the binding between the TRX board and the logical TRX on a BTS isdynamic.

When a BTS is changed from the non-separated mode to the separated mode, a QTRU can beconfigured. In one QTRU, a physical TRX can be bound to six logical TRXs.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSPTMODE to change a BTS from non-separatedmode to separated mode.

----End

Example// To change a BTS from non-separated mode to separated mode, run the following command: SET BTSSPTMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2047;

5.3 Changing the Networking Mode of the 3900 Series BaseStations

Changing the networking mode of the 3900 series base stations consists of changing the RXUchain into an RXU ring and changing an RXU ring into an RXU chain.

5.3.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU RingTo improve the system reliability when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stationschanges, you can change RXU chains into an RXU ring.

5.3.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU ChainTo expand the system capacity when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes,you can split an RXU ring into an RXU chain.

5.3.1 Changing RXU Chains into an RXU RingTo improve the system reliability when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stationschanges, you can change RXU chains into an RXU ring.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


l There are idle ports on the GTMU.

Context

The 3900 series base stations consist of the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM,BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900B GSM, BTS3900E GSM, and BTS3900L GSM.Only the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, and BTS3900AGSM support this operation.

RXU chain and RXU ring indicate the networking modes of the BBUs and RRUs. The BTS3900GSM is taken as an example. Figure 5-1 shows an RXU chain and an RXU ring.

Figure 5-1 RXU ring and RXU chain examples

INSIDE OUTSIDE

UELP

INSIDE OUTSIDE

UELP

RXU Chain RXU ring

The RXU chain can be changed into an RXU ring in the following ways:

l Combining two RXU chains into an RXU ring

l Changing an RXU chain into an RXU ring

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command CBN BTSRXUCHAIN to combine two RXU chains intoan RXU ring or change an RXU chain into an RXU ring.

----End



5-7

Example// To change an RXU chain into an RXU ring, run the following command: CBN BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CHAINTORING=CHAINTORING, RCN1=0, TCN=0, TSRN=0, TSN=6, TPN=3;// To combine two RXU chains into an RXU ring, run the following command: CBN BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CHAINTORING=COMBINECHAINS, RCN1=0, RCN2=2;

5.3.2 Changing an RXU Ring into an RXU ChainTo expand the system capacity when the traffic volume of the 3900 series base stations changes,you can split an RXU ring into an RXU chain.

Prerequisitel The BTS is configured and works properly.l There is a breaking point in the RXU ring to be split.

ContextOnly the DBS3036, BTS3036, BTS3036A, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, and BTS3900AGSM support this operation.

RXU chain and RXU ring indicate the networking modes of the BBUs and RRUs. The BTS3900GSM is taken as an example. Figure 5-2 shows an RXU chain and an RXU ring.

Figure 5-2 RXU ring and RXU chain examples

INSIDE OUTSIDE

UELP

INSIDE OUTSIDE

UELP

RXU Chain RXU ring




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command SPT BTSRXUCHAIN to split an RXU ring into an RXUchain.

----End

Example// To split RXU ring 0 on a BTS named 3900 into an RXU chain at breaking point 1, run the following command: SPT BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="3900", RCN=0, SEPARATEPOS=1;

5.4 Changing the Combined Cabinets and Cabinet GroupsBetween BTSs

A single BTS cabinet has limited capacity. To deploy a site of high capacity, you can configurecombined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs.


Context

Combined cabinets and cabinet groups can be configured between BTSs to expand the capacityof a site. The common configurations of combined cabinets and cabinet groups are:

l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s. For details, see Table 5-1.l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3006Cs. For details, see Table 5-2.l Cabinet groups between a BTS3012 and a BTS312. For details, see Table 5-3.

Table 5-1 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3012

Cabinet Group No. Port No.

0 0~7

1 8~15

2 16~23

Table 5-2 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number of the BTS3006C


0 0–3 (connected to the BSC6900), 4–7(internal connection)




5-9



Table 5-3 Mapping between the cabinet group number and the port number when cabinet groupsare configured between the BTS3012 and BTS312


0 0~7

1 8~11

2 16~19

The configuration of the combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s is taken asan example.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to change the configuration ofcombined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTS3012s.

----End

Example// To change the combined cabinets and cabinet groups between BTSs, run the following command: ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=1;

5.5 Changing the Frequency HoppingFrequency hopping (FH) is a commonly used spread spectrum communication technology. It ischaracterized by strong anti-interference, strong anti-attenuation, and high security. Theapplication of FH in the GSM can reduce the interference and increase the system capacity.

5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FHThis section describes how to change none FH to RF FH.

5.5.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FHThis section describes how to change none FH to baseband FH.

5.5.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FHThis section describes how to change RF FH to baseband FH.

5.5.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FHThis section describes how to change baseband FH to RF FH.

5.5.5 Changing RF FH to None FH




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

This section describes how to change RF FH to none FH.

5.5.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FHThis section describes how to change baseband FH to none FH.

5.5.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FHThis section describes how to change the FH mode to hybrid FH.

5.5.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FHThis section describes how to change hybrid FH to none FH.

5.5.1 Changing None FH to RF FHThis section describes how to change none FH to RF FH.


l The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

ContextAfter the FH mode of a none FH cell is changed to RF FH, the system automatically changesthe FH mode of all the TRXs in the cell to RF FH.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step,set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, andFrequency. Note that RF_FH(RF_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode for the FH group.

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell.Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency HoppingMode of the cell to RF_FH(RF frequency hopping).

Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step,set TRX ID and Hop Type.

Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set Channel HopIndex and Channel MAIO.

NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must bedifferent.

Step 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.

----End

5.5.2 Changing None FH to Baseband FHThis section describes how to change none FH to baseband FH.



5-11

Prerequisitel The BTS is configured and supports baseband FH.l The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step,set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, andFrequency. Note that BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Modefor the FH group.

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell.Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency HoppingMode of the cell to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping).



NOTE



----End

5.5.3 Changing RF FH to Baseband FHThis section describes how to change RF FH to baseband FH.

Prerequisitel The BTS is configured and supports baseband FH.l The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP to modify the FH group of the cell.Note that BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode.

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of the cell.Specify the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency HoppingMode of the cell to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping).

Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step,set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that BaseBand_FH(Baseband_FH) needs to be selectedunder Hop Type for the TRX.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE



----End

5.5.4 Changing Baseband FH to RF FHThis section describes how to change baseband FH to RF FH.

Prerequisitel The BTS is configured and works properly.l The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP to modify the FH group of the cell.Note that RF_FH(RF FH) needs to be selected under Hop Mode.

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of the cell.Specify the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency HoppingMode of the cell to RF_FH(RF frequency hopping).

Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step,set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that RF_FH(RF Frequency Hopping) needs to be selectedunder Hop Type for the TRX.


NOTE



----End

5.5.5 Changing RF FH to None FHThis section describes how to change RF FH to none FH.

PrerequisiteNone

Procedure


Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELLMAGRP to remove the FH group of the cell.



5-13

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell.Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency HoppingMode of the cell to NO_FH(No frequency hopping).

Step 4 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. In this step,set TRX ID and Hop Type. Note that NO_FH(No Frequency Hopping) needs to be selectedunder Hop Type for the TRX.

Step 5 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel HopIndex to 255 and Channel MAIO to 0.


----End

5.5.6 Changing Baseband FH to None FHThis section describes how to change baseband FH to none FH.

PrerequisiteNone

Procedure







----End

5.5.7 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FHThis section describes how to change the FH mode to hybrid FH.

Prerequisitel The BTS is configured and works properly.l The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.

Procedure





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add an FH group. In this step,set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, andFrequency. Note that RF_FH(RF_FH) or BaseBand_FH(BaseBand_FH) needs to be selectedunder Hop Mode for the FH group. To add more FH groups, repeat this step.

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to configure the FH type of a cell.Select the cell to be configured by Cell Index or Cell Name and set Frequency HoppingMode of the cell to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid frequency hopping).



NOTE

l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must bedifferent.

l The Hop Mode of the FH group specified by the Channel Hop Index must be consistent with theHop Type.


----End

5.5.8 Changing Hybrid FH to None FHThis section describes how to change hybrid FH to none FH.

PrerequisiteNone

Procedure







----End

5.6 Adjusting the BTS Ring TopologyThis section describes how to change the non-ring topology to ring topology for a BTS.



5-15

Prerequisitel The EIUa/OIUa/PEUa board is configured.

l The BTSs are configured in non-ring topology.

l The BTSs must be in the chain topology, and port 1 of the upper-level BTS must beconnected to port 0 of the lower-level BTS.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to YES.

Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to set the ring topology attributesof the BTS.

----End

5.7 Adjusting the Multi-Carrier BTS StandardThis section describes how to adjust the multi-carrier BTS standard.

ContextBy default, the CLASS2 standard is used as the GSM multi-carrier BTS standard. If the CLASS0standard is recommended at a local site, adjust the standard accordingly.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the GSM multi-carrier BTS standard.In this step,

l set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).l Then adjust GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard as required.

----End

Example// To deactivate a BTS, run the following command: DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;// To set the parameters related to Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure, run the following command. Assume that the BTS index is 1 and that GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard needs to be set to CLASS0(Class0): SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, MCSTANDARD=CLASS0;

5.8 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Static IP Scenario)This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data in the scenario using static IPaddresses.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Prerequisitel The BTS is a 3900 series base station except the 3900B and 3900E.l The BTS software is not earlier than V100R009C00SPC079.l The physical connection is complete.

ContextAdjusting BTS connection data in the static IP scenario consists of the following typicalscenarios:l BTS data is reparented between BSCs.l BTS data is relocated within a BSC.

Procedurel BTS data is reparented between BSCs.

Figure 5-3 shows an example of how to adjust BTS connection data between BSCs.

Figure 5-3 Adjusting BTS connection data between BSCs

1. As Figure 5-3 shows, create the configuration data of BTS 1 at BSC 2. For details,see Configuring the BTS.

2. At BSC 1, deliver the created BTS 1 configuration data to BTS 1. For details, see5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data.



5-17

NOTE

l After receiving the configuration data from BSC 1, BTS 1 saves the data in the active area andthe original configuration data in the standby flash area.

l All the MML commands from the BSC belong to O&M commands. After the BTS is reset, theconfiguration data will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended that the data be delivered beforethe BTS is reparented.

l Before the BTS is reset, you are advised to check whether the delivered data is correct by runningthe related EXP command. For example, the EXP BTSIPRT command corresponds to the IMPBTSIPRT command.

l If the delivered data is different from the BTS 1 configuration data created at BSC 2, BTS 1 mayfail to connect to BSC 2 after being reset.

3. Reset BTS 1.

NOTE

l After BTS 1 is reset, it establishes a connection to BSC 2 by using the configuration data in theactive flash area.

l If BTS 1 cannot connect to BSC 2 by using the configuration data in the active area in a specifiedperiod of time, BTS 1 switches over the active and standby areas and then uses the originalconfiguration data to connect to BSC 1. The time of connection attempts can be set by specifyingRetry Number in the ACT BTSIMPDATA command. Each attempt lasts for 25 minutes.

l After BTS 1 is successfully connected to BSC 2, the configuration data in the standby area isdeleted once an OML is established. This avoids intermittent disruption of transmission. If atransmission fault occurs after data transmission returns to normal, solve the transmissionproblem immediately. Otherwise, the BTS configuration data cannot be rolled back.

4. Delete the BTS 1 configuration data from BSC 1.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to remove the BTS connectionsdata.

l BTS data is relocated within a BSC.

Figure 5-4 shows an example of how to adjust BTS connection data within a BSC. If theports are on different interface boards, the operation is the same.

Figure 5-4 Adjusting BTS connection data within a BSC

1. As Figure 5-4 shows, deliver data of BTS 1 connected to port 2 through port 1 to BTS1. For details, see 5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission Data.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

l After receiving the configuration data, BTS 1 saves the data in the active area and the originalconfiguration data in the standby flash area.

l All the MML commands from the BSC belong to O&M commands. After the BTS is reset, theconfiguration data will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended that the data be delivered beforethe BTS is relocated.

l Before the BTS is reset, you are advised to check whether the delivered data is correct by runningthe related EXP command. For example, the EXP BTSIPRT command corresponds to the IMPBTSIPRT command.

l If the delivered data is different from the adjusted BTS configuration data that is adjusted inStep 3, the BTS may fail to connect to the BSC after being reset.

2. Reset BTS 1.

NOTE

l After BTS 1 is reset, it establishes a connection to the BSC by using the configuration data inthe active area.

l If BTS 1 cannot connect to the BSC by using the configuration data in the active area in aspecified period of time, BTS 1 switches over the active and standby areas and then uses theoriginal configuration data to connect to the BSC. The time of connection attempts can be setby specifying Retry Number in the ACT BTSIMPDATA command. Each attempt lasts for 25minutes.

l After BTS 1 is successfully connected to the BSC, the configuration data in the standby area isdeleted once an OML is established. This avoids intermittent disruption of transmission. If atransmission fault occurs after data transmission returns to normal, solve the transmissionproblem immediately. Otherwise, the BTS configuration data cannot be rolled back.

3. Adjust BTS connection data. For the detailed operation procedure, see the procedurefor adjusting IP transmission in 5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-StaticIP Scenario).

----End

Follow-up Procedure1. Check whether any alarm is reported by the BTS after BTS connection data is adjusted. If

any alarm is reported, clear the alarm according to the alarm handling procedure.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to query the state of a specified LAPDlink. In this step, set Query type to ABIS(Abis Link).

The expected result: The status of all the links is normal. This indicates that the BTS worksproperly.

5.8.1 Delivering BTS Transmission DataThis section describes how to deliver BTS transmission data to the destination BSC6900 byrunning MML commands when static IP addresses are used.

Prerequisitel The BTS is a 3900 series base station except the 3900B and 3900E.

l The BTS software is not earlier than V100R009C00SPC079.

l The physical connection is complete.



5-19

ContextAccording to the transmission mode, the BTS data delivery can be classified into the followingscenarios:

l When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode

l When IP over E1 is used at a MP site

l When IP over E1 is used at a PPP site

Procedurel When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPPARA to deliver basic IP parametersof the BTS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSDEVIP to deliver the IP address of theBTS Ethernet port.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSIPRT to deliver the BTS route.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSVLAN to deliver the BTS VLAN.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIMPDATA to activate the delivereddata.

l When IP over E1 is used at a MP site


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSMPGRP to deliver the BTS MLPPP(MP) group data.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSMPLNK to deliver the BTS MP linkdata.



l When IP over E1 is used at a PPP site


2. Run the BSC6900 MML command IMP BTSPPPLNK to deliver parameters relatedto the BTS PPP link.



----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the BTS data is delivered and activated, you need to reset the BTS to make the delivereddata take effect.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5.9 Adjusting BTS Connection Data (Non-Static IPScenario)

This section describes how to adjust BTS connection data within a BSC6900 in the scenariousing non-static IP addresses.

Prerequisitel The physical connection is modified.l There are idle ports on the target BTS.l The target BSC6900 port is available.

Contextl According to the transmission mode, adjustment of BTS connection data can be classified

into the following scenarios:– When the BTS uses the TDM/HDLC transmission mode– When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode– When the BTS uses the IP over E1 transmission mode

l If a BTS needs to be adjusted as a lower-level BTS in TDM transmission, it must beconnected to the EIUa/OIUa board through the active port of the upper-level BTS.

l If a BTS needs to be adjusted as a lower-level BTS in HDLC transmission, it must beconnected to the PEUa board through the active port of the upper-level BTS.

l A BTS in IP transmission mode cannot be configured as a lower-level BTS under anotherBTS.

l If a BTS needs to be adjusted as a lower-level BTS, a maximum of seven cascading levelsare allowed.

Procedurel When the BTS uses the TDM/HDLC transmission mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to modify the

transmission connection data on the BTS side.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

l When the BTS uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT to set the

Ethernet port attributes of the BTS if necessary.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the BTS.4. Optional: When the BSC6900 and the BTS are on different network segments, run

the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSIPRT to modify the IP route on the BTSside.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSVLAN to modify the VLANID and VLAN priority on the BTS side if necessary.



5-21

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.l When the BTS uses the IP over E1 transmission mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT to modify the

transmission connection data on the BTS side.3. Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link group).

If the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link is...

Then...

PPP link Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD BTSPPPLNK to modify the PPPlink on the BTS side.

MLPPP link group 1. Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD BTSMPGRP to modify theMLPPP link group on the BTS side.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD BTSMPLNK to modify thePPP link of the BTS if necessary.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the BTS.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to reconfigure the running base station subsystem (BSS) as required.

6.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters of Multiple Cells in BatchesTo modify the settings of the network optimization parameters such as frequencies, powercontrol parameters, and power levels of multiple cells at the same time, batch configuration canbe applied.

6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A InterfaceWhen the traffic of the BSC6900 increases, the existing signaling links may not meet the trafficload requirement. In this case, the narrowband signaling links at 64 kbit/s can be adjusted to thehigh-speed signaling links at 2 Mbit/s.

6.3 Reconfiguring a CellYou can modify the cell parameter settings and the neighboring cell relations according to therequirements of service adjustment and capacity expansion.

6.4 Reconfiguring ChannelsWhen new features, such as half rate and dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs, areactivated on the BSC, you can modify channel attributes to optimize network performance.

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 6 Reconfiguring the GSM Network


6-1

6.1 Configuring the Network Optimization Parameters ofMultiple Cells in Batches

To modify the settings of the network optimization parameters such as frequencies, powercontrol parameters, and power levels of multiple cells at the same time, batch configuration canbe applied.

Prerequisitel The LMT runs normally.l The LMT communicates with the BSC properly.l The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

ContextBatch configuration of network optimization parameters of multiple cells improves theconfiguration efficiency.

Procedure

Step 1 Get ready the command script of configuring the network optimization parameters of multiplecells in batches, and save the script in the .txt format to the local PC.

Step 2 Run the LCK CMCTRL command to lock the system configuration rights.

NOTE

Before the batch execution of the command script, lock the configuration rights to prevent the conflict withother commands.

Step 3 Run the RUN BATCHFILE command to execute the command script in batches.

Step 4 Run the ULK CMCTRL command to release the system configuration rights.

----End

Example/*Lock the system configuration rights*/

LCK CMCTRL: RSNDES=UPGRADE;

/*Execute the command script bat.txt in batches and save the result to the file rst.txt*/

RUN BATCHFILE:SRCF="bat.txt",TYPE=ALL_END_RETURN,RSTF="rst.txt",RCDT=REC_ERR;

/*Release the system configuration rights*/

ULK CMCTRL:;

6 Reconfiguring the GSM NetworkGBSS



Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

6.2 Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the AInterface

When the traffic of the BSC6900 increases, the existing signaling links may not meet the trafficload requirement. In this case, the narrowband signaling links at 64 kbit/s can be adjusted to thehigh-speed signaling links at 2 Mbit/s.

Prerequisitel Network planning is complete.

l The MSC supports the signaling data rate of 2 Mbit/s.

l The TDM transmission mode is applied over the A interface.

l The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.

l The license for the high-speed signaling link is activated.

Context

A license is required to activate the high-speed signaling link feature.

The high-speed signaling link refers to the 2 Mbit/s signaling link. Compared with the 64 kbit/s signaling link, the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots; thus, the signalingtransmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced.

Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmissiondoes not use high-speed signaling links.

CAUTIONReconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will interrupt the services of theBSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is low, for example, in the earlymorning.

The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.

NOTE

The signaling link rate over the A interface must be negotiated between the BSC6900 and MSC.

After adjusting the signaling link rate over the A interface, you must adjust the signaling link rate at theMSC. For details about the configuration at the MSC, see relevant documents of the MSC.

Procedurel Reconfiguring the Signaling Link Data Rate over the A Interface

1. Run the LST MTP3LNK command to query the configuration data of an MTP3signaling link over the A interface.

2. Run the RMV MTP3LNK command to remove the MTP3 signaling link.



6-3

CAUTIONl Removing the signaling link over the A interface will interrupt the services of the

BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is low, for example,in the early morning.

l The rates of the A interface signaling links in the same link set must be identical.If the rate of one signaling link must be changed from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s, all thesignaling links in the link set must be deleted. In addition, the A interface signalinglinks in the same link set must be configured with the same.

3. Run the ADD MTP3LNK command to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, setLink Bear type to MTP2.– To set the data rate of the MTP3 signaling link to 2 Mbit/s, set Link rate type to

2M(2Mbit/s).– To set the data rate of the MTP3 signaling link to 64 kbit/s, set Link rate type to

64k(kbit/s).

In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised toset Ater Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to other values ratherthan TS1.

4. Run the RST BRD command to reset the interface board that handles MTP2. Theboard is the Ater interface board (BM/TC separated) or the A interface board (BM/TC combined) in the BM subrack to which the SS7 signaling link belongs.

When the EIUa/OIUa is in active/standby mode, reset the standby EIUa/OIUa beforeresetting the active EIUa/OIUa.

l Verifying the High-Speed Signaling Links1. Run the LST MTP3LNK command to query the configuration of an MTP3 signaling

link. The Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.2. Run the DSP N7DPC command to query the status of an SS7 DSP.

– If the SCCP DSP state included in the returned message is Available, the DSP isreachable, and the newly established signaling link can function properly.

– If the SCCP DSP state included in the returned message is Unavailable, the newlyestablished signaling link cannot function properly. In this case, check the timeslotsettings at the BSC6900 and MSC by referring to the alarm reference on the LMT.

----End

ExampleLST MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=3, SIGSLC=0; RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=3, SIGSLC=0; ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=3, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=14, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=16, ATSMASK=TS6-0, LKTATE=2M, NAME="name1"; RST BRD: SRN=0, SN=14, SSN=0; DSP N7DPC: DPX=1, TOSPECSSN=NO;

6.3 Reconfiguring a CellYou can modify the cell parameter settings and the neighboring cell relations according to therequirements of service adjustment and capacity expansion.

6.3.1 Changing the TRX Power




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

You can change the TRX power in a cell when the cell coverage needs to be adjusted accordingto network optimization.

6.3.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a CellTo balance traffic load in different cells under one BTS without adding TRXs, you can releasethe TRX resources in a low-traffic cell, and then assign the TRX resources to a high-traffic cell.

6.3.3 Changing TRX FrequenciesWhen co-channel interference or adjacent-channel interference is generated in a cell, or whenfrequency replanning is required in the network, you need to change the TRX frequencies.

6.3.4 Changing Neighboring Cell RelationsWhen a cell has redundant neighboring cells or missing neighboring cells, traffic imbalance mayoccur among cells. Therefore, you need to change the neighboring cell relations. If call dropsoccur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you can modify thesettings of neighboring cell relation parameters.

6.3.1 Changing the TRX PowerYou can change the TRX power in a cell when the cell coverage needs to be adjusted accordingto network optimization.

Prerequisitel The LMT runs normally.

l The LMT communicates with the BSC properly.

l The BTS communicates with the BSC properly.

Context

CAUTIONChanging the TRX power in a cell may affect the ongoing calls in the cell. Therefore, performthis operation with caution.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the SET GTRXDEV command to change the TRX power in a cell.

----End

ExampleSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=5;

6.3.2 Changing TRX Assignment in a CellTo balance traffic load in different cells under one BTS without adding TRXs, you can releasethe TRX resources in a low-traffic cell, and then assign the TRX resources to a high-traffic cell.



6-5


Context

CAUTIONIf timeslots are insufficient after TRXs are added to a cell, run the TID BTSABISTS commandto arrange timeslots. Running this command affects the services of the BTS that serves the celland the services of the lower-level BTSs.After a TRX is removed, the TRX board does not work. After the last TRX of a cabinet groupwithout any configuration data is removed, the cabinet group does not exist in the LMT.The BCCH TRX board cannot be removed.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the RMV GTRX command to remove the logical TRX in a low-traffic cell.

Step 2 Run the ADD GTRX command to add a logical TRX.

Step 3 Run the ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD command to bind the new logical TRX with the TRXboard.

Step 4 Run the ACT GTRX command to activate the new logical TRX.

----End

Example

/*Remove a TRX*/

RMV GTRX: TRXID=0;

/*Add a logical TRX*/

ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=0, FREQ=49;

/*Bind the logical TRX with the TRX board*/

ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=0, SN=0;

/*Activate the new logical TRX*/

ACT GTRX: TRXID=0;

6.3.3 Changing TRX FrequenciesWhen co-channel interference or adjacent-channel interference is generated in a cell, or whenfrequency replanning is required in the network, you need to change the TRX frequencies.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)




ContextNOTE

If you change the TRX frequencies that do not participate in frequency hopping, the cell is not reset. If youchange the TRX frequencies that participate in frequency hopping or the BCCH TRX frequency, the cellis reset 10 seconds later. That is, the BSC6900 resets the cell 10 seconds after frequencies are changed. Ifthe services in the cell are not handed over to another cell within 10 seconds, the services in the cell areaffected.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the ADD GCELLFREQ command to add a TRX frequency based on the network planning.

Step 2 Run the MOD GTRX command to change the TRX frequencies.

----End

ExampleADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=50, FREQ2=75; MOD GTRX: TRXID=0, FREQ=50;

6.3.4 Changing Neighboring Cell RelationsWhen a cell has redundant neighboring cells or missing neighboring cells, traffic imbalance mayoccur among cells. Therefore, you need to change the neighboring cell relations. If call dropsoccur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, you can modify thesettings of neighboring cell relation parameters.




Context

Redundant neighboring cell: If cell A is a neighboring cell of cell B but the services in cell Bare never or rarely handed over to cell A, cell A is a redundant neighboring cell.

Missing neighboring cell: If cell A needs to have cell B as its neighboring cell for servicehandover but cell B is not configured as a neighboring cell of cell A, cell B is a missingneighboring cell.

Through the analysis of related performance measurement counters, you can determine whethera cell is a redundant neighboring cell or missing neighboring cell of the originating cell.



6-7

l You can determine whether a cell is a redundant neighboring cell of the originating cell bymeasuring the counters related to Outgoing Internal Inter-Cell Handover Measurementper Cell.

l You can determine whether a cell is a missing neighboring cell of the originating cell bymeasuring the counters related to Neighbor Cell Level Measurement per Cell.

Procedurel If a cell has redundant bidirectional neighboring cells, remove them from the neighboring

cell list of the cell.1. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove a redundant neighboring cell.

NOTE

Running this command can add or remove the neighboring cell only in the originating cell. Forredundant bidirectional neighboring cells, you need to perform Step 1 in the originating celland the neighboring cell.

l If a cell has redundant unidirectional neighboring cells, remove them from the neighboringcell list of the originating cell.1. Run the RMV G2GNCELL command to remove the redundant neighboring 2G cells.2. Run the RMV G3GNCELL command to remove the redundant neighboring 3G cells.

l If there is a missing bidirectional neighboring cell, add it to the neighboring cell list of theoriginating cell.1. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 2G cell.

l If there is a missing unidirectional neighboring cell, add it to the neighboring cell list ofthis cell.1. Run the ADD G2GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 2G cell.2. Run the ADD G3GNCELL command to add a missing neighboring 3G cell.

l If call drops occur frequently during call handover from a cell to a neighboring cell, youneed to modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring cell relations.1. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command to modify the settings of the parameters related

to neighbor relations between 2G cells.2. Run the MOD G3GNCELL command to modify the settings of the parameters related

to neighbor relations between 3G cells.

----End

Example/*Remove redundant bidirectional neighboring cells*/

RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=0;

/*Remove redundant unidirectional neighboring cells*/

RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; RMV G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;

/*Add missing bidirectional neighboring cells*/

ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=0;

/*Add missing unidirectional neighboring cells*/




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;

/*Modify the settings of the parameters related to neighboring cell relations*/

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, MINOFFSET=5; MOD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRC3GNCELLNAME="cell1", NBR3GNCELLNAME="TDD-0", RSCPOFF=52, ECNOOFF=35;

6.4 Reconfiguring ChannelsWhen new features, such as half rate and dynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs, areactivated on the BSC, you can modify channel attributes to optimize network performance.

6.4.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHsYou can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between the TCH and theSDCCH and to optimize network performance.

6.4.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half RateYou can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between full-rate TCHsand half-rate TCHs and thus to optimize network performance.

6.4.1 Converting TCHs and SDCCHsYou can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between the TCH and theSDCCH and to optimize network performance.


ContextWhen the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to accessthe network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, you need to convert some TCHsto SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network.

When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs. Thedynamic conversion between TCHs and SDCCHs can increase the system capacity.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

to YES.

Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command to set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 and TCHMinimum Recovery Time.

----End

Example//Set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES//SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDDYN=YES;



6-9

//Set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 to 3, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum to 100, and TCH Minimum Recovery Time to 80//SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IDLESDTHRES=3, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=80;

6.4.2 Converting TCHs Between Full Rate and Half RateYou can modify channel attributes to achieve the dynamic conversion between full-rate TCHsand half-rate TCHs and thus to optimize network performance.


ContextWhen the traffic volume increases, the half-rate feature can be applied to the CS service to doublethe number of users without adding TRXs. This helps to fully utilize the existing networkresources and reduce costs.

When the half-rate CS feature is activated, you need to set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed toYES to avoid timeslot arrangement for half-rate TCHs.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the SET GTRXDEV command to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES.

Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command to set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold.

Step 3 Run the SET GCELLCHMGBASIC command to set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed toYES.

----End

Example/*Set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES*/

SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;

/*Set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold*/

SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=60;

/*Set Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed to YES*/

SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTCHADJALLOW=YES;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7 Configuring GBSS Features

About This Chapter

This section describes how to configure the features of the GBSS.

7.1 Overview of Feature ConfigurationGBSS features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Optional features arelicense-controlled and therefore require license activation before use.

7.2 Activating the GSM LicenseThis describes how to activate the GSM license.

7.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202Emergency Call Service (TS12).

7.4 Configuring IMSI DetachThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302IMSI Detach.

7.5 Configuring HUAWEI I HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601HUAWEI I Handover.

7.6 Configuring Directed RetryThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607Directed Retry.

7.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate AssignmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502Assignment and Immediate Assignment.

7.8 Configuring Call ReestablishmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503Call Reestablishment.

7.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501TCH Re-assignment.

GBSSReconfiguration Guide 7 Configuring GBSS Features


7-1

7.10 Configuring Radio Link ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedureof the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature donot need to be configured.

7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSsThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.

7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU FailureThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.

7.13 Configuring System Information SendingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101System Information Sending.

7.14 Configuring Daylight Saving TimeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight SavingTime (DST).

7.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic AdjustmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.

7.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806Signaling Transport Point (STP).

7.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point CodeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-11180214-Digit Signaling Point Code.

7.18 Configuring DRXThis section describes how to configure and verify the DRX.

7.19 Configuring BTS Power ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601BTS Power Management.

7.20 Configuring Connection with TMAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).

7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical TiltThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602Remote Electrical Tilt.

7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive DiversityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-2106042-Antenna Receive Diversity.

7.23 Configuring BTS ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501BTS Clock.

7.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).

7 Configuring GBSS FeaturesGBSS



Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115901 PBT(PowerBoost Technology).

7.26 Configuring Transmit DiversityThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115902 TransmitDiversity.

7.27 Configuring 4-Way Receiver DiversityThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115903 4-WayReceive Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines the 4-way receive signals to optimizethe quality of uplink signals.

7.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit DiversityThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118101 DynamicTransmit Diversity.

7.29 Configuring Dynamic PBTThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118102 DynamicPBT.

7.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE CoverageThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104Enhanced EDGE Coverage.

7.31 Configuring Extended CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001Extended Cell.

7.32 Configuring Concentric CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201Concentric Cell.

7.33 Configuring Co-BCCH CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501Co-BCCH Cell.

7.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114401Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

7.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band NetworkThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402Enhanced Dual-Band Network.

7.36 Configuring Flex MAIOThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001Flex MAIO.

7.37 Configuring ICCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801ICC.

7.38 Configuring EICCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821EICC.

7.39 Configuring Frequency Hopping



7-3

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 FrequencyHopping. The function consists of radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping (FH) and basebandFH.

7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency HoppingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.

7.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency HoppingThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna FrequencyHopping.

7.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency MultiplexingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.

7.43 Configuring IBCAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).

7.44 Configuring Soft-Synchronized NetworkThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201Soft-Synchronized Network.

7.45 Configuring BTS GPS SynchronizationThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPSSynchronization.

7.46 Configuring Synchronous EthernetThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202Synchronous Ethernet.

7.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control AlgorithmThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.

7.48 Configuring DTXThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801DTX.

7.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent ShutdownThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.

7.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot LevelThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.

7.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner BypassThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604Intelligent Combiner Bypass.

7.52 Configuring Active Backup Power ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605Active Backup Power Control.

7.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel TypeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.54 Configuring PSU Smart ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608PSU Smart Control.

7.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption OptimizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.

7.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power OffThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610Dynamic Cell Power Off.

7.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage AdjustmentThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111611 Configuring TRXWorking Voltage Adjustment.

7.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage AdjustmentThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-CarrierIntelligent Voltage Adjustment.

7.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111613Weather Adaptive Power Management.

7.60 Configuring Flex AbisThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301Flex Abis.

7.61 Configuring BTS Local SwitchThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS LocalSwitch.

7.62 Configuring Abis Transmission OptimizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401Abis Transmission Optimization.

7.63 Configuring Flex AterThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Flex Ater.

7.64 Configuring BSC Local SwitchThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701BSC Local Switch.

7.65 Configuring Ater Compression TransmissionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902Ater Compression Transmission.

7.66 Configuring BTS Ring TopologyThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117801 BTS RingTopology.

7.67 Configuring TRX Mutual AidThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801TRX Mutual Aid.

7.68 Configuring MSC PoolThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401MSC Pool.



7-5

7.69 Configuring the SGSN PoolThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

7.70 Configuring Abis BypassThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601Abis Bypass.

7.71 Configuring Abis Transmission BackupThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803Abis Transmission Backup.

7.72 Configuring BSC Node RedundancyThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725BSC Node Redundancy.

7.73 Configuring TC PoolThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDMtransmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.

7.74 Configuring OML BackupThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728OML Backup. When the OML backup function of the BTS is enabled, the BTS is automaticallyswitched to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML is disconnected, thereforereducing the duration of service disruption.

7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).

7.76 Configuring Fast Move HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102Fast Move Handover.

7.77 Configuring Chain Cell HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103Chain Cell Handover.

7.78 Configuring Multi-Site CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104Multi-Site Cell.

7.79 Configuring GSM/WCDMA InteroperabilityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

7.80 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA InteroperabilityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.

7.81 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.

7.82 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322GSM/ WCDMA Load Based Handover.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS StateThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-1143232G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.

7.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call ReleaseThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114325Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

7.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.

7.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902Satellite Transmission over A Interface.

7.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.

7.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113904Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.

7.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.

7.90 Configuring High Speed SignalingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115201High Speed Signaling.

7.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling PointsThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301Local Multiple Signaling Points.

7.92 Configuring Semi-Permanent ConnectionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701Semi-Permanent Connection.

7.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling TracingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.

7.94 Configuring Active Power ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602Active Power Control.

7.95 Configuring CipheringThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate ciphering.

7.96 Configuring Speech VersionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the speech version.

7.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HRThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.

7.98 Configuring the Cell Broadcast



7-7

Through the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messagesin the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells canreceive the short messages.

7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601Automatic Level Control (ALC).

7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).

7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).

7.102 Configuring TFOThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701TFO (Tandem Free Operation).

7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).

7.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).

7.105 Configuring Voice Quality IndexThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801Voice Quality Index.

7.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement ReportThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report.

7.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR AdaptationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.

7.108 Configuring VQE3.0Voice Quality Enhancement 3.0 (VQE3.0) is a feature set that contains five voice qualityenhancing features: Automatic Level Control (ALC), Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC),Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Anti-clip(ACLP). The five features improve the user experience when A over TDM transmission isapplied.

7.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User ExperienceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115707KPIs Based on User Experience.

7.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive AdjustmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.

7.111 Configuring WB AMRThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507WB AMR.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.112 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901Streaming QoS(GBR).

7.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902QoS ARP&THP.

7.114 Configuring PS Active Package ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904PS Active Package Management.

7.115 Configuring PoC QoSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905PoC QoS.

7.116 Configuring PS Service in PriorityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907PS Service in Priority.

7.117 Configuring NC2This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional featureGBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).

7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC).

7.119 Configuring GPRSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101GPRS.

7.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode IThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001Network Operation Mode I.

7.121 Configuring EGPRSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201EGPRS.

7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS AccessThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-11920111-Bit EGPRS Access.

7.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.

7.124 Configuring Packet Channel DispatchingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302Packet Channel Dispatching.

7.125 Configuring BSS Paging CoordinationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305BSS Paging Coordination.

7.126 Configuring PS HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502PS Handover.



7-9

7.127 Configuring PS Power ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504PS Power Control.

7.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two ThresholdsThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.

7.129 Configuring EDAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).

7.130 Configuring DTMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151DTM.

7.131 Configuring Class11 DTMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403Class11 DTM.

7.132 Configuring HMC DTMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404HMC DTM.

7.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched DataThis chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/sCircuit Switched Data.

7.134 Configuring Resource ReservationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001Resource Reservation.

7.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).

7.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency CallThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521Guaranteed Emergency Call.

7.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell PriorityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.

7.138 Configuring Network Support SAICThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103Network Support SAIC.

7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).

7.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).

7.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.142 Configuring Lb InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404Lb Interface.

7.143 Configuring Abis over IPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601Abis over IP.

7.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611Abis IP over E1/T1.

7.145 Configuring Abis MUXThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604Abis MUX.

7.146 Configuring A over IPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602A over IP.

7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1.

7.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A TransmissionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610UDP MUX for A Transmission.

7.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.

7.150 Configuring Gb over IPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603Gb over IP.

7.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFDThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118609IP Fault detection based on BFD.

7.152 Configuring Ethernet OAMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630Ethernet OAM.

7.153 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and PlanningThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS AutomaticConfiguration and Planning.

7.154 Configuring PICO SynchronizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602PICO Synchronization.

7.155 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planningThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.

7.156 Configuring PICO USB Encryption



7-11

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604PICO USB Encryption.

7.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping ModeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606PICO Sleeping Mode.

7.158 Configuring PICO Automatic OptimizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607PICO Automatic Optimization.

7.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity PlanningThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.

7.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and OptimizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.

7.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power OffThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705Compact BTS Timing Power Off.

7.162 Configuring Local User ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706Local User Management.

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate VGCS/VBS.

7.164 Configuring GSM-T RelayThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310GSM-T Relay.

7.165 Configuring HUAWEI II HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501HUAWEI II Handover.

7.166 Configuring Handover Re-establishmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502Handover Re-establishment.

7.167 Configuring RAN SharingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701RAN Sharing.

7.168 Configuring MOCN Shared CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702MOCN Shared Cell.

7.169 Configuring IMSI-Based HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703IMSI-Based Handover.

7.170 Configuring MSRDThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).

7.171 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).

7.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-AThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.

7.173 Configuring Latency ReductionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805Latency Reduction.

7.174 Configuring License Control for UrgencyThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511001License Control for Urgency.

7.175 Configuring Access Control ClassThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002Access Control Class(ACC).

7.176 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-gThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.

7.177 Configuring NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS.

7.178 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-gThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

7.179 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-gThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

7.180 Configuring GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT PriorityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511206GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority.

7.181 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTEThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.

7.182 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on CoverageThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

7.183 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on QualityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.

7.184 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell LoadThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.

7.185 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTEThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.



7-13

7.186 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTEThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted CellChange.

7.187 Configuring SRVCCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).

7.188 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.

7.189 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based onIur-gThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.

7.190 Configuring Multiple CCCHsThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501Multiple CCCHs.

7.191 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).

7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).

7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).

7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.1 Overview of Feature ConfigurationGBSS features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Optional features arelicense-controlled and therefore require license activation before use.

Table 7-1 lists the GBSS basic features. Table 7-2 lists the GBSS optional features.

Table 7-1 GBSS Basic Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 SystemImprovement

None

GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 SystemImprovement

None

GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance None

GBFD-110101 Frequency Band None

GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11) None

GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service(TS12)

7.3 ConfiguringEmergency Call Service(TS12)

GBFD-110203 Point To Point ShortMessage Service (TS21,TS22)

None

GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) None

GBFD-110205 Bearer Service None

GBFD-110301 Location Updating None

GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach 7.4 Configuring IMSIDetach

GBFD-110303 CS Paging None

GBFD-110304 Authentication None

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover 7.5 Configuring HUAWEII Handover

GBFD-110607 Direct Retry 7.6 Configuring DirectedRetry

GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover None

GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection None

GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection None



7-15


GBFD-110501 Call Control None

GBFD-110502 Assignment and ImmediateAssignment

7.7 ConfiguringAssignment and ImmediateAssignment

GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment 7.8 Configuring CallReestablishment

GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment 7.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignment

GBFD-111001 TRX Management None

GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management 7.10 Configuring RadioLink Management

GBFD-111003 Radio Common ChannelManagement

None

GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated ChannelManagement

None

GBFD-111005 Enhanced ChannelAssignment Algorithm

None

MRFD-210301 Configuration Management None

MRFD-210302 Performance Management None

MRFD-210303 Inventory Management None

MRFD-210304 Faulty Management None

MRFD-210305 Security Management None

MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance None

MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USBDownload

None

GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS None

GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC None

GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function None

GBFD-111210 Integrated NetworkManagement Interface

None

GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language(MML)

None

MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC SoftwareManagement

None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB SoftwareManagement

None

GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of theBSC&BTS Software

None

MRFD-210403 License Management None

GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet 7.11 ConfiguringCombined Cabinets andCabinet Groups of BTSs

GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group 7.11 ConfiguringCombined Cabinets andCabinet Groups of BTSs

GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/SubrackSharing

None

MRFD-210204 Star Topology None

MRFD-210205 Chain Topology None

MRFD-210206 Tree Topology None

GBFD-111701 Board Switchover None

GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control None

GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance None

GBFD-111214 Operation & MaintenanceSystem One-Key Recovery

None

GBFD-111211 Reporting the TemperatureList of the BTS EquipmentRoom

None

MRFD-210101 System Redundancy None

MRFD-210102 Operate System SecurityManagement

None

MRFD-210103 Link aggregation None

MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing None

GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRXDue to PSU Failure

7.12 ConfiguringIntelligent Shutdown ofTRX Due to PSU Failure

GBFD-110901 Adjustment of AdaptiveTiming Advance

None

GBFD-110801 Processing of MeasurementReport

None



7-17


GBFD-110802 Pre-processing ofMeasurement Report

None

GBFD-111101 System Information Sending 7.13 Configuring SystemInformation Sending

GBFD-111102 Forced System InformationSending by OMC

None

GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-DigitMNC

None

GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight SavingTime

7.14 Configuring DaylightSaving Time

GBFD-113001 SDCCH DynamicAdjustment

7.15 Configuring SDCCHDynamic Adjustment

GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan None

GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling TransportPoint)

7.16 Configuring SignalingTransport Point (STP)

GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling PointCode

7.17 Configuring 14-DigitSignaling Point Code

MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing None

MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing None

GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing None

GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at AbisInterface

None

GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception(DRX)

7.18 Configuring DRX

GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management 7.19 Configuring BTSPower Management

GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power ControlAlgorithm

None

GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1Multiplexing

None

GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function None

GBFD-111803 A Interface CircuitManagement

None

GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process None

GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation RateMonitoring

None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


GBFD-119101 Packet Channel CombinationType

None

GBFD-119102 Packet System Information None

GBFD-119103 MS Types None

GBFD-119104 MAC Mode None

GBFD-119105 RLC Mode None

GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme None

GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode None

GBFD-119108 Network Operation ModeSupport

None

GBFD-119109 QoS(Best Effort) None

GBFD-119110 Access None

GBFD-119111 Assignment None

GBFD-119112 PS Paging None

GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update None

GBFD-119115 Power Control None

GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control None

GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface None

MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA(Tower Mounted Amplifier)

7.20 ConfiguringConnection with TMA

MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt 7.21 Configuring RemoteElectrical Tilt

MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity 7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity

MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock 7.23 Configuring BTSClock

MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock None

GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis None

MRFD-210701 Documentation None

MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS CommonCPRI Interface(GBTS)

7.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRIInterface (GBTS)



7-19


MRFD-210002 Multi-mode BS RRU/RFUstar-connection with separateCPRI interface(GBTS)

None

Table 7-2 GBSS Optional Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name LicenseControl Item

LicenseConfiguredon...

ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115901 PBT(PowerBoostTechnology)

Multi-transceiverssupporting PBTtransmitResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.25ConfiguringPBT(PowerBoostTechnology)

GBFD-115902 TransmitDiversity

Multi-transceiverssupportingdiversitytransmitResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.26ConfiguringTransmitDiversity

GBFD-115903 4-Way ReceiverDiversity

Multi-transceiverssupporting 4-way receivediversityResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.27Configuring 4-Way ReceiverDiversity

GBFD-118101 DynamicTransmitDiversity

Dynamic PBTResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.28ConfiguringDynamicTransmitDiversity

GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT(Power BoostTechnology)

Dynamic PBTResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.29ConfiguringDynamic PBT

GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGECoverage

EnhancedEDGECoverage(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.30ConfiguringEnhancedEDGECoverage




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-114001 Extended Cell Extended cellResource (perCell)

BSC6900 7.31ConfiguringExtended Cell

GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell Concentric CellFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.32ConfiguringConcentricCell

GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell Co-BCCH CellFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.33ConfiguringCo-BCCH Cell

GBFD-114401 Multi-bandSharing OneBSC

Multi-bandsharing oneBSC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.34ConfiguringMulti-bandSharing OneBSC

GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network

Enhanced Dual-Band NetworkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.35ConfiguringEnhancedDual-BandNetwork

GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO Flex MAIOFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.36ConfiguringFlex MAIO

GBFD-115801 ICC ICC(InferenceCounteractCombine)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.37ConfiguringICC

GBFD-115821 EICC the EICCFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.38ConfiguringEICC

GBFD-113701 FrequencyHopping (RFhopping,basebandhopping)

FrequencyHoppingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.39ConfiguringFrequencyHopping

GBFD-113702 BCCH CarrierFrequencyHopping

BCCH CarrierFrequencyHoppingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.40ConfiguringBCCH CarrierFrequencyHopping



7-21



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-113703 AntennaFrequencyHopping

AntennaFrequencyHoppingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.41ConfiguringAntennaFrequencyHopping

GBFD-118001 BCCH DenseFrequencyMultiplexing

BCCH DenseFrequencyMultiplexingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.42ConfiguringBCCH DenseFrequencyMultiplexing

GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSMFrequency Band

E-GSM and R-GSM RF BandFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117002 IBCA(InterferenceBased ChannelAllocation)

IBCA Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.43ConfiguringIBCA

GBFD-118201 Soft-SynchronizedNetwork

SoftSynchronization Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.44ConfiguringSoft-SynchronizedNetwork

GBFD-510401 BTS GPSSynchronization

BTS GPSSynchronization Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.45ConfiguringBTS GPSSynchronization

GBFD-118606 Clock over IP Clock over IPFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-118620 Clock over IPsupport 1588v2

Clock over IPsupport 1588V2Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-118202 SynchronousEthernet

SynchronousEthernet(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.46ConfiguringSynchronousEthernet




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-117601 HUAWEI IIIPower ControlAlgorithm

Huawei IIIPower ControlAlgorithm(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.47ConfiguringHUAWEI IIIPower ControlAlgorithm

GBFD-114801 DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)-Downlink

DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)DownlinkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.48ConfiguringDTX

GBFD-114803 DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX)-Uplink

DiscontinuousTransmission(DTX) UplinkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.48ConfiguringDTX

GBFD-111602 TRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown

DynamicShutdown TrxPA Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.49ConfiguringTRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown

GBFD-111603 TRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown onTimeslot Level

Time slotIntelligentPowerOptimizationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.50ConfiguringTRX PowerAmplifierIntelligentShutdown onTimeslot Level

GBFD-111604 IntelligentCombinerBypass

IntelligentCombinerBypassFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.51ConfiguringIntelligentCombinerBypass

GBFD-111605 Active BackupPower Control

Active BackupPower ControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.52ConfiguringActive BackupPower Control

GBFD-111606 PowerOptimizationBased onChannel Type

PowerOptimizationBased onChannel TypeFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.53ConfiguringPowerOptimizationBased onChannel Type



7-23



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-111608 PSU SmartControl

PSU SmartControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.54ConfiguringPSU SmartControl

GBFD-111609 EnhancedBCCH PowerConsumptionOptimization

EnhancedBCCH PowerConsumptionOptimizationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.55ConfiguringEnhancedBCCH PowerConsumptionOptimization

GBFD-111610 Dynamic CellPower Off

Dynamic CellPower OffFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.56ConfiguringDynamic CellPower Off

GBFD-111611 TRX WorkingVoltageAdjustment

TRX WorkingVoltageAdjustmentFunction(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.57ConfiguringTRX WorkingVoltageAdjustment

GBFD-111612 Multi-CarrierIntelligentVoltageRegulation

Multi-CarrierIntelligentVoltageFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.58ConfiguringMulti-CarrierIntelligentVoltageAdjustment

GBFD-111613 WeatherAdaptive PowerManagement

WeatherAdaptive PowerManagement(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.59ConfiguringWeatherAdaptivePowerManagement

GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL andOML on A-bisInterface

16K LAPDFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117301 Flex Abis Flex AbisResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.60ConfiguringFlex Abis

GBFD-117702 BTS LocalSwitch

BTS localswitchingResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.61ConfiguringBTS LocalSwitch




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-118401 AbisTransmissionOptimization

Transmissionoptimization onthe AbisinterfaceResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.62ConfiguringAbisTransmissionOptimization

GBFD-112013 AbisCongestionTrigger HRDistribution

AbisCongestionTrigger HRDistributionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-116901 Flex Ater Flex AterFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.63ConfiguringFlex Ater

GBFD-117701 BSC LocalSwitch

BSC LocalSwitchingResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.64ConfiguringBSC LocalSwitch

GBFD-116902 AterCompressionTransmission

AterCompressionTransmissionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.65ConfiguringAterCompressionTransmission

GBFD-115702 TrFO TrFO Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-114601 Multi-CellFunction

Multi-CellFunctionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117801 Ring Topology Ring topologyFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.66ConfiguringBTS RingTopology

GBFD-113801 TRXCooperation

TRXCooperationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.67ConfiguringTRX MutualAid

GBFD-117401 MSC Pool MSC POOLFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.68ConfiguringMSC Pool



7-25



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool Gb FlexFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.69Configuringthe SGSN Pool

GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass Abis BypassFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.70ConfiguringAbis Bypass

GBFD-117802 Fast RingNetwork Switch

Fast RingNetwork SwitchFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-113721 Robust AirInterfaceSignalling

Robust AirInterfaceSignallingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117803 AbisTransmissionBackup

AbisTransmissionBackupFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.71ConfiguringAbisTransmissionBackup

GBFD-113725 BSC NodeRedundancy

BSC NodeRedundancyFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.72ConfiguringBSC NodeRedundancy

GBFD-113726 TC Pool TC PoolFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.73ConfiguringTC Pool

GBFD-113728 OML Backup OML BackupFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.74ConfiguringOML Backup

GBFD-510101 AFC(AutomaticFrequencyCorrection)

AFC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.75ConfiguringAutomaticFrequencyCorrection(AFC)

GBFD-510102 Fast MoveHandover

High SpeedPBGT Switch

BSC6900 7.76ConfiguringFast MoveHandover




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-510103 Chain CellHandover

Chain CellHandoverFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.77ConfiguringChain CellHandover

GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell Multi-site CellFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.78ConfiguringMulti-Site Cell

GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMAInteroperability

IntersystemHandover &ReselectionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.79ConfiguringGSM/WCDMAInteroperability

GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMAInteroperability

IntersystemHandover &ReselectionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.80ConfiguringGSM/TD-SCDMAInteroperability

GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMAService BasedHandover

IntersystemHandover due toServiceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.81ConfiguringGSM/WCDMAService BasedHandover

GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMALoad BasedHandover

IntersystemHandover due toLoad Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.82ConfiguringGSM/WCDMA LoadBasedHandover

GBFD-114323 2G/3G CellReselectionBased on MSState

2G/3G CellReselectionBased on MSState Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.83Configuring2G/3G CellReselectionBased on MSState

GBFD-114325 Fast 3GReselection at2G CS CallRelease

Fast 3GReselection at2G Cs CallReleaseFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.84ConfiguringFast 3GReselection at2G CS CallRelease



7-27



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-113901 SatelliteTransmissionover AbisInterface

Site SupportingSatelliteTransmissionResource (perSite)

BSC6900 7.85ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover AbisInterface

GBFD-113902 SatelliteTransmissionover A Interface

SatelliteTransmissionover A InterfaceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.86ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover AInterface

GBFD-113903 SatelliteTransmissionover AterInterface

SatelliteTransmissionover AterInterfaceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.87ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover AterInterface

GBFD-113904 SatelliteTransmissionover PbInterface

SatelliteTransmissionover PbInterfaceFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.88ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover PbInterface

GBFD-113905 SatelliteTransmissionover GbInterface

SatelliteTransmissionover GbInterfaceFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.89ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionover GbInterface

GBFD-115201 High SpeedSignaling

High SpeedSignalingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.90ConfiguringHigh SpeedSignaling

GBFD-115301 Local MultipleSignaling Points

Local MultipleSignaling PointsFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.91ConfiguringLocal MultipleSignalingPoints

GBFD-114701 Semi-PermanentConnection

SemipermanentConnectionResource (perLINK)

BSC6900 7.92ConfiguringSemi-PermanentConnection




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-116401 End-to-End MSSignalingTracing

End-to-End MSSignalingTracingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.93ConfiguringEnd-to-EndMS SignalingTracing

GBFD-116402 MaintenanceMode Alarm

MaintenanceMode AlarmFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-117602 Active PowerControl

Active PowerControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.94ConfiguringActive PowerControl

GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2CipheringAlgorithm

Encryption(A5/1,A5/2)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-113503 A5/3 CipheringAlgorithm

Encryption(A5/3) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.95ConfiguringCiphering

GBFD-113521 A5/1EncryptionFlowOptimization

EnhancedEncryptionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-113522 EncryptedNetworkManagement

EncryptedNetworkManagementFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-113523 NAT BesideOM

NAT BesideOM Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-113301 Enhanced FullRate

Enhanced FullRate Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.96ConfiguringSpeech Version

GBFD-113401 Half RateSpeech

Half RateResource (perTRX)




7-29



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-113402 DynamicAdjustmentBetween FR andHR

DynamicAdjustmentBetween FR andHR Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.97ConfiguringDynamicAdjustmentBetween FRand HR

GBFD-113601 Short MessageService CellBroadcast(TS23)

Short MessageService CellBroadcast(TS23)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.98.1ConfiguringShort MessageService CellBroadcast(TS23)

GBFD-113602 Simplified CellBroadcast

Simplified CellBroadcastFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.98.2ConfiguringSimplified CellBroadcast

GBFD-115601 AutomaticLevel Control(ALC)

AutomaticLevel ControlFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.99ConfiguringAutomaticLevel Control(ALC)

GBFD-115602 Acoustic EchoCancellation(AEC)

Acoustic EchoCancellationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.100ConfiguringAcoustic EchoCancellation(AEC)

GBFD-115603 AutomaticNoise Restraint(ANR)

AutomaticNoise Restraint(ANR) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.101ConfiguringAutomaticNoise Restraint(ANR)

GBFD-115701 TFO TFO Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.102ConfiguringTFO

GBFD-115703 AutomaticNoiseCompensation(ANC)

AutomaticNoiseCompensation(ANC) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.103ConfiguringAutomaticNoiseCompensation(ANC)




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115704 EnhancementPacket LossConcealment(EPLC)

EnhancementPacket LossConcealment(EPLC)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.104ConfiguringEnhancementPacket LossConcealment(EPLC)

GBFD-116801 Voice QualityIndex (UplinkVQI)

Voice QualityIndex (VQI)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.105ConfiguringVoice QualityIndex

GBFD-117501 EnhancedMeasurementReport(EMR)

EnhancedMeasurementReport(EMR)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.106Configuring ofEnhancedMeasurementReport

GBFD-117101 BTS power liftfor handover

BTS power liftfor handoverFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

Dynamic HR/FR AdaptationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.107ConfiguringDynamic HR/FR Adaptation

GBFD-115705 VQE3.0 VQE3.0 (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.108ConfiguringVQE3.0

GBFD-115707 KPIs Based onUser Experience

KPIs Based onUser Experience(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.109ConfiguringKPIs Based onUserExperience

GBFD-115501 AMR FR AMR Resource(per TRX)


GBFD-115502 AMR HR AMR HRFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-115503 AMR PowerControl

AMR PowerControlFunction (perTRX)




7-31



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HRDynamicAdjustment

AMR FR/HRDynamicAdjustmentFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-115505 AMR WirelessLink Timer

AMR WirelessLink TimerFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-115506 AMR CodingRate ThresholdAdaptiveAdjustment

AMR CodingRate ThresholdAdaptiveAdjustmentFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.110ConfiguringAMR CodingRateThresholdAdaptiveAdjustment

GBFD-115507 WB AMR WB AMRResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.111ConfiguringWB AMR

GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR)

GBR QosFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.112ConfiguringStreaming QoS(GBR)

GBFD-119902 QoSARP&THP

QoS Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.113ConfiguringQoSARP&THP

GBFD-119904 PS ActivePackageManagement

PS ActiveQueueManagementFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.114ConfiguringPS ActivePackageManagement

GBFD-119905 PoC QoS PoC QoSFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.115ConfiguringPoC QoS

GBFD-119906 ConversationalQoS

ConversationalQos Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119907 PS Service inPriority

PS Service inPriority (Per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.116ConfiguringPS Service inPriority




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled CellReselection(NC2)

NACC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.117ConfiguringNC2

GBFD-116301 Intra BSCNetworkAssisted CellChange(NACC)

NC2 Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.118Configuringthe NetworkAssisted CellChange(NACC)

GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status Packet SI Status(PSI) Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.118Configuringthe NetworkAssisted CellChange(NACC)

GBFD-114101 GPRS GPRS SoftwareFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.119ConfiguringGPRS

GBFD-510001 NetworkOperation ModeI

Networkoperation modeI Function (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.120ConfigruingNetworkOperationMode I

GBFD-118901 CS-3/CS-4 CS3/CS4Function (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-114201 EGPRS EDGEResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.121ConfiguringEGPRS

GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR GB Over FRResource (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRSAccess

11-Bit EGPRSAccessFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.122Configuring11-Bit EGPRSAccess



7-33



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-119202 PacketAssignmentTaken Over bythe BTS

PacketAssignmentTaken Over bythe BTSFunction (per64Kbps)


GBFD-119203 ExtendedUplink TBF

ExtendedUplink TBFFunction (per64Kbps)


GBFD-119204 DynamicallyAdjusting theUplink MCSCoding

DynamicallyAdjusting theUplink MCSCodingFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.123ConfiguringDynamicallyAdjusting theUplink MCSCoding

GBFD-119205 DynamicallyAdjusting theRRBPFrequency

DynamicallyAdjusting theRRBPFrequencyFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119302 Packet ChannelDispatching

Packet ChannelDispatchingFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.124ConfiguringPacketChannelDispatching

GBFD-119303 Load Sharing Load SharingFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119501 AdaptiveAdjustment ofUplink andDownlinkChannels

AdaptiveAdjustment ofUplink andDownlinkChannelsFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119305 BSS PagingCoordination

BSS PagingCoordinationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.125ConfiguringBSS PagingCoordination




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-119502 PS Handover PS HandoverFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.126ConfiguringPS Handover

GBFD-119503 Early TBFEstablishment

Early TBFEstablishmentFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-119504 PS PowerControl

PS PowerControl (Per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.127ConfiguringPS PowerControl

GBFD-119505 PDCH DynamicAdjustmentwith TwoThresholds

Two ThresholdsPDCH DynamicAdjustment (Per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.128ConfiguringPDCHDynamicAdjustmentwith TwoThresholds

GBFD-119401 ExtendedDynamicAllocation(EDA)

EDA Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.129ConfiguringEDA

GBFD-119402 MS HighMultislotClasses

Terminalmultislot classesFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-114151 DTM DTM Function(per 64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.130ConfiguringDTM

GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM DTM HighMulti-slot class11 Function (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.131ConfiguringClass11 DTM

GBFD-119404 HMC DTM HMC DTMFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.132ConfiguringHMC DTM

GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/sCircuitSwitched Data

14.4KbpsCircuitSwitched DataFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.133Configuring14.4 kbit/sCircuitSwitched Data



7-35



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-116001 ResourceReservation

ChannelReservedFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.134ConfiguringResourceReservation

GBFD-115001 Enhanced MultiLevelPrecedence andPreemption(EMLPP)

eMLPPFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.135ConfiguringEnhancedMulti LevelPrecedenceandPreemption(eMLPP)

GBFD-110521 GuaranteedEmergency Call

GuaranteedEmergency CallFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.136ConfiguringGuaranteedEmergencyCall

GBFD-115002 Flow ControlBased on CellPriority

Flow ControlBased on CellPriorityFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.137ConfiguringFlow ControlBased on CellPriority

GBFD-118103 NetworkSupport SAIC

SAIC Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.138ConfiguringNetworkSupport SAIC

GBFD-115401 NSS-BasedLCS (Cell ID +TA)

NSS-based LCS(Cell ID + TA)Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.139ConfiguringNSS-basedLCS (cell ID +TA)

GBFD-115402 BSS-BasedLCS (Cell ID +TA)

LCS(CELL ID+TA) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.140ConfiguringBSS-basedLCS (cell ID +TA)

GBFD-115403 Simple ModeLCS(Cell ID +TA)

Simple ModeLCS (Cell ID +TA) Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.141ConfiguringSimple ModeLCS (cell ID +TA)




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-115404 Lb Interface Lb Interface BSC6900 7.142ConfiguringLb Interface

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP Abis Over IPResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.143ConfiguringAbis over IP

GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

Abis IP OverE1/T1 Resource(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.144ConfiguringAbis IP overE1/T1

GBFD-118604 Abis MUX Abis MUXFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.145ConfiguringAbis MUX

GBFD-118602 A over IP A Over IPFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.146Configuring Aover IP

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 A IP over E1Function (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.147Configuring AIP over E1/T1

GBFD-118610 UDP MUX forA Transmission

UDP MUX forA TransmissionFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.148ConfiguringUDP MUX forATransmission

GBFD-118623 TDM/IP DualTransmissionover A Interface

TDM/IP DualTransmissionover A Interface(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.149ConfiguringTDM/IP DualTransmissionover AInterface

GBFD-118603 Gb over IP GB Over IPResource (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.150ConfiguringGb over IP

GBFD-118605 IP QOS IP QoS Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-118607 IP PerformanceMonitor

IP PerformanceMonitorFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None



7-37



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-118609 IP FaultDetection Basedon BFD

IP FaultDetection basedon BFD(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.151Configuring IPFault detectionbased on BFD

GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM Ethernet OAMFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.152ConfiguringEthernet OAM

GBFD-510601 PICOAutomaticConfigurationand Planning

PICO SolutionPacket Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.153ConfiguringPICO/Compact BTSAutomaticConfigurationand Planning

GBFD-510602 PICOSynchronization

PICO SolutionPacket Function(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.154ConfiguringPICOSynchronization

GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

PICO Dual-band Auto-planning(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.155ConfiguringPICO Dual-band Auto-planning

GBFD-510604 PICO USBEncryption

PICO USBEncryption(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.156ConfiguringPICO USBEncryption

GBFD-510605 PICO AccessControl List(ACL)

PICO AccessControl List(ACL)(perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-510606 PICO SleepingMode

PICO SleepingMode(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.157ConfiguringPICO SleepingMode

GBFD-510607 PICOAutomaticOptimization

PICOAutomaticOptimization(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.158ConfiguringPICOAutomaticOptimization




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-510701 Compact BTSAutomaticConfigurationand Planning

Easy GSMSolution PacketFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.153ConfiguringPICO/Compact BTSAutomaticConfigurationand Planning

GBFD-510702 Compact BTSAutomaticCapacityPlanning

Easy GSMSolution PacketFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.159ConfiguringCompact BTSAutomaticCapacityPlanning

GBFD-510704 Compact BTSAutomaticNeighbor CellPlanning andOptimization

AutomaticNeighbor CellPlanning andOptimization(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.160ConfiguringCompact BTSAutomaticNeighbor CellPlanning andOptimization

GBFD-510705 Compact BTSTiming PowerOff

Compact BTSTiming PowerOff(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.161ConfiguringCompact BTSTiming PowerOff

GBFD-510706 Local UserManagement

Local UserManagement(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.162ConfiguringLocal UserManagement

GBFD-510301 Public VoiceGroup CallService

Basic VoiceGroup CallService(VGCS)Resource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.163ConfiguringVGCS/VBS

GBFD-510303 Late BroadcastChannelAssignment

Late Group CallChannelAssignmentFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510305 Single ChannelGroup CallOriginating

Single ChannelGroup CallOriginatingFunction (perTRX)




7-39



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-510306 TalkerIdentification

TalkerIdentificationfunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510307 Group CallEMLPP

Group CallEMLPPFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510308 Fast Group CallSetup

Fast Group CallSetup Function(per TRX)


GBFD-510309 Group CallReliabilityEnhancing

Group CallReliabilityEnhancingFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510302 Public VoiceBroadcastService

Basic VoiceBroadcastService(VBS)Resource (perTRX)


GBFD-510304 Late BroadcastChannelAssignment

Late BroadcastChannelAssignmentFunction (perTRX)


GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay GSM-T Relay(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.164ConfiguringGSM-T Relay

GBFD-510501 HUAWEI IIHandover

HUAWEI IIHandoverFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.165ConfiguringHUAWEI IIHandover

GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment

Handover Re-establishmentFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.166ConfiguringHandover Re-establishment

GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing RAN SharingFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.167ConfiguringRAN Sharing




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-118702 MOCN SharedCell

MOCNCommon Cell(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.168ConfiguringMOCN SharedCell

GBFD-118703 IMSI-BasedHandover

IMSI BasedHandover(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.169ConfiguringIMSI-BasedHandover

GBFD-510801 MSRD MSRDFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.170ConfiguringMSRD

GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers inDownlink

Dual Carriers inDownlinkFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.171ConfiguringDual Carriersin Downlink

GBFD-510803 UplinkEGPRS2-A

UplinkEGPRS2-AResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.172Configuringthe EGPRS2-A

GBFD-510804 DownlinkEGPRS2-A

DownlinkEGPRS2-AResource (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.172Configuringthe EGPRS2-A

GBFD-510805 LatencyReduction

LatencyReductionFunction (per64Kbps)

BSC6900 7.173ConfiguringLatencyReduction

GBFD-510901 2G/3GNeighboringCell AutomaticOptimization

2G/3GNeighboringCell AutomaticOptimizationFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-511001 License Controlfor Urgency

License Controlfor UrgencyFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.174ConfiguringLicenseControl forUrgency

GBFD-511002 Access ControlClass(ACC)

Access ControlClass(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.175ConfiguringAccess ControlClass



7-41



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511101 Load BasedHandoverEnhancementon Iur-g

HandoverBased on Loadon Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.176ConfiguringLoad BasedHandoverEnhancementon Iur-g

GBFD-511102 NACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-gbetween GSMand UMTS

NACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.177ConfiguringNACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-gbetween GSMand UMTS

GBFD-511103 GSM andUMTS LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

BSC LoadBalancingBased on Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.178ConfiguringGSM andUMTS LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

GBFD-511104 GSM andUMTS TrafficSteering Basedon Iur-g

BSC ServiceDistributionBased on Iur-gFunction (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.179ConfiguringGSM andUMTS TrafficSteering Basedon Iur-g

GBFD-511206 GSM andUMTSIntelligentShutdownBased on RATPriority

None None 7.180ConfiguringGSM andUMTSIntelligentShutdownBased on RATPriority

GBFD-511301 Cell ReselectionBetween GSMand LTE

Cell ReselectionBetween GSMand LTE(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.181ConfiguringCellReselectionBetween GSMand LTE




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511302 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Coverage

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Coverage(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.182ConfiguringPS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Coverage

GBFD-511303 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Quality

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Quality(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.183ConfiguringPS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Quality

GBFD-511304 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Cell Load

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Cell Load(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.184ConfiguringPS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon Cell Load

GBFD-511305 PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon ModePriority

PS HandoverBetween GSMand LTE Basedon ModePriority (perTRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-511306 GSM/LTEService BasedPS Handover

GSM/LTEService BasedPS Handover(per TRX)

BSC6900 None

GBFD-511307 eNC2 BetweenGSM and LTE

eNC2 BetweenGSM and LTE(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.185ConfiguringeNC2 BetweenGSM and LTE

GBFD-511308 eNACCBetween GSMand LTE

eNACCBetween GSMand LTE (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.186ConfiguringeNACCBetween GSMand LTE

GBFD-511309 SRVCC SRVCC (perTRX)

BSC6900 7.187ConfiguringSRVCC



7-43



ConfigurationMethod

GBFD-511401 Iur-g InterfaceBetween GSMand TD-SCDMA

Iur-g InterfaceBetween GSMand TD-SCDMA(perTRX)

BSC6900 7.188ConfiguringIur-g InterfaceBetween GSMand TD-SCDMA

GBFD-511402 Radio ResourceReservedHandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMABased on Iur-g

Radio ResourceReservedHandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMABased on Iur-g(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.189ConfiguringRadioResourceReservedHandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMABased on Iur-g

GBFD-511501 MultipleCCCHs

Multiple CCCH(per TRX)

BSC6900 7.190ConfiguringMultipleCCCHs

MRFD-211801 Multi-modeDynamic PowerSharing(GSM)

GSM andUMTSDynamic PowerSharing

BSC6900 7.191ConfiguringMulti-modeDynamicPower Sharing(GSM)

MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmissionon BS side(GBTS)

None None 7.192ConfiguringIP-BasedMulti-modeCo-Transmissionon BS side(GBTS)

MRFD-211504 TDM-BasedMulti-mode Co-Transmissionvia Backplaneon BS side(GBTS)

None None 7.193ConfiguringTDM-BasedMulti-modeCo-Transmissionvia Backplaneon BS side(GBTS)




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ConfigurationMethod

MRFD-211505 Bandwidthsharing ofMBTS Multi-mode Co-Transmission(GBTS)

Bandwidthsharing ofMBTS Multi-mode Co-Transmission(per Site)

BSC6900 None

MRFD-211601 Multi-mode BSCommonReferenceClock(GBTS)

None None 7.194ConfiguringMulti-ModeBS CommonReferenceClock (GBTS)

7.2 Activating the GSM LicenseThis describes how to activate the GSM license.

Prerequisitel The BSC6900 is in service.

l The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900.

l The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP\License

Procedure

Step 1 Run LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the fileinformation.

If... Then...

The file information comply with the information of thefile that you apply for,

Go to step Step 2.

The file information does not comply with theinformation of the file that you apply for,

Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 2 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrackis offline, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to online.

Step 3 Run the ACT LICENSE command to active the License.

----End



7-45

7.3 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202Emergency Call Service (TS12).

Prerequisitel Dependency on Hardware

– Nonel Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License

– None

ContextThe emergency call service takes precedence over other services in accessing the network evenif the MS requesting the service is suspended or the telephone charge is overdue.

Procedurel Activation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to enable emergencycall service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to NO(No).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC.

The expected result: Emergent Call Disable is set to No.2. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A

Interface. In the Trace Type area, click BSSAP.3. The MS dials an emergency call and hears a voice prompt.4. View the signaling messages traced on the A interface.

The expected result: The EMERGENCY_SETUP message is traced on the Ainterface, which indicates that the emergency call service is enabled.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to disable emergency

call service. In this step, set Emergent Call Disable to YES(Yes).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC.

The expected result: Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes.

----End

7.4 Configuring IMSI DetachThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302IMSI Detach.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



– Nonel License

– None

Context

After the IMSI is detached, the MS is marked as an invalid MS by the network. The networkdoes not send any paging message to this MS.

The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the systeminformation type 3 message.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, setAttach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, query

the setting of Attach-detach Allowed.The expected result: Attach-detach Allowed is set to YES.

2. Trace messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface.Click all trace types.

3. Power off the MS.The expected result: The IMSI DETACH INDICATION message is traced on the Ainterface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, set

Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, query

the setting of Attach-detach Allowed.The expected result: Attach-detach Allowed is set to NO.

----End

7.5 Configuring HUAWEI I HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601HUAWEI I Handover.




7-47

None

l Dependency on Other FeaturesNone

l LicenseNone

l Other Prerequisites2G neighboring cell has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Neighboring CellRelations.

Context

Handover is used to keep the call continuity of the UE during its movement. It also helps optimizethe network performance by balancing the traffic between cells.

Huawei I handover is classified into high-speed railway quick handover, emergency handover,enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover. The emergencyhandover is classified into TA handover, bad quality (UL/DL) handover, quick level drophandover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normalhandover is classified into edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentriccell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.

CAUTIONl After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is

applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to theold cell.

l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equalto the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited.

l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cellhandover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specifiedduration.

l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the sameunderlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and LoadHO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handoverof a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell on the network.

l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered betweenthe enhanced dual-band network cells.

l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all theneighboring micro cells.

l SDCCH handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, quicklevel drop handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, edgehandover, and fast-moving micro cell handover. It does not support the enhanced dual-bandnetwork handover, load handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover,better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set CurrentHO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set CurrentHO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

5. Activating the quick handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set ChainNeighbor Cell to YES(Yes) and set Chain Neighbour Cell Type as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setMR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing(BSC preprocessing).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setQuick Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, setQuick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, QuickHandover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick HandoverPunish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MRNumber, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore MeasurementReport Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast StatisticTimes, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency ShiftHandover Duration as required.

NOTE

If a neighboring cell is an external neighboring cell, you need to run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick HandoverPunish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, setUL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and ULFrequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reportedby the base station.

6. Activating the TA handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setTA HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set TAThreshold as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setPenalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO as required.

7. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setBQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).



7-49

(2) Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEMG. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.Threshold as required.

(3) Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMRFR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DLQual. Limit for AMR HR as required.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setPenalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO as required.

8. Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setRx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and set Edge HO UL RX_LEVThreshold as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, setFilter Parameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter A3, FilterParameter A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter ParameterA7, Filter Parameter A8, and Filter Parameter B as required.

9. Activating interference handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInterference HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Intracell HO Allowed,Forbidden time after MAX Times, and Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, you need to run the BSC6900MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, setAdjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, setInterfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, andInterfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR as required.

10. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set NoDl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limitand Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setFilter Length for TCH Qual and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual as required.

11. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUOType to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell) and then set Cell Inner/Extra Property, Same Group Cell Index Type, Same Group Cell Index, andSame Group Cell Name as required.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA. In this step,set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner CellSerious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious OverloadThreshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN ofUL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL SubcellLower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, OutgoingOL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, StepLength of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries as required.

12. Activating the load handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setLoad Handover Support to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HOThreshold and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set SystemFlux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold, Load handover LoadAccept Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step Period, and LoadHO Step Level as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Load handover Load AcceptThreshold as required. If this cell is configured with external 3G neighboring cells, youneed to run the MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL to set Load handover LoadAccept Threshold as required.


13. Activating the edge handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setEdge HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Edge HO DL RX_LEVThreshold, Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm I EdgeHO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Valid Time asrequired.


14. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setLayer of The Cell as required.

NOTE

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setMS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HOThreshold as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MSFast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MSFast Moving HO as required.



7-51

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell, Inter-layerHO Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast MovingHO.


15. Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setLevel HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HO Threshold asrequired.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setLayer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and CellPriority as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set LayerHO Watch Time, Layer HO Valid Time, and Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HOHysteresis as required.

16. Activating the PBGT handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setPBGT HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setLayer of The Cell and Cell Priority as required.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, you need to run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell and CellPriority as required.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set PBGTWatch Time, PBGT Valid Time, and PBGT HO Threshold as required.

17. Activating the AMR handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setIntracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2FHO Threshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO LastTime as required.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH RateAdjust Allow to YES(Yes).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set AInterface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, setAMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Thresholdas required.

18. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setSDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set F2H HO Threshold, H2F HOThreshold, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, and Intracell F-H HO Last Time asrequired.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setInter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query the setting of

Current HO Control Algorithm.The expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm isHOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

2. Start the task by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface.The expected result: The expected result: The BSC sends the MSC a Handoverperformed message with any of the following handover cause values: better-cell,distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength.

l Deactivation Procedure

This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

7.6 Configuring Directed RetryThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607Directed Retry.



– Nonel License

– None

Context

Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSCautomatically initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if noTCH is available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.

This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, therebyincreasing the access success rate. It can also balance the traffic load between different cells,thereby avoiding the traffic load imbalance among cells.




7-53

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setDirected Retry to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLQUICKSETUP to quickly add

GSM cells 0 and 1.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL for two times to configure

cell 0 and cell 1 as neighboring cells.3. Block the TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that the SDCCHs in cell 0 are available

for use.4. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and the RSL messages on the Abis

interface in cells 0 and 1 by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface andTracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

5. Make a call in cell 0.6. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on the

Abis interface in cells 0 and 1.The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good.The Handover Detection message is traced on the Abis interface in cell 0. TheAssignment Complete message is traced on the A interface in cell 1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set

Directed Retry to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, view

the setting of Directed Retry.The expected result: Directed Retry is set to No.

----End

7.7 Configuring Assignment and Immediate AssignmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502Assignment and Immediate Assignment.



– Nonel License

– None

ContextAssignment and immediate assignment are two important procedures during call setup. Normalimmediate and immediate assignment procedures do not require setting of any parameter.Parameter setting is required only in the immediate assignment of TCHs. The following sectiondescribes how to configure the function of immediate TCH assignment.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCHImmediate Assignment to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to initiate an emergency call.2. Trace messages over the Abis interface.

The expected result: On the GUI of Abis interface message tracing, the CHANNELACTIVATION message is traced. The field Channel Rate and Type under theinformation element Channel mode indicates that the TCH, instead of the SDCCH, isassigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, the messages ModeModify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are traced.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TCH

Immediate Assignment to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the setting

of TCH Immediate Assignment.The expected result: TCH Immediate Assignment is set to NO(No).

----End

ExampleSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=YES;

7.8 Configuring Call ReestablishmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503Call Reestablishment.



– Nonel License

– None

ContextWhen the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedurecan be performed to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed.This mechanism shortens call interruption and improves user experience.




7-55

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CallReestablishment Forbidden to NO(No).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, setTREESTABLISH to a proper value. If this parameter is set to a great value, the radioresources assigned previously are reserved for a long time, which results in networkcongestion.

l Verification Procedure1. Select a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs. Where, TRX 1 is the BCCH

TRX and TRX 2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX 2 requires an independent variableattenuator or a device that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals ofTRX 2.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CallReestablishment Forbidden to NO(No).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the settingof Call Reestablishment Forbidden.The expected result: The value of Call Reestablishment Forbidden is NO(No).

4. Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX 1 so that theMS uses a TCH on TRX 2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX 1.

5. Attenuate the signals of TRX 2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or otherdevices, trace the signaling on the A and Abis interfaces, and monitor the channelstatus of the test cell.The expected result:– As displayed in the channel status monitoring window, the MS reestablishes a call

on TRX 1 of the test cell.– You can trace the signaling messages shown in Figure 7-1 during the signaling

tracing.

Figure 7-1 Signaling messages





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CallReestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the settingof Call Reestablishment Forbidden.The expected result: The value of Call Reestablishment Forbidden is YES(Yes).

----End

ExampleSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=NO;SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSIPFAILINDDELAY=10000;

7.9 Configuring TCH Re-assignmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501TCH Re-assignment.


– None

l Dependency on Other Features

– None

l License

– None

ContextTCH re-assignment is a procedure in which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after the MSreturns to the SDCCH because a TCH fails to be assgined to the MS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set AllowReassign to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure

1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, setFrequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band(Same Band).

NOTE

This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If theparameter is set to Same_Band(Same Band), then a channel of the same frequency band asthe originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.

2. Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX.

3. Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCHTRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example,remove the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX.



7-57

The expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, a TCH on thenon-BCCH TRX is assigned. The call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the BCCH TRX,because the assignment over the Um interface fails for this TRX.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow

Reassign to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query the setting of

Allow Reassign.The expected result: The value of Allow Reassign is No.

----End

ExampleSET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=YES;

7.10 Configuring Radio Link ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedureof the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature donot need to be configured.



– Nonel License

– None

Context

The procedures involved in the radio link management are as follows:

l Link establishment indicationl Link establishment requestl Link release indicationl Link release requestl Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged model Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged model Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged model Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged model Link error indication

The link error indication procedure is used by the BTS to notify the BSC of exceptions that occuron the radio link layer.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR to set the followingparameters of the specified cell: T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/Full Rate, T200FACCH/Half Rate, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3, T200SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Establish,N200 of Release, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/HalfRate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query the call controltimer parameters of the corresponding cell.

Expected result: The parameter values queried by running the preceding commandare consistent with the corresponding values that are set in activation procedure.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, enter the Abis Interface CS Trace window. In the Basic Tab,set Trace Type to RSL. In the RSL tab, set Message Type to RLM, set Filter Flagto TRX, and specify TRX ID.

3. Use an MS to start a call and query the channels occupied by the call. Remove thebattery of the MS during the call.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to initiate a forced handover for theMS. Set Handover Scope to FREE.

5. Check messages traced in step 2. The DATA REQ message contains the Handovercommand message over the Um interface. Then, check whether the interval betweenthe DATA REQ message and the ERROR INDication message is consistent with thecorresponding configuration of the N200 and T200 in activation procedure.

Expected result: The full-rate interval is basically consistent with the product of valuesof N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/Full Rate. The full-rate interval isbasically consistent with the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200FACCH/Half Rate.



----End

Example//Activation procedure SET GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, T200SDCCH=1, T200FACCHF=1, T200FACCHH=1, T200SACCT0=1, T200SACCH3=1, T200SACCHS=1, T200SDCCH3=1;//Verification procedure LST GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;

7.11 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groupsof BTSs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group.



7-59


– The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode areinstalled.

– The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set.– The BTS3012, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the combined-cabinet

installation mode.– The BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012III, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and

BTS3900E support the cabinet-group installation mode.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License

– None

Contextl Combined cabinets

– Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. Inthis case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged.

– The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the main cabinet, whereas the cabinet notconfigured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares theDTMU with the main cabinet.

– Figure 7-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.

Figure 7-2 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets

l Cabinet groups

– Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve asone BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet ofeach cabinet group is the main cabinet.

– A cabinet group can be one main cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet groupthat provides synchronization clock signals is called main cabinet group. Other cabinetgroups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet of each cabinet groupcan be configured with one or two DTMUs.

– Figure 7-3 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Figure 7-3 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups

l The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups.Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groupssupport 72 TRXs.

l Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinetgroup mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The maincabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised ofcabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. Thecorresponding cabinet numbers are as follows:

– Main cabinet group: 0 and 1

– Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4

– Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7

Procedurel Activation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet.

NOTE

In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are asfollows:

l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1.

l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards.

NOTE

If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signalingpoint relation.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS.



7-61

8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basicGPRS attributes of 2G cells.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logicalTRXs to the channels on TRX boards

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set the TRX channelinformation.

12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX deviceattributes.

13. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idletimeslots.

NOTE

During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 12, and step 13.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the antennaboard.

15. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT toconfigure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS.

16. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify thefrequency band attributes of BTS antennas.

17. Repeat Step 2 through Step 16 to add and configure the extension cabinet andinformation about the cabinet according to the principles for adding cabinetnumbers in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode.

NOTE

If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is notrequired. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.

18. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection.

– If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 19.

– If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 20.

NOTE

l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, add the connection links from the maincabinet to the BSC. Dest Node Type is BSC.

l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, add the connection links from the main cabinetgroup to the BSC and the connection links among cabinet groups. During the addition ofconnection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC, Dest Node Type is BSC. Duringthe addition of connection links among cabinet groups, Dest Node Type is BTS.

19. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection linksfrom the main cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition,set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..

20. Add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the extension cabinet groups,and then add the connection links from the main cabinet group to the BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connectionlinks from the extension cabinet groups to the main cabinet group, and then setDest Node Type to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to theBTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Parent Index Type, Dest Parent BTSIndex, and Dest Parent BTS Port No..




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connectionlinks from the main cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type toBSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No..

21. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.l Verification procedure

1. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page isdisplayed.

2. Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. Thecorresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel.

3. Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, checkthe board status on BTS Device Panel.– If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinet-

group mode.– If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions

provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference.l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.

----End

Example//Activation procedure//Add a BTSADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3900_TDM", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, BTSDESC="3900", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT;//Add a cabinetADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3900_GSM;//Add TRX boardsADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BT=TRU, SRN=1, SN=0;//Add GSM cellsADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=11, IUOTP=Normal_cell;//Add cell frequenciesADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=2;//Add cell signaling point relationADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPC=1000;//Bind cells to the BTSADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSID=9;//Set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cellsSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;//Add TRXs for a cellADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0, FREQ=40;//Bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boardsADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0;//Set the TRX channel informationSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH, TSPRIORITY=2;//Set TRX device attributesSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8;//Configure idle timeslotsSET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=5, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20;



7-63

//Add the antenna boardADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=0, AORB=A;//Configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTSSET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2001, SRN=3, SN=0, BT=DFCU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, AORB=B;//Modify the frequency band attributes of BTS antennasMOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRN=3, SN=8, BT=DFCU, FREQBAND=PCS1900;//Add BTS connectionADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=11, SN=0, PN=1;//activate a BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;//Deactivation procedure//Deactivate a BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Delete a BTSRMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.12 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSUFailure

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.


– The following types of BTSs support the feature: the DBS3900, BTS3900, andBTS3900A

l Dependency on Other Features– None

l License– None

ContextIf a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiersof some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normaloperation of the BTS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP to set the parameters related toTRX shutdown of the PSU board. In this step.– Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES.– Set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements.– Set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR.– GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related

to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site.The expected result:

– The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 isYES.

– The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that setin step 1.

– The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR.2. Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot

supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of

all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE.The expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others isDisabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient powersupply.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP. In this step, set Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO.The expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down whenPSU faults occur.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=YES, ISTRANCABCON=CONFIG, SRVPRIPOLICY=GSM_PRIOR;//Verification procedureLST BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=NO;

7.13 Configuring System Information SendingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101System Information Sending.


– None


– None

l License

– None



7-65

ContextSystem information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, includingnetwork identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and networkfunction parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select andaccess a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the networkand well cooperate with the network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportSent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Trace CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSLmessages on the Abis interface.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index), and specify the cell index.

3. View the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface.The expected result: si2-quarter-ind in System Information Type 3 message is 1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support

Sent 2QUATER to NO(No).2. Trace CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSLmessages on the Abis interface.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index), and specify the cell index.

4. View the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface.The expected result: si2-quarter-ind in System Information Type 3 message is 0.

----End

7.14 Configuring Daylight Saving TimeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature Daylight SavingTime (DST).



– Nonel License

– None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

ContextWith the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybridconfiguration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in acertain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain dayof a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from orends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.


1. Run the SET TZ command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES(Yes), set StartType and EndType, and specify start time and end time based on theselected type.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the SET TZ command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Daylight Saving TimeSET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=YES, SM=WEEK, SMONTH=MAR, SWSEQ=LAST, SWEEK=SUN, ST=02&00&00, EM=WEEK, EMONTH=OCT, EWSEQ=LAST, EWEEK=SUN, ET=03&00&00, TO=60;//Deactivating Daylight Saving TimeSET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=NO;

7.15 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic AdjustmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.



– Nonel License

– None

ContextWhen the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to accessthe network through the cell because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, you need toconvert some TCHs to SDCCHs. When TCHs do not meet the requirements of channelconversion, dynamic PDCHs are converted to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can accessthe network.



7-67

When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs and dynamic PDCHs used as SDCCHs are convertedback to TCHs to increase system capacity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setSDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES(Yes) and Dynamic PDCHConversion to SDCCH Allowed to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setIdle SDCCH Threshold N1, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum, and TCHMinimum Recovery Time as required.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MaximumRate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell and Reservation Threshold of DynamicChannel Conversion as required.


1. Monitor Channel Status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status, and make a CScall in the cell.The expected result: A TCH is converted to an SDCCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MaximumRate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100 and Reservation Threshold of DynamicChannel Conversion to 0.

3. Perform PS services in the cell.The expected result: All TCHFs are converted to PDCHs.

4. Make another CS call in the cell.The expected result: A dynamic PDCH is converted to an SDCCH.

5. Enable the cell to keep in idle state for two minutes.The expected result: The two channels used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setSDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to NO(No) and Dynamic PDCH Conversionto SDCCH Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example

Activating SDCCH dynamic adjustment\\

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=YES, PDCH2SDEN=YES;SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IDLESDTHRES=8, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=60;SET GCELLPSCHM: MAXPDCHRATE=30, DYNCHTRANRESLEV=2;

Deactivating SDCCH dynamic adjustment\\

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=NO, PDCH2SDEN=NO;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.16 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806Signaling Transport Point (STP).


– The XPUa board is configured.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License

– Nonel Others

– The OPC is configured.– The physical layer and the data link layer on the A interface are configured.– The CN supports this feature.

ContextAccording to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directlyor through STP.

To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports MTP3/M3UA signaling transfer.


– TDM transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add an Originating SignalingPoint (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, and DSP bear type toM3UA.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 link set. Inthis step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 link to thelink set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link setindex set in 3.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 3.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to MTP3.



7-69

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 3.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6.

– IP transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MGW as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP, and DSP bear type toM3UA.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,DSP index to the DSP index set in 3.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA signaling linkset. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in4.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In thisstep, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 5, and setSubrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., andSCTP link No. set in 2.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 5.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the MSC as thedestination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to thesignaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, and DSP bear type to M3UA.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 1,DSP index to the DSP index set in 8.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set index to theSignalling link set index set in 5.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to check that SCCP DSP state isset to Accessible.


– TDM transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE to remove the CN node.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link setindex to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT to remove the MTP3 route.In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link setindex to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 linkfrom the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling linkset index set in 3.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS to remove the MTP3 linkset. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index setin 3.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of theMGW.

– IP transmission

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. Inthis step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 9 and Signalling link set indexto the Signalling link set index set in 5.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in9.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of the MSC.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT to remove the M3UA route. In

this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 4 and Signalling link set indexto the Signalling link set index set in 5.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LNK to remove the M3UA link fromthe link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link setindex set in 5.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LKS to remove the M3UA signalinglink set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. setin 4.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE to remove the M3UA destinationentity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in4.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove the DPC of theMGW.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SCTPLNK to remove the SCTP link.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LE to remove the M3UA local entity.

----End

Example//TDM transmissionADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260;ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=MTP3;ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=1, NAME="MGWMTP3LKS";ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS16-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=1, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS16-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNKS1_1";ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWRT";ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3;



7-71

ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCRT";ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=2, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="share", CNID=2, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM;

//IP transmissionADD M3LE: LENO=1, SPX=1, ENTITYT= M3UA_IPSP, NAME="LOCALBSC";ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="172.17.15.253", PEERIP1="172.17.12.253", PEERPN=2905, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=M3UA;ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=1, DPX=1, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGW";ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=1, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGWLKS";ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, NAME="MGWLNK";ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWM3RT";ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA;ADD M3DE: DENO=2, LENO=1, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MSCM3DE";ADD M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCM3RT";

7.17 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point CodeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-11180214-Digit Signaling Point Code.



– Nonel License

– Nonel Others

– The CN supports this feature.

ContextHuawei GBSS can be connected to the MSC through the No.7 signaling system. The No.7signaling system adopts the coding scheme in the 14-bit format. The signaling point code consistsof three sub-fields: sub-field for identifying the world geographical zone where the network islocated; sub-field for identifying the geographical area or network within a specific world zone;sub-field for identifying the signaling point within a specific geographical area or network.


1. At a newly deployed site, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to add anOriginating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).

2. If the OSPs in non-14-bit format have been configured, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand RMV OPC to remove all the OSPs, and then proceed with Step 1.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be unique in the signaling network and cannot be0.BSC6900 does not support configuration of OSPs with different number of bits.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPC to check that OSPs are in the 14-bit

format.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove all configured OSPs.

----End

ExampleADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260;

7.18 Configuring DRXThis section describes how to configure and verify the DRX.


– None


– None

l License

– None

l Other Prerequisites

– The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell.

Context

DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS.

Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channelin the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the systemonly on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by poweringoff certain hardware. This also saves power.

The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC. In this step, setCCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and Multi-Frames in a Cycle on thePaging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period).




7-73

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to forcibly send thesystem message to the test cell.

2. Enable an Abis Interface CS Trace task, then select RSL in the test cell.3. Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for

the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE control-channel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reservedfor AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is0, the system message is correct.

4. Use a MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is"M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully.

5. Check the CS message of the Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IEpaging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained inthe paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case,the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging sub-channel.

NOTE"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimalformat.

l Deactivation ProcedureThis feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, BSAGBLKSRES=2, BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD;//Verification ProcedureSND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;

7.19 Configuring BTS Power ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601BTS Power Management.



– Nonel License

– None

ContextThis feature enables the BTS to allocate loads dynamically according to the actual powersituation, thus prolonging the working time of the system.

Functions of the feature are as follows:




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l No mains supply– When there is no mains supply available, the BTS hierarchical power-off function is

performed to reduce the power consumption and extend the discharge time of thebattery. In this case, the system automatically blocks all TRXs except the BCCH TRX.This is called a soft shutdown.

– When the capacity of the battery drops to the preset value, the system automaticallyshuts down all the TRXs to prevent over-discharging of the battery. This is called a hardshutdown.

l Unfavorable working environment– The TMU shuts down the PAs for some TRXs to reduce heat consumption if the

temperature inside the rack exceeds the predefined threshold.– When fatal faults occur on TRXs or the VSWR far exceeds the limits, the TRX is shut

down.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set BoardParameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set power managementparameters.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query the value of Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled.Expected result: The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled is YES,and the values of power management parameters are the specified ones.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP. In this step, set Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, SRN=3, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, PTYPE=APM30, HTSDF=ENABLE;//Verification procedure LST BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, SRN=3, SN=0;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, SRN=3, SN=0, CFGFLAG=NO;

7.20 Configuring Connection with TMAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).

Prerequisitel Hardware Dependencies for Common TMA

– The RRU3004 does not support the connection with a common TMA.



7-75

– The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with a common TMA.– The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with a common TMA.– The DRFU supports the connection with a common TMA through the GATM board.

l Hardware Dependencies for Smart TMA– The 3012 series base stations do not support the configuration of the smart TMA.– A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the GATM board does not support the

configuration of the smart TMA.– A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the RXU board does not support the

configuration of the smart TMA in non-SRAN mode.– An antenna device is numbered uniquely within a site. In addition, the device number

of a Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) and that of a TMA must be different within a site.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License

– None

ContextInstalled on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optionalcomponent of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a longfeeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage islimited, the TMA can be installed to improve the receiver sensitivity and expand the cell radius,thus reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments.

If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters basedon the actual RF antenna port, power supply mode, and TMA characteristics.

Procedurel Activation Procedure for a Common TMA

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure TMA data aftersetting Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, AntennaTributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.

l Activation Procedure for a Smart TMA1. Run the BSC6900 MML SET BTSRXUBP to turn on the power switches for antenna

ports.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scan antenna devices.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTMA to add a smart TMA.4. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA subunit, run the BSC6900 MML

command MOD BTSTMASUBUNIT.5. Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA device, run the BSC6900 MML

command MOD BTSTMADEVICEDATA.l Verification Procedure for a Common TMA

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-relatedparameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor,Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.

2. On the LMT, click Trace. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane, navigate to Trace >GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. On the Basic tab page of the displayed




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

dialog box, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, select DCM(Measurement Report) under Message Type, select TRX under Filter Flag, andthen specify the TRX ID.

3. For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform adialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by theBTS.The expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report messageis normal.

l Verification Procedure for a Common TMA1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether the

antenna devices are functioning.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSTMA to query the information of a smart

TMA.l Deactivation Procedure for a Common TMA

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure the TMA data. Inthis step:– Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO).– Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO).

l Deactivation Procedure for a Smart TMA1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSTMA to remove a smart TMA.

----End

Example//Activating a common TMASET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5, HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10;//Activating a smart TMASET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5, HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10;STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;ADD BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1, DEVICENAME="tafang", PWRSUPPLYTYPE=SINGLE_PORT_POWER, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3, SUBUNITNUM=2;//Verifying a common TMALST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3;SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;//Verifying a smart TMASTR BTSALDSCAN:STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3;DSP BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;//Deactivating a common TMASET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, HAVETT1=NO, HAVETT2=NO;//Deactivating a smart TMA RMV BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;



7-77

7.21 Configuring Remote Electrical TiltThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602Remote Electrical Tilt.


– The power switch for the RET (remote electrical tilt) antenna is ON in order toimplement the RET antenna functionality. The overcurrent and undercurrent thresholdsare checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas attached to the board.


l License– None

ContextThe feature provides a solution to remote adjustment of the antenna tilt.

After the configuration of the remote electrical tilt function, the user can remotely adjust theRET antenna tilt.


1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, setRET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALDOver Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, andRET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scanning the RETantenna.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna.

NOTETo query vendor information, you can refer to the antenna equipment manual or scan the RETantenna.

4. Optional: To set the tilt angle of the RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD BTSRETSUBUNIT.

5. Optional: To modify the parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device, runthe BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA.

6. Optional: To set the tilt angle of the BTS RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET BTSRETANTTILT.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scanning the RET

antenna.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRET to query the RET antenna

information.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETANTTILT to query the tilt anglerange of the RET antenna and the current tilt angle of the antenna.


----End

Example// Activation procedureSTR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0;ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian", CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0, CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR, VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456";// Verification procedureSTR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0;DSP BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;DSP BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9;

7.22 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive DiversityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-2106042-Antenna Receive Diversity.


– BTS3006C/BTS3002E need add DATM board.

– BTS3012/BTS3012AE need add DATU board.

– BTS3900/A/L(DRFU) need add GATM board.


– None

l License

– None

Context

The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation byusing two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals arecombined after certain processing.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set MRRU/GRRUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA.




7-79

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the sending receivingmode of the board.


----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, RXUIDTYPE=RXUPOS, RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, RXUTYPE=MRRU, SndRcvMode2=DOUBLE_ANTENNA;// Verification procedureLST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;

7.23 Configuring BTS ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501BTS Clock.


– When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.

– When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.


– None

l License

– None

Contextl The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization.

The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internalframe synchronization.

l The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock,synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition,the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable referenceclock source for the BTS.


Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock

Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).Synchronization with the GPS clock




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

Synchronization with the BITS clock1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to

EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock).l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configurationof the system clock.The expected result:

If... Then...

The clock information corresponds tothe clock type configured

The configuration is successful.

The clock information is inconsistentwith the configuration

The configuration is unsuccessful.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the

BTS. Here,

– Set List Object to SITE(By Site).– Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box.The expected result: Clock attribute is Available.


----End

Example// Activation procedure// Configure the Synchronization with the Abis clock.SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;// Configure the Synchronization with the GPS clockSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;// Configure the Synchronization with the BITS clockSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;;// Verification procedureLST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, SITEATTR=CLKATTR;

7.24 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).




7-81

– As Figure 7-4 shows, the hardware of the base station is installed.

Figure 7-4 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface

NOTE

As Figure 7-4 shows, CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU board are respectively connected toone CPRI port on the WBBP board. CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 are connected to the RRU3908.


l License– None

ContextIn the traditional GSM+UMTS dual-mode solution, the GSM and UMTS base stations use thesame site. Different RF modules are used for different radio standards and thus separate opticalcables are required. As a result, many optical cables are required for the entire system, whichincreases the deployment cost. After this feature is applied, the demand of optical cables isreduced by 50%, which helps reduce the cost of the optical modules and optical cables and reducethe expense in the installation and maintenance of the optical cables between the BBU and RFmodules.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSSFPMODE to configure the switchingrelation of the SFP ports and switch the data of CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on theGTMU to CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 on the GTMU.

NOTEThe switching relation of the SFP ports is configured only on the GSM side.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSSFPMODE to query the configurations

of the SFP ports.l Deactivation Procedure




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSSFPMODE to remove the SFP portswitching relation.

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0, SWITCHPORTNO=3;//Verification procedureLST BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;//Deactivation procedureRMV BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;

7.25 Configuring PBT(Power Boost Technology)This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115901 PBT(PowerBoost Technology).


– Currently, the following types of BTSs support the PBT: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE,BTS3012 II, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM, and DBS3900 GSM.

– The DTRU, DRRU, or DRFU board is configured for the base station. The double-transceiver unit is configured with one carrier only on channel 0.


l License– The license of this feature is activated.

ContextTo improve uplink and downlink transmit power, power boost technology (PBT) offered byHuawei is an ideal solution. In PBT mode, the double-transceiver unit serves as a singletransceiver. One signal output through modulation and DA conversion is divided into two RFsignals. These two signals then enter the power amplifier for amplification. Then, the amplifiedsignals are combined. As the two signals are aligned in phase, the transmit power is amplifiedand the downlink signal strength is increased. PBT is applicable to wide coverage areas.

The following procedure takes how to configure PBT for the DTRU of the BTS3012 as anexample.

Figure 7-5 shows the connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.



7-83

Figure 7-5 Connections between the DTRU and DDPU in PBT mode


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toPBT(PBT).

NOTE

When you configure PBT, the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Verification Procedure1. Optional: Use the MS to make a call.

NOTEThis step is required when the BCCH TRX is not carried on the TRX board. This step is not requiredwhen the BCCH TRX is carried on the TRX board.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toNONE(none). Then test the BTS power by means of a power measurementinstrument, and record the result.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toPBT(PBT).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query Send Mode.Send Mode is expected to set to PBT(PBT).

5. Measure the BTS power by a related instrument, and record the result.6. Compare the test results obtained in Step 2 and Step 5.

Withe PBT enabled, the power obtained in step 5 is expected to be much greater thanthat obtained in step 2.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;//Verification procedureSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0;

7.26 Configuring Transmit DiversityThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115902 TransmitDiversity.


– Currently, the following types of BTSs support the transmit diversity: the BTS3012,BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, andDBS3900 GSM.

– The base station is configured with the double-transceiver unit, and the double-transceiver unit is configured with only one carrier on channel 0.

– The cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License

– The license of this feature is activated.



7-85

ContextIn transmit diversity mode, the baseband signal of one MS is transmitted on two RF channels.As there is no correlation between two antennas, the problems of dramatic change of signal leveland QoS decrease due to multipath propagation are solved, which improves the downlinkcoverage performance. The transmit diversity technology can improve the downlink signalquality, thus meeting the requirements for radio communications.

The following procedure takes how to configure transmit diversity for the DRRU of theDBS3900 as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toDIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to

NONE(none).2. Measure the BTS power by a related instrument, and record the result.

The measured power is expected to be 0.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU

Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to

DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).5. Measure the power of tributary B by a related instrument, and record the result.

With transmit diversity enabled, the measured power is expected not to be 0.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;//Verification procedureSET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE;SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;

7.27 Configuring 4-Way Receiver DiversityThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-115903 4-WayReceive Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines the 4-way receive signals to optimizethe quality of uplink signals.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– Currently, the following types of BTSs support 4-way receive diversity: the BTS3012(DTRU), BTS3012AE (DTRU), BTS3006C (DDRM), BTS3002E(DDRM), BTS3900(DRFU), and BTS3900A (DRFU).

– The base station is configured with the double-transceiver unit, and the double-transceiver unit is configured with only one carrier.

– The cell has at least two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


ContextThe 4-way receive signals are sent to one TRX simultaneously. Through the diversitycombination technique, the uplink receiver sensitivity is improved. The 4-way receive diversitytechnology optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet the demanding requirements for radiocommunications in certain cases and to improve the uplink performance in wide coveragescenarios.

The following procedure takes how to configure 4-way receive diversity for the DRRU of theDBS3900 as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRUSending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+4RX]).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set ReceiveMode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).

NOTE

l If the TRX of the double-transceiver unit is allocated to channel 0, set Send Mode to NOCOMB(No Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity), DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT).

l If the TRX of the double-transceiver unit is allocated to channel 1, Send Mode can be set toonly NOCOMB(No Combination).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the

TRX board. Check whether Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(FourDiversity Receiver).


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3,



7-87

RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA, ASSORXUCN=0, ASSORXUSRN=0, ASSORXUSN=4;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY;//Verification procedureLST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, TRXID=0;

7.28 Configuring Dynamic Transmit DiversityThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118101 DynamicTransmit Diversity.


– Currently, the following types of units support transmit diversity: the DTRU of theBTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DDRM of the BTS3006C/BTS3002E, the DRFU of theBTS3900/BTS3900A, and the RRU3004 and RRU3008 of the DBS3900.

– The BTS is configured with the double-transceiver TRXs.– The cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.

l Dependency on Other Features– The feature depends on: GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.


ContextIn dynamic transmit diversity mode, the same timeslots of the two TRXs in one double-transceiver TRX are set to use transmit diversity, and other timeslots still use non-transmitdiversity. After the timeslots in transmit diversity mode are released, they can be set back tonon-transmit diversity. Dynamic transmit diversity fully utilizes idle timeslots and expands thecoverage in the areas with weak signals. In addition, adjustments can be made according to actualnetwork conditions to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage.

The following procedure takes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity for the DTRU ofthe BTS3012 as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setDynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic TransmitDiversity).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode ofthe TRXs in the overlaid cell to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).

NOTE

l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to check the concentricattribute of the TRX.

l To configure dynamic transmit diversity, two TRXs must be configured in a DTRU. Inaddition, dynamic transmit diversity cannot be configured on the MBCCH(Main BCCH)TRX.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign

Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set

Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TRXs except the BCCH TRX and exceptthose TRXs whose Send Mode is not DDIVERSITY(Dynamic TransmitDiversity).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH/H or the TCH/F that carries theBCCH.

4. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status and use an MSto make an emergency call.

NOTE

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of theSDCCH meets the following condition: Assign-optimum-level Threshold - PBT gain <SDCCH uplink Rx level < Assign-optimum-level Threshold. Assign-optimum-level Thresholdis set to 35 by default and the value of PBT gain is 4. You can change the value of Assign-optimum-level Threshold according to the SDCCH uplink Rx level so that the system canallocate a channel in the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can betriggered.

The expected result: Checking the channel monitoring page on the BSC6900 LMT,you find that channels of two TRXs on the same timeslot are used during the call. Onechannel is in the Working state, and the other is in the Subordinate Channel state.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DDIVERSITY//Verification procedureSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;

7.29 Configuring Dynamic PBTThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-118102 DynamicPBT.


– The following types of BTSs support the PBT: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM.

– The DTRU, DRRU, or DRFU board is configured for the base station. The double-transceiver unit is configured with one carrier only on channel 0.




7-89

– The feature depends on: GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

l License


Context

In dynamic PBT mode, the corresponding timeslots on the two TRXs of a DTRU are set to PBT,and other timeslots are set to non-PBT. After the timeslots in PBT mode are released, they canbe set to non-PBT. Dynamic PBT fully utilizes idle timeslots and expands the coverage in theareas with weak signals. In addition, adjustments can be made on the basis of actual networkconditions to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage.

Dynamic PBT can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the edge of the cell byimproving the performance of the concentric cell enabled with the Co-BCCH function.

The following procedure takes how to configure dynamic PBT for the DTRU of the BTS3012as an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setDynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode toDPBT(DPBT).

NOTE

l You can run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO to check the concentricattribute of the TRX.

l To configure dynamic PBT, two TRXs are required. In addition, dynamic PBT cannot beconfigured on the MBCCH(Main BCCH) TRX.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set AssignOptimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TRXs except the BCCH TRX and exceptthose TRXs whose Send Mode is not DPBT(DPBT).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH/H or the TCH/F that carries theBCCH.

4. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status and use an MSto make an emergency call.

NOTE

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of theSDCCH meets the following condition: Assign-optimum-level Threshold - PBT gain <SDCCH uplink Rx level < Assign-optimum-level Threshold. Assign-optimum-level Thresholdis set to 35 by default, and the value of PBT gain is 4. You can change the value of Assign-optimum-level Threshold according to the SDCCH uplink Rx level so that the system canallocate a channel in the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic PBT can be triggered.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: Checking the channel monitoring page on the BSC6900 LMT,you find that channels of two TRXs on the same timeslot are used during the call. Onechannel is in the Working state, and the other is in the Subordinate Channel state.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DPBT;//Verification procedureSET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;

7.30 Configuring Enhanced EDGE CoverageThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104Enhanced EDGE Coverage.


– Currently, the BTSs that support the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature are as follows:BTS3012 series and BTS3900E.

l Dependency on Other Features– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This

feature depends on the feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS.– If the DTRU is used, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-118102

Dynamic PBT(Power Boost Technology) and GBFD-118101 Dynamic TransmitDiversity.


l Other– The cell supports EDGE.

Contextl The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature described in this feature only applies to the 8PSK

modulation mode.l The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature improves the average power of PS services through

the coverage enhancement technology and power sharing technology, thus ensuring thatdata services can have the same cell coverage capability as speech services. This feature isapplicable to both the DTRU and QTRU.

l After the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature is activated, the Cell 8PSK PowerAttenuation Grade parameter becomes invalid automatically.

l Table 7-3 list the conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature forthe BTS3012 series.



7-91

Table 7-3 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3012series)

Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE CoverageIs Supported

The TRX module is DTRU (type B). Supported.

The power of two carriers configured onthe DTRU is 60 W, and the static powerlevels of both carriers are equal to 0.

Supported.

The TRX module is DTRU (type A) orQTRU.

Not supported.

A single DTRU module is configured withone carrier.

Not supported.

When a single DTRU module is configuredwith two carriers, the intelligent shutdownfunction is performed on one of thecarriers.

Not supported.

The two carriers configured on the DTRUmodule belong to two cells.

Not supported.

When one of the carriers is configured asthe BCCH, the other non-BCCH carrier ofthe DTRU module is supported or not.

Not supported.

The transmit mode of the DTRU isconfigured as PBT (excluding dynamicPBT) or transmit diversity (excludingdynamic transmit diversity).

Not supported.

A channel of the DTRU is faulty. Not supported.

l Table 7-4 list conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the

BTS3900E.

Table 7-4 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature(BTS3900E)

Prerequisite Whether Enhanced EDGE CoverageIs Supported

Not FH, RF FH, and baseband FH Supported.

RanSharing Supported.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to ALLOWED.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

l The support of High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed by the BCCH isdetermined by the High-Order Modulation Power Increase on BCCH TRX Allowedparameter.

l The Power Increase in 8PSK parameter is used to control the increased amplitude ofaverage power in 8PSK modulation mode.

l Verification procedure1. Check traffic statistics information about the measurement unit High-Order

Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX on the M2000, and thendetermine the effect of the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature.

NOTE

The measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRXcontain 11 counters, such as Number of Bursts in High-Order Modulation Scheme andNumber of Bursts with High-Order Modulation Power Increase of n dB. The value of ncan be either of the following values: 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, or 4.0.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA, and then set High-

Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to NOT_ALLOWED.

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=ALLOWED;// Deactivation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=NOT_ALLOWED;

7.31 Configuring Extended CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001Extended Cell.


Nonel Dependency on Other Features

The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This featuredepends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

l LicenseThe license is activated.

ContextThe Extended Cell feature expands the cell radius and improves the capability of the BTS forwide coverage.

This feature is applicable to areas with a small population and low signal fading such as deserts,seashores, islands, and water areas.



7-93


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell ExtensionType to DualTS_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell).


1. Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.The expected result: One of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number is notdisplayed, as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell ExtensionType to Normal_cell(Normal cell).

2. Verify that Extended Cell has been deactivated by monitoring the channel status. Fordetails, see Monitoring Channel Status.The expected result: Both of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number aredisplayed, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell

----End

7.32 Configuring Concentric CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201Concentric Cell.


– None


– None

l License

– The license has been activated.

l The cell is configured.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contextl In the tight frequency reuse pattern, the concentric cell technology helps avoiding or

reducing interference and ensuring voice quality.

l The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid(OL) subcell and underlaid (UL) subcell. Compared with the UL subcell, the OL subcellis configured with more channels and thus it becomes the primary traffic bearer layer. TheOL subcell aims to absorb most subscribers in the concentric cell. The UL subcell aims tosolve the coverage problem and provide services in the area not covered by the OL subcell.


1. Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell) and set Enhanced Concentric Allowed as required.

2. Run the SET GTRXIUO command. In this step, set Concentric Attribute toOVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID(Underlaid Subcell) according tothe network planning.

3. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command. In this step, set Concentric Circles HOAllowed to YES(Yes).

4. Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command to set the handover parameters in theconcentric cell according to the network condition.


1. Run the LST GCELL command to query the Cell IUO Type.

The expected result: The Cell IUO Type is Concentric_cell.


1. Run the MOD GCELL command. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).

----End

Example//Activating concentric cell ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="1", MNC="1", LAC=1, CI=1, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=ON, FLEXMAIO=OFF; SET GTRXIUO: TRXID=0, IUO=OVERLAID; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CONHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES, OLTOULHOALLOW=YES;//Verifying concentric cell LST GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;//Deactivating concentric cell MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell;

7.33 Configuring Co-BCCH CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501Co-BCCH Cell.



7-95



– Nonel License

– The license is activated.l The BTS must support the configured frequency band.

ContextCo-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, andimplements the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots.

A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency bandconfiguration is as follows:

l If the overlaid subcell is configured in the DCS1800M, the underlaid subcell is configuredin the GSM900M or GSM850M.

l If the overlaid subcell is configured in the PCS1900M, the underlaid subcell is configuredin the GSM850M.

NOTE

The signal loss of the DCS1800M band changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1km, the signal power of the DCS1800M band is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of the GSM900Mband.

The configuration of the co-BCCH cell should comply with the following principles:

l Generally, a channel in the overlaid subcell is not directly assigned to a call, the incominginter-cell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell, and a call beyondthe coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not forcibly assigned to the overlaid subcell.

l The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned tomaintain the traffic balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell.

l Generally, the GSM900M or GSM850M TRX is configured in the underlaid cell to expandthe coverage, whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M TRX is configured in the overlaidcell to absorb the traffic. Generally, the BCCH is configured on the GSM900M TRX. Thepriorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM.

l The SDCCH, PDCH, and BCCH should be configured on the same TRX.l The frequency hopping between GSM900M and DCS1800M is not allowed. The frequency

hopping within the same frequency band is allowed.l Avoid using a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination modes of the

TRXs on the same frequency band. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs,such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.


1. Optional: When a cell supports GSM850_1900, run the BSC6900 MML commandSET BSCBASIC to set Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

If the cell to be added is in the GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800 band, perform thefollowing steps:

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell and set the parametersFreq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to configure the concentric cellattributes of the cell.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set the handoverparameters in the concentric cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set Assign OptimumLayer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).

2. Use a MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.

NOTETo facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.

The expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing operationsgiven in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages onthe Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in theunderlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to setAdministrative State to Lock(Lock), blocking the channel occupied by the call.

The expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on theTRX in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSPCHNSTAT.

4. Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell.

The expected result: The execution result of the BSC6900 MML command DSPCHNSTAT shows that the call is handed over to a TCH on the TRX in the overlaidsubcell from the underlaid subcell.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO to set Assign OptimumLayer toOSubcell(Overlaid subcell).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to setAdministrative State to Unlock(Unlock), unblocking all TCHs on the TRX in theunderlaid subcell.

7. Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell.

The expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing operationsgiven in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages onthe Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in theoverlaid subcell by running the BSC6900MML command DSP CHNSTAT.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL to remove the co-BCCH cell tobe deactivated.

----End



7-97

7.34 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114401Multi-band Sharing One BSC.



– Nonel License

– The license is activated.l Other Prerequisites

– The TRXs configured for the BTS must support corresponding frequency bands.

Contextl Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multiband networks:

– GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band

– GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 bandl The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900.l The Huawei GBSS supports only the GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH cell, and does not

support the GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell.l Huawei GBSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850

band. Huawei GBSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.

The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is taken asan example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, setFreq. Band to GSM900.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set

Freq. Band to GSM900. Based on network planning, set Cell Index, Cell Name,MCC, MNC, Cell LAC, and Cell CI.

2. Repeat Step 1 to add GSM cells, and set Freq. Band to DCS1800.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover

parameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network optimizationand planning requirements.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell.Perform the dialing test. The call is normal.

5. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell.Perform the dialing test. The call is normal.

6. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards thecentre of the 1800 MHz cell. Then, observe the window displaying the monitoredchannel status. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is still normal.

NOTE

l On the BSC6900 LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, right-click a specified cell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status.

l When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the MonitorChannel Status window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupiedby the call handed to the 1800 MHz cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell whose Freq.Band is set to GSM900.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the Active status.The expected result: Active status is DEACTIVATED.

3. Repeat step 1 to step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is set to DCS1800.

----End

7.35 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band NetworkThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402Enhanced Dual-Band Network.


– None


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

l License

– The license is activated.

Context

The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. Inthe enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with differentcoverage areas are logically formed into a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells.One is an overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-bandnetwork algorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load is balanced between the twocells in a cell group.



7-99

NOTE

l When two cells belong to different operators, the enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured.

l Before changing the relation between the cell and the operator, check whether the enhanced dual-bandnetwork is configured. If the enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the attributes of theenhanced dual-band network.


1. A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the GBSS. Run the BSC6900MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure the GSM900 cell as the uni-directional 2G neighboring cell of the DCS1800 cell.

2. Repeat step Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as the uni-directional 2Gneighboring cell of the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured asbidirectional neighboring cells.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the attributes of theGSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced DoubleFrequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), and Same GroupCell Index Type to BYID(By Index). Then, specify the Same Group Cell Index tothe index of the DCS1800 cell.

l Verification Procedure– Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC twice to set ECSCof the two cells to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA twice to setDirected Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set theparameters of the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, ULSubcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and Distance Between Boundariesof Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. Set Load HOAllowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No).

4. Make MS 1 and MS 2 (both supporting 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands)camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS 1 to make a call to a fixed-line phone.MS 1 is assigned to a channel of the GSM900 cell.

5. Maintain the call of MS 1 and use MS 2 to make a call to the fixed-line phone inthe GSM900 cell. MS 2 is assigned to a channel of the DCS1800 cell because theload of the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General OverloadThreshold. This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned tothe overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signalsin the overlaid subcell are strong enough.

6. Terminate all the calls. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step,set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and ULSubcell General Overload Threshold to 80.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL to set the parametersof the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to0.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

8. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and originate a call. MS 1 is assigned tothe underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is nothigher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the callin the overlaid subcell can be assigned to the underlaid subcell when the traffic inthe underlaid subcell is light.

– Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set allparameters of enabling a certain type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DLRX_LEV Threshold to 4.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set theparameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No),UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General OverloadThreshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell toUL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, andOutgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.

3. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and originate a call to the fixed-line phone.MS 1 is assigned to a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS 1 is handed overto the GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than ULSubcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVERPERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message istraffic.

4. Maintain the call of MS 1. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell. In this step, setUL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL SubcellGeneral Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HOof OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO LevelTH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.

5. The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell becausethe load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General OverloadThreshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is tracedand the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

6. Maintain the call. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell. In this step,set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell AssignmentOptimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL SubcellGeneral Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HOof OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO LevelTH to 63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGEHO Enable to YES(Yes).

7. MS 1 is handed over the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS 1 is lowerthan Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVERPERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message isbetter cell.

NOTEThis type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as thetarget cell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcelland underlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of theoverlaid subcell.



7-101

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the attributes of the

GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL to modify the attributes of the

DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the GSM900 cell

from the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the DCS1800 cell

from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.

----End

7.36 Configuring Flex MAIOThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001Flex MAIO.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping,baseband hopping).

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA (InterferenceBased Channel Allocation).

l License– The license is activated.

l Other Prerequisites– Frame offset is not configured for the BTS.– A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs used by the same timeslot

have the same length.

ContextUnder the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely tooccur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency reuseis adopted. When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted accordingto the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned tothe channel. This reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system.It also achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and thus improves the system capacity.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

CAUTIONl The BTS3900B does not support this feature.l PS services do not support this feature.l Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex

MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells.l Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled

simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set both Start FlexMAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch to ON(On).

l Verification Procedure1. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a

Single Subscriber.2. Make a call in the cell that is enabled with Flex MAIO.3. View the hopping channel Information Element (IE) of the Channel Activation

message.The expected result: The hopping channel IE carries a valid MAIO (not 255) andHSN information.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set both Start Flex

MAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

7.37 Configuring ICCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801ICC.


– Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900GSM, BTS3900A GSM, and DBS3900 GSM.



ContextInterference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multipleantennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas is



7-103

generated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interferencesignals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals toeliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability ofequipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value ofsoftware parameter No. 53.

2. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICC function is enabled. Otherwise,run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to enable the ICCfunction. In this step,

– Set Item Index to 53.

– Set Item Value to its current value plus one.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value ofsoftware parameter No. 53. If the value is an odd number, it indicates that the ICCfunction is enabled. Otherwise, the ICC function is disabled.

2. Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If theICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled,the upload rate is decreased.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBTSSOFT to view the value of

software parameter No. 53.2. If the value is an even number, it indicates that the ICC function is disabled. Otherwise,

run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFT to disable the ICCfunction. In this step,

– Set Item Index to 53.

– Set Item Value to its current value minus one.

----End

7.38 Configuring EICCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821EICC.


– The BTS3012 (QTRU), BTS3012AE (QTRU), BTS3900E, and BTS3900B do notsupport the feature.

– When the RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 are configured with more than four carriers,the feature is not supported.


– Um Interface Software Synchronization is recommended.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l License


Contextl The interference among the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial

correlation and temporal correlation: CCI and ISI. Considering the spatial correlation andtemporal correlation of the interference, ICC eliminates these two types of interferenceindependently. EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interferenceand constructs the multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signalsaccording to the maximum signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC obtainsthe optimized uplink signals.

l ICC requires the matrix of interference. The matrix of interference is calculated on the basisof the training sequence of wanted signals. For each receive signal, the network estimatesa channel model based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the wanted signal,and subtracts the wanted signal from the receive signal to obtain the interfering signal.Then, the network estimates the matrix of each interfering signal and analyzes the statisticaldependency of these interfering signals. Based on the statistical dependency, someinterference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximize thecombination gain.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to enable EICC for a cellwith EICC Allowed set to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of EICCAllowed.

2. Perform an FTP service in a live network with interference and then view the uploadrate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate increases. If the EICC functionis disabled, the upload rate decreases.

3. Make a call in the live network with interference. Then, view the counters related tothe uplink receive quality on the M2000 in the following way: ChoosePerformance > Query Result on the menu bar. In the displayed window, click NewQuery. The Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MRMeasurement > Receive Quality Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value ofthe counter "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0)" andcalculate the proportion of "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive QualityRank 0)" to the sum of "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive QualityRank 0)" through "Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank7)". If the EICC function is enabled, the proportion is high. This indicates that thespeech quality is good. If the EICC function is disabled, the proportion is low. Thisindicates that the speech quality is bad.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to disable EICC for a cellwith EICC Allowed set to NO(No).

----End



7-105

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=YES;//Verification procedureLST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=NO;

7.39 Configuring Frequency HoppingThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 FrequencyHopping. The function consists of radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping (FH) and basebandFH.


– The cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


ContextFH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increasesystem capacity.

When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 throughMCS9, the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enablingFH is not recommended.

When the cell activation state is Active, the FH feature can be configured quickly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In

this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Hop Index,Hop Mode, and Frequency.

NOTE

Set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH) as required.

If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FHgroups.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of thecell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index andFrequency Hopping Mode.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP to set the FH type of a TRX. Inthis step, set TRX ID and Hop Type.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, setChannel Hop Index and Channel MAIO.

NOTE

When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXsmust be different.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.l Procedure for Quick Activation

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly setthe frequency hopping of the cell. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index),and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency Hopping Mode, and then set FrequencyHopping Mode of BCCH TRX and TRXID LST.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,

set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index. Set Frequency HoppingMode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency HoppingMode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).

2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfullyand the voice quality is good. In the Abis signaling tracing window, the AssignmentCommand message is traced, and the value of the information element h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1.


----End

Example//Activation procedureDEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11;SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=10;ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXIDLIST="1";//Verification procedureSET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";

7.40 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency HoppingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.


– A cell must be configured with at least two TRXs.l Dependency on Other Features

– The feature depends on GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping).



7-107

– The feature and GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) are mutuallyexclusive.

l License


Context

Frequency hopping (FH) can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voicequality, and increase system capacity.

When PS services use higher coding schemes such as CS3, CS4, and MCS-5 through MCS-9,the application of FH will exert negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling FH isnot recommended.

When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate a cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP repeatedly to set an FH

group with the BCCH frequency added to the FH group. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index), specify Cell Index and Hop Index, set Hop Mode toBaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH), and then set Frequency.

NOTE

To enable the BCCH TRX to participate in FH, at least two FH groups need to be configuredwith one FH group containing the BCCH frequency.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cellto baseband FH. In this step, set Index Type set to BYID(By Index), and then setCell Index and Frequency Hopping Mode.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP repeatedly to set the FH typeof the TRXs participating in FH (including the BCCH TRX) to baseband FH aftersetting TRX ID and Hop Type.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP repeatedly to set the FHindex and MAIO of the channels after setting Channel Hop Index and ChannelMAIO.

NOTE

l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXsmust be different.

l Channel 0 on the BCCH TRX does not participate in FH, and thus its FH index should beset to 255.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell.

NOTE

Except for the preceding activation steps, you can quickly activate this feature by running thefollowing command:

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set FH for a cell.In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index), and then set Cell Index, Frequency HoppingMode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX, and TRXID LST, which contains the BCCHTRX ID.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP with thefollowing parameter settings: Index Type set to BYID(By Index), Cell Index set tothe index of the cell to be verified, Frequency Hopping Mode set to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping), and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRXset to Hop(Hop).

2. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfullyand the voice quality is good. In the Abis signaling tracing window, the AssignmentCommand message is traced, and the value of the information element h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1.

l Deactivation ProcedureThis feature needs not to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activation procedureDEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11, FREQ2=12;

//Where FREO2 is the BCCH frequencyADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=1, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1,FREQ3=12;SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;

//Repeat this step to set the FH type for all TRXs participating in FH.SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=10;

//Repeat this step to set the hop index and MAIO for channels of the TRXs participating in FH.ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXIDLIST="1";//Verification procedureSET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";

7.41 Configuring Antenna Frequency HoppingThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna FrequencyHopping.


– The base station must be a double-transceiver base station or a base station of the 3900series.

– There are at lease two antennas in the cell participating in antenna FH.


– None

l License



7-109


ContextAntenna frequency hopping enables the downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmittedon other TRXs. This improves the data receiving quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX andthe data sending quality of the BCCH TRX, which improves network performance.

If the cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRXinvolved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping.

When the cell activation state is Active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configuredquickly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell

Antenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configure

antenna FH. In this step, set Index Type and Hop TRX Group Index.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

l Procedure for Quick Configuration1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP to

quickly configure antenna FH. In this step, set Index Type and Cell AntennaHopping.

l Verification ProcedureNone.


----End

Example//Activation procedureDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=YES_HPANT;ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPTRXINDEX=0, TRXID1=1, TRXID2=2;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.42 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency MultiplexingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

– The XPUa/XPUb board is configured.

– There are idle ports on the Abis interface board.


– This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC, andGBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network.

l License


Context

The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequencyresources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so thatmore frequencies can be used as TCHs, thus increasing the system capacity.

NOTE

If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from anon-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the wholenetwork.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setTIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set LevelThresh. for Assign BCCH Udr TBCCH and Quality Thresh. for Assign BCCHUdr TBCCH as required.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set LoadThreshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.


1. Make a call in the cell to be verified.The expected result: The call is successfully made and the voice quality is good.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. In this step, set Object Typeto CELL(Cell) and specify Cell Index.The expected result: The value of Sub Channel Status is Occupied.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setTIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

7.43 Configuring IBCAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002Interference Based Channel Allocation (IBCA).



7-111


The XPUa/XPUb board is in position.l Dependency on Other Features

– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the features GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network orGBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RFhopping), GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, and GBFD-118621Connection Inter BSC over IP (when IBCA of Inter-BSC is supported).

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO.l License

The license is activated.l Other Prerequisites

Two cells are configured. Cell 1 has at least two TRXs; cell 2 has at least three TRXs.

ContextWhen the network admits a new call, the interference between the established calls and the newcall is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with theminimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the networkand thus enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. This increases the network capacity whilemaintaining the voice quality in the entire network.

NOTE

l In an IBCA-enabled cell, each timeslot and each frequency band can be configured with only one MAgroup; for a co-BCCH cell, two MA groups can be configured (one for each frequency band).

l A maximum of three MA groups can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell; a maximum of 24 MAgroups can be configured for all the IBCA neighboring cells.

l The number of frequencies in each MA group in an IBCA-enabled cell cannot exceed 64.

l A maximum of 12 IBCA neighboring cells can be configured for an IBCA-enabled cell.

l The calculated value from Number of MAs for the Serving Cell × Number of MAIOs for the ServingCell × Number of MAs for All IBCA Neighboring Cells × Maximum Number of MAIOs for IBCANeighboring Cells cannot exceed 8,192.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an XPUa or XPUb board in theMPS or EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.

NOTE

A maximum of four MCP boards can be configured to share the IBCA calculation load andimprove the system reliability.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD twice to enable IBCAfor cell 1 and cell 2. In this step, set IBCA Allowed to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IBCAInfo Report Period Within BSC and IBCA Info Report Period Between BSC.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLMAIOPLAN for multiple times.In this step, set Index Type to BYID(By Index) or BYNAME(By Name). In addition,




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

specify Hop Index, and then set related MAIO parameters for cell 1 and cell 2 basedon network planning.

NOTE

Each cell needs to be configured with more than two MAIOs and MAIOs for cell 1 should beconsistent with those for cell 2.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL for cell 1 and cell 2 toconfigure each cell as the IBCA neighboring cell of the other. In this step, setNeighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cell), and set IBCADyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).

NOTE

If you need to configure the handover-supporting IBCA function, you should set NeighboringCell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell).

l Verifying IBCA Algorithm1. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a

Single Subscriber.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT for cell 1 and cell

2. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on the same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and set Administrative State of all other TCHs toLock(Lock).

3. Use MS 1 to make a call in cell 1 and hold on. Ten seconds later, use MS 2 to makea call in cell 2 and hold on.

4. In the Single User CS Trace tracing window, check the two calls. Record the MAIOinformation element in the Channel Activation message on the TCH.

5. Compare the MAIO for the call made by MS 1 with that for the call made by MS 2.The expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicatesthat the IBCA algorithm takes effect.

l Verifying IBCA Handover1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL to configure cell 1 and cell 2

as handover and IBCA neighboring cells of each other. In this step, set NeighboringCell Type to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA NeighboringCell), and set IBCA Dyn Measure Neighbour Cell Flag to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT for cell 1 and cell2. In this step, set Administrative State of the TCHs on the same timeslot of all non-BCCH TRXs to Unlock(Unlock) and set Administrative State of all other TCHs toLock(Lock).

3. Use MS 1 to originate a call in cell 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETFHO to hand over the call to cell 2. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell) andthen set Cell Index Type to BYNAME(By name) or BYID(By index). Set HandoverScope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell).

4. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of aSingle Subscriber. Check and record the MAIO information element in the ChannelActivation message on the TCH for MS 1 in cell 2.

5. Do not hang up MS 1 and use MS 2 to originate a call in cell 1. Run the BSC6900MML command SET FHO to hand over the call in cell 1 to cell 2. In this step, setObject Type to CELL(Cell) and then set Cell Index Type to BYNAME(Byname) or BYID(By index). In addition, set Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell).



7-113

6. Perform the single user CS trace by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of aSingle Subscriber. Check and record the MAIO information element in the ChannelActivation message on the TCH for MS 2 in cell 2.

7. Compare the MAIOs in the two records in Step 4 and Step 6.The expected result: The MAIOs in the two records are inconsistent, which indicatesthat the IBCA handover takes effect.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL to remove the neighboring

cell relationship between cell 1 and cell 2. In this step, set Index Type to BYID(Byindex). In addition, specify Source Cell Index and Neighbor 2G Cell Index.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Typeto BYID(By Index), set Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCANeighboring Cells). In addition, specify Source Cell Index.The expected result: No queried items have desired results on display.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IBCAAllowed to NO(No).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index). In addition, specify Cell Index.The expected result: IBCA Allowed is set to No.

----End

7.44 Configuring Soft-Synchronized NetworkThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201Soft-Synchronized Network.


– The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board is configured.– The BTS supports the Soft-Synchronized Network feature.


feature depends on the feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP.– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BSC is configured with at least two

BTSs.– Each BTS is configured with two or more cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and

antenna azimuth of each cell are configured.

ContextThe soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires thecooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve the




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

performance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature canconvert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with otherassociated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference andthus increases the system capacity.

NOTE

l The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.l This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA to improve the frequency

utilization and increase the network capacity.l This feature is applicable to the scenario where TDM transmission is used between the BSC and BTS,

including Abis TDM over E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1. In the scenario whereEthernet network is used between the BSC and BTS, that is, Abis IP over FE/GE, the Soft-SynchronizedNetwork feature is not supported.


To activate the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS repeatedly. In this step, specifyBTS Index or BTS Name of each BTS involved in the intra-BSC soft-synchronizednetwork. In addition, set Site Sync Zone of each BTS to the same value.

NOTE

BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs andis set as required.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG. In this step, set Reference BTSIndex to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition,set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch toON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS to NO(NO).

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NCELL. In this step, set AISSTask Index to the index of the soft-synchronized network task specified in Step 1.Then, set Cell Index Type to BYIDX(By Cell Index) and set First Cell Index andSecond Cell Index to add a pair of neighboring cells in the BSC.

NOTE

A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated according to certain rules.If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboringcells as required.

To activate the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows:

The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is taken asan example.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS repeatedly. In this step, specifyBTS Index or BTS Name of each BTS involved in the intra-BSC soft-synchronizednetwork. In addition, set Site Sync Zone of each BTS to the same value.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG for BSC 1. In this step, setReference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronizednetwork. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset TimeAdjustment Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC toYES.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG for BSC 2. In this step, setReference BTS Index to the index of a BTS that supports the soft-synchronized



7-115

network. In addition, set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset TimeAdjustment Switch to ON(ON), set Support BSC AISS to YES, set Base BSC toNO, and set Control BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC 1.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT2GCELL for BSC1 toconfigure a cell under BSC 2 as the external cell of BSC 1.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL for BSC 1 toconfigure the external cell added in Step 4 as the neighboring cell of a cell under BSC1.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD EXTNCELL for BSC 1 to adda pair of neighboring cells between BSCs.

NOTE

A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. Ifthe neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cellsas required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.


To verify the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information on thesoft-synchronized network.

NOTE

If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information on all the soft-synchronized networktasks is queried.

The expected result: Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC soft-synchronized network exists. If the index exists, you can infer that the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network is added successfully.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AISSRUNSTATE to query the BTSsynchronization information.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSPBTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offsetin the synchronization between BTSs.

To verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network, do as follows:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information on thesoft-synchronized network.The expected result: Support BSC AISS of BSC 1 is YES, and Control BSC DPCof BSC 2 is the SP of control BSC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BSCSYNCINFO to query the informationabout the synchronization between BSCs.

NOTE

l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the SP of BSC 1 to query the state of the local BSC.

l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the SP of BSC 2 to query the state of the collaborative BSC.

The expected result: BSC Sync State of BSC 1 and BSC 2 is Adjusted.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offsetin the synchronization between BTSs.The expected result: BTS status of the BTS is Synchronized.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AISSCFG to remove a soft-synchronizednetwork task. In this step, specify BTS Index or BTS Name of the BTS involved inthe intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.

----End

7.45 Configuring BTS GPS SynchronizationThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPSSynchronization.


– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature.– In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added.– In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added.



ContextConverting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce theinterference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related tothe radio network.

The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSMas an example.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board. In this step,set Board Type to USCU(USCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP. In this step, set GPS orGlonass to GPS(GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power SupplySwitch to NOPOWER(No Power).

NOTE

GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna PowerSupply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPSAntenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).





7-117


----End

Example// Activation procedureADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=2, SN=10, BT=USCU;SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=2, SN=10, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=800, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;

7.46 Configuring Synchronous EthernetThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202Synchronous Ethernet.


– Impact on BSC6900 hardware: IP interface boards need to be used on the Abis interface.– Impact on BTS hardware: This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations.


feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.l License


ContextThis feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of asynchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet.The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC orBTS hardware.

The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer ofthe Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the code flow ofthe Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting thehighly precise clock. The reception end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the dataflow. In this way, the accuracy of the clock is ensured. Another benefit of the feature is that itdoes not require additional BTS hardware to achieve clock synchronization in the all-IP network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the clock type of a BTS. Inthis step, set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the current clock source

configuration of the system.Expected results: Selected Clock Source is SynEth Clock.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0;// Verification procedureDSP BTSBRD: INFOTYPE=BASEINFO, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.47 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control AlgorithmThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117601HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.



– This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-110802 Pre-processing ofMeasurement Report.


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC that the test cell belongs to is connected to the M2000, and cell-level counters

can be retrieved on the M2000.

ContextPower control is a process in which the MS or BTS uses certain rules to adjust and control thetransmit power as required, without affecting the speech quality. It reduces the interference inthe entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control is mainly applicable to thenetwork with tight frequency reuse as well as high traffic volume or strong interference. In theGSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It canalso be performed on each MS.

HUAWEI III power control algorithm enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 EnhancedPower Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of themeasurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of thresholdconfiguration.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, setPower Control Switch to PWR3(Power controlIII).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow IIIPower Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control For



7-119

Non-AMR to ON(Allowed). In addition, adjust Huawei III power control parametersor set them to their default values.

NOTE

Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR areset to ON(Allowed) by default.

l Verification Procedure1. Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the

BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies whilethe frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channelfrequencies.

2. Retrieve the following counters related to Cell 0 on the M2000.

Table 7-5 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control

Measurement Unit Counter

Measurement of PowerControl Messages in MRper Cell

Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call

Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call

Ratio of Duration (Maximum Downlink TransmitPower) (%)

Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%)

Mean Strength of Downlink Signals

Mean Strength of Uplink Signals

Mean Quality of Downlink Signals

Mean Quality of Uplink Signals

Interference BandMeasurement per TRX

Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1





Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1





Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)





Receive QualityMeasurement per TRX

Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)








Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)








Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)



7-121









Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean ReceiveQuality Rank 0)








3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.The expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II).

5. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.6. Check the counters for one hour and save them.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, setPower Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR3(Power control III).

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the settingof Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1.The expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR3(Power controlIII).

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow IIIPower Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control ForNon-AMR to ON(Allowed) for cell 0 and cell 1.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings ofAllow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR for cell 0 and cell 1.The expected result: Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III PowerControl For Non-AMR are set to ON(Allowed).

11. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.12. Check the counters for one hour and save them.13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6.

The expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtainedin Step 12 is smaller than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related tointerference band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step12 is larger than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to receive quality,the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is larger than thatobtained in 6Step 6.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Control Switch to PWR2(Power control II).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Control Switch.The expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II).

----End

7.48 Configuring DTXThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801DTX.


– Nonel Dependency on other features

– Nonel License

– The license has been activated.l Other Prerequisites

– Idle channels are available in the test cell.



7-123

ContextLicense is required to activate DTX.

DTX reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thus reducing the systeminterference and saving system resources. In addition, DTX reduces the workload of the TXmodule of the MS, thus enabling the MS to enjoy a longer call duration and standby time.

CAUTIONDTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set FRUplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and FR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).

NOTEIf the HR service is processed currently, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and HR UseDownlink DTX to YES(Yes).

2. Optional (this parameter is configured during downlink DTX configuration). Run theBSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT to set the software parameters of acell. In this step, set DL DTX Strategy to BSC Strategy.

l Verification ProcedureVerifying uplink DTX1. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface.2. Run the SND GCELLSYSMSG command to send system messages to the test cell.3. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.

Expected results: A message of the BCCH Information type is traced. system-info-type is system-information-3 and the value of dtx is 1. The system message is sentcorrectly.

4. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.5. Check the results of message tracing over the Abis interface in the CS domain.

Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In theinformation element channel-number, the value of channel-type is bm-acch. In theinformation element channel-mode, the value of dtx-uplink is 1. This indicates thatthe BSC supports uplink DTX.

Verifying downlink DTX1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.2. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface, and then check the results of message tracing overthe Abis interface in the CS domain.Expected results: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In theinformation element channel-mode, the value of dtx-downlink is 1. This indicatesthat the BSC supports downlink DTX.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set the basicparameters of a cell. In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall notUse) and FR Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation DTXSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=YES, FRULDTX=Shall_Use;SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, DLDTXPOLICY=BSC_STRATEGY;//Verification DTXSND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;//Deactivation DTXSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=NO, FRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use;

7.49 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier IntelligentShutdown

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.


– None


– This feature and the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (Baseband Hopping)cannot be used together.

l License


Context

The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled during a specificperiod. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to reduce power consumptionwhen estimated traffic load is light, and disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they areavailable for use when estimated traffic load is heavy.

Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. The channels onthe BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRXchannels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, theBTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with highpriorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels intoa few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down.

When the BCCH TRX participates in baseband FH, the cell TRX cannot be shut down. Thus,the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown cannot be used.



7-125

When the BCCH TRX does not participate in baseband FH and all the TRXs (excluding theBCCH TRX) in the cell are idle, the TRXs can be shut down. If one or more TRXs (excludingthe BCCH TRX) are not idle, the TRXs cannot be shut down.

Before configuring Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier on the TRX, ensure that the TRXmeets the following conditions:l The TRX is not on the BCCH.l The PDCH is not available on the TRX.l The antenna hopping is disabled for the TRX.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set AllowDynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to YES(Yes), and set Time When the FunctionIs Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actualcondition.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAllow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes) to enable theTRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function for the cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set AllowShutdown of TRX Power Amplifier to YES(Yes), thus allowing the BSC6900 toshut down the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

4. Optional: Run the ADD BSCDSTPADATE command to set the period in which theTRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled. In the period of heavytraffic, this function needs to be disabled.

NOTE

l The BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA can be used to query the value of ProhibitingDynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Date Range.

l The BSC6900 MML command RMV BSCDSTPADATE can be used to remove the period inwhich the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled.

l Verification Procedure1. Wait for about five minutes. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP

GTRXSTAT to query the value of Close TRX Power.

The expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is Yes.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set AllowDynamic Shutdown Trx by BSC to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAllow Dynamic Shutdwn TRX to NO(No).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Allow DynamicShutdown TRX to NO(No).

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.50 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier IntelligentShutdown on Timeslot Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.


– DRFU, DRRU, and optimized DTRU support this feature.

– BTS3012/BTS3012AE(QTRU), DBS3900(RRU3008), and BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L(GRFU) do not support this feature.

– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature whenthey use a non-optimized double-transceiver unit.


– None.

l License


Context

TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level is a function based on which thePA is controlled on a timeslot basis. In this manner, the static power consumption of the PA is0 in the timeslots when the TRX is has no data to transmit, and thus the static power consumptionof the PA is reduced.

TRX power consumption is a major part of the BTS power consumption, and PA powerconsumption is a major part of TRX power consumption. According to network operationexperiences, TRXs do not transmit signals all the time. This function shuts down the PA of theTRX when there is no data to be transmitted in certain timeslots, thus reducing the cost on powergreatly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set Allow TurningOff Time Slot to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA to check the value of Time SlotTurning Off PA Enable. The expected result is Yes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA. In this step, set AllowDynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to NO(No).

----End



7-127

Example//Activation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=YES;//Verification procedure LST BSCDSTPA:;//Deactivation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=NO;

7.51 Configuring Intelligent Combiner BypassThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604Intelligent Combiner Bypass.


– Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXsand must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are theoptimized DTRU, DRRU, and DRFU.

l Dependency on Other Features– This feature and the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) are

mutually exclusive.l License

– The license of this feature is activated.l Other Prerequisites

– The cell attribute parameter Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment is set to Yes.

ContextThe ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channelson the BCCH carrier in the cell.

The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neithercan the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs.

The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when theoutput power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of theTRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W andthe static power level is 1.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, changeICB Allowed to YES(YES).



----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Example// Activation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ICBALLOW=YES;

7.52 Configuring Active Backup Power ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605Active Backup Power Control.



– Nonel Dependency on License

– The license for this feature is activated.

ContextThe BSC takes the cell coverage, capacity, and backup power time into consideration whenperforming the Active Backup Power Control function. An operator can configure three backuppower control strategies:l Coverage preferred

The BTS shuts down some TRXs and then gradually decreases the transmit power of theremaining TRXs.

l Capacity preferredThe BTS gradually decreases the transmit power of all the TRXs and then shuts down someTRXs.

l Backup power time preferredThe BTS shuts down some TRXs and at the same time decreases the transmit power of theremaining TRXs.

The Active Backup Power Control function gradually reduces the coverage area of a cell, andthus the calls on the edge of the cell are absorbed by neighboring cells. Therefore, the networkKPIs are not affected.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set BackupPower Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power), and set Backup PowerSaving Policy, Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX Start Time[T2],Drop Power Start Time[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop PowerThreshold according to the actual requirements.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSBAKPWR to query the value of Backup

Power Saving Policy.



7-129

The expected result: The value of Backup Power Saving Policy is not NULL.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set BackupPower Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).

----End

7.53 Configuring Power Optimization Based on ChannelType

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.





ContextThe power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltageadjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustmentfunction, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according tothe applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRXworks in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSKmode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. TheBTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, thus reducing the power consumption.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCHPower Saving Enable to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAdjust Voltage to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of PDCH

Power Saving Enable.

The expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is YES(Yes).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the value

of Adjust Voltage.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set PDCHPower Saving Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to set AdjustVoltage to NO(No).

----End

7.54 Configuring PSU Smart ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111608PSU Smart Control.


– The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU), and BTS3900B/E do notsupport the feature.


– None

l License



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, change PSUTurning Off Enable to YES(YES).



----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES;

7.55 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power ConsumptionOptimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111609Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.



7-131


– None


– None

l Dependency on License


Context

The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature aims to reduce the transmitpower of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX, thus reducing the power consumption ofthe BTS.

After this feature is enabled, the accuracy of measuring the receive levels of neighboring cellsmay be affected. Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled when the traffic islight, for example, at night.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set PowerDerating Enabled to YES(Yes), and set other parameters such as Power DeratingStart Time, Power Derating End Time, and Power Derating Range.

WARNINGWhen the power of the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX is reduced, thedownlink receive level of the cell detected by the MS camping on the neighboringcells may be inaccurate and the handover of the MS to the cell may fail. Therefore,perform this operation with caution.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step,set Power Derating Active Channel Enabled to YES(Yes), the BSC6900 is allowedto reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to query the value ofPower Derating Enabled.

The expected result: The value of Power Derating Enabled is Yes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set PowerDerating Enabled to NO(No).

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.56 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power OffThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111610Dynamic Cell Power Off.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

l License


– The BTS that is configured with the specified cell supports the feature of dynamic cellpower off.

– There are concentric cells in the cell.

Context

In a co-BSC multiband network topology, when the traffic volume is low, a fully coverednetwork can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In such a case, all the network equipmentof the other frequency band can be disabled to reduce the network power consumption.

NOTE

The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setEnable Turning Off Cell to ENABLE(Enable), and set the parameters related to thetime of dynamic cell power off.

NOTE

If the concentric cell does not support certain services in the cell, the related services in theconcentric cell are not supported after dynamic cell power off is deactivated.


NOTE

There is a concentric cell in the cell to be verified and the concentric cell works properly. There isno call access request in the cell to be verified. The traffic of the concentric cell is lower than SameCoverage Cell Load Threshold.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setCell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, set Enable Turning Off Cell toENABLE(Enable), and set Same Coverage Cell Index Type to the index of theconcentric cell. In addition, set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning



7-133

Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time ranges between the time intervalof the two parameters.

2. Wait for about five minutes, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT to display the status of the cell to be verified.The expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to Yes, which indicates that thedynamic cell power off feature is valid.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setDyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensurethat the current time is beyond the time period specified by the two parameters.

4. Wait for about one minute, and then run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT to display the status of the cell to be verified.The expected result: Cell Dynamic Switch is set to No, which indicates that the cellis enabled.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF. In this step, setEnable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

7.57 Configuring TRX Working Voltage AdjustmentThis section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111611 Configuring TRXWorking Voltage Adjustment.


– The BTS3900B does not support the feature.


– None

l License



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAdjust Voltage to YES(Yes).



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setAdjust Voltage to NO(No).

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=YES;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=NO;

7.58 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent VoltageAdjustment

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-111612 Multi-CarrierIntelligent Voltage Adjustment.


– BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/AE(DTRU), DBS3900(RRU3004), BTS3900/A/L(DRFU), and BTS3900B do not support the feature.


– None

l License



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PAIntelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(YES).



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA. In this step, set PAIntelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=YES;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=NO;

7.59 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111613Weather Adaptive Power Management.



7-135

Prerequisitel The license of this feature is activated.l The M2000 supports the Weather Adaptive Power Management feature.l The solar controller supports the Weather Adaptive Power Management feature.l The solar controller is connected to the BTS.

Contextl The Weather Adaptive Power Management feature is license-controlled.l Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Weather Adaptive Power Management feature.l Administrators or operators configure the relevant parameters and periodically record the

weather forecast data on the M2000. The BTS obtains the information about the powergeneration capacity of the solar panel, power consumption of the BTS, and remainingcapacity of the storage batteries from the solar energy controller, and then reports thecollected information to the M2000 periodically. The M2000 periodically generates theworking power levels of the BTS based on the available electric power of the currentbatteries of the BTS, predicted electric power to be generated, and predicted power to beconsumed by the BTS. This minimizes the probability of power exhaustion and maximizesthe service duration of the BTS without affecting the service quality. In this way, renewableenergy is optimally configured and the cost for configuring the renewable energy is reduced.

l The main operations performed on the M2000 are as follows. For details, see the M2000Operator Guide.– History weather data serves as an important reference for the M2000 to predict the

electric power to be generated on the BTS. You need to collect and configure the historyweather data on the M2000.

– After you create a BTS power-saving task, set parameters relevant to the task, andperform the task on the M2000, the M2000 predicts the electric power to be generatedon the BTS solar panel based on the weather data. Then, the M2000 periodicallygenerates the working power levels of the BTS based on the information such as powergeneration capacity of the solar panel, remaining capacity of the storage batteries, andpower consumption of the BTS.

7.60 Configuring Flex AbisThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301Flex Abis.


– The XPUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa board.For how to configure a board, see Configuring a Board.


l License– The license has been activated.

l The configuration on the BTS is complete. For details, see Configuring the BTS.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contextl In traditional mode, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the Um interface

resources and the Abis interface transmission resources. After Flex Abis is enabled in theBSC, the Abis interface transmission resources use the resource pool mode to improve theutilization of the transmission resources.

l The bypass BTS, upper-level BTS, and lower-level BTS must also work in Flex Abis mode.l When both Huawei I BTS ring topology and Flex Abis are applied, the following conditions

must be met:– Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs. In addition, the BTSs support only the

configuration of one E1 for the forward link and one E1 for the reverse link.– No BTS can be configured with Abis bypass.– No BTS can be configured with 16 kbit/s LPAD signaling links.– No BTS can be configured with Abis timeslot self-detection and self-healing functions.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.NOTE

This operation affects the ongoing services. Perform the operation when the traffic volume islow.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode toFLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) to enable the Flex Abis.

3. Run the SET BTSFLEXABISPARA command to set the parameters related to FlexAbis.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPORTTS. In this step, set BTS In PortNO. to the number of the port the base station is connected to, Port Direction to thesame direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(ALL).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFORBIDTS to block Flex timeslots. Inthis step, set Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., andEnd Sub Timeslot NO. according to the timeslot No. and sub-timeslot No. of Flextimeslots to ensure that only two contiguous 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots are used for FlexAbis.

NOTE

Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots. Timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots, and reserve only one 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot for services.

3. Run the DEA GCELL command. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cellto be blocked. Repeat this step until there is only one cell under the BTS.

4. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set Channel No. tothe number of the channel to be blocked, and Administrative State to Lock(Lock).Repeat this step until the cell under the BTS has only one BCCH, one SDCCH, andtwo TCHs.

5. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and hold on the call.Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to query the timeslot state. In thisstep, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED



7-137

(OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupiedby the call service is the timeslot that is unblocked.

6. End the call and block the occupied TCH. Then, only one unblocked TCH is available.7. Use the test MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell, and hold on the call.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTScommand to check the state oftimeslots. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., Port No., and set State toOCCUPIED(OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on anew TCH whose Flex Abis timeslot is unblocked.

8. Hang up the call.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.

NOTE

This operation affects the ongoing services. Perform the operation when the traffic volume islow.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode toFIX_16K_ABIS(Fix Abis).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

----End

7.61 Configuring BTS Local SwitchThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS LocalSwitch.


– The BTS local switching applies to only the double-transceiver BTS and the 3900 seriesbase stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.

l Dependency on Other Features– In Abis TDM transmission mode, the feature depends on GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.– In Abis IP transmission mode, the feature depends on GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and

GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.– The feature are the following features are mutually exclusive: GBFD-118602 A over

IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.l License

– The license of this feature is activated.l The BSC can work in either BM/TC separate mode or BM/TC combined mode, and TDM

transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces.l In the sites with combined BTS cabinets, BSS local switching can be enabled only when

the BTS software and TRX software both support BSS local switching.l If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, the BSS local

switching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the sameMGW or different MGWs.

l In HDLC transmission mode, BSS local switching is not supported.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Context

The BTS local switching applies to only the double-transceiver BTS and the 3900 series basestations in TDM or IP transmission mode. When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, theBTS must be enabled with Flex Abis.

The BTS local switching can save the transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfacesand reduce the TC processing delay during the call.

If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS localswitching mode: lawful interception, MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMFnumber receiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and independent billing ofBSS local switching.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS. In this step, set BSS LocalSwitching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY(BTS Only), and specify Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number forBTS.

– If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When AbisCongests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch.

– If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by PrefixNumber), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to determine whether the BSSlocal switching performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.

NOTE

l If the BSC6900 is expected to perform the BSS local switching, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

l If the MSC is expected to involve in the BSS local switching you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function), and then to set related parameters on the MSC side.

3. When the BTS uses the TDM service-bearing mode, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(FlexAbis).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW. In this step, set Support BTSLocal Switch to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query the call resources used

by an MS.

NOTE

If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no information on the Ater or Abis interface isdisplayed.


----End



7-139

7.62 Configuring Abis Transmission OptimizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401Abis Transmission Optimization.


– The Abis interface processing board PEUa or POUc must be configured.– In BM/TC separated scenarios, a DPUc board must be configured for HDLC frame

processing in the subrack where the PEUa board is located.l Dependency on Other Features

– This feature cannot be enabled together with the "GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch"feature.


l The BTS software version supports this function.l The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.

ContextThe Abis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channelcomposed of several timeslots, thus enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.

CAUTIONl HDLC_HubBTS does not support the ring topology, bypass, and Flex Abis.l HDLC does not support the bypass and Flex Abis.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS. In this step, set Service Type to HDLC orHDLC_HubBTS.

Step 2 Configure the BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS.

----End

7.63 Configuring Flex AterThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Flex Ater.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– Nonel License


– The TC subrack of the BSC is remotely configured.

– TDM transmission is used over the Ater interface.

Context

When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the Ater resources are allocated according to the channeltype during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/stimeslots on the Ater interface are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used.

This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TCnetworking.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Switchof 8K on Ater to YES(Yes).

l Verifying Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERTS. In this step, set BM/TC config

flag to CFGBM(BM) or CFGTX(TX), and set Ater connection path index to theindex of an Ater connection path.

The expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that offull-rate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to thatof half-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled.

l Deactivating Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Switch

of 8K on Ater to NO(No).

----End

7.64 Configuring BSC Local SwitchThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701BSC Local Switch.





7-141

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118401 Abis TransmissionOptimization, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1,GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC can be work in either BM/TC separate mode or BM/TC combined mode, and

TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface.– A BTS in transmission optimization mode or an IP-based BTS cannot involve in the

BSC local switch.– In the sites with combined BTS cabinets, BSS local switch can be enabled only when

the BTS software and TRX software both support BSS local switch.

ContextWhen the calling and called MSs are served by the same BSC, the BSC performs loopback onthe speech signals inside the BSC rather than transmitting them over the Ater and A interfaces,therefore releasing the Ater transmission resources and TC resources.

It helps save the local or remote resources on the Ater interface.

If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BSC localswitch mode: lawful interception, MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF numberreceiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS localswitch.

If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, the BSS local switchingis not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the same MGW or differentMGWs.

In HDLC transmission mode, BSS local switching is not supported.


1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching GeneralStrategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), and specifyOptions for BSC Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS.

NOTE

l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When AterCongests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch.

l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by PrefixNumber), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.

2. Run the MOD GCNNODE command to determine whether the BSS local switchperformed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC.

NOTE

l If the BSC is expected to perform the BSS local switch, you need to set MSC-CollaboratedBSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

l If the MSC is expected to involve in the BSS local switch you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function), and then to set related parameters on the MSC side.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

3. Optional: Run the SET BTSLSW command. In this step, set Support BTS LocalSwitch to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC.2. Run the DSP CALLRES command to query the resources of an MS.

NOTE

If BSC local switch is enabled successfully, no information on the Ater interface is displayedin the result.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the SET BSSLS command. In this step, set BSS Local Switching General

Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).

----End

7.65 Configuring Ater Compression TransmissionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902Ater Compression Transmission.


– The POUc board is in position.– When the Abis interface uses TDM transmission, the DPUc board is configured.

l Dependency on Other FeaturesThis feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BM/TC subracks are in separated

configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely.

ContextWhen the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configuredremotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted toimprove the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost.The Ater Compression Transmission feature is based on IP over PPP over STM-1 technology,where the IP packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted overthe channelized STM-1.

The compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface does not support IP over FE/GE,but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on thesignaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.




7-143

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Ater InterfaceTransfer Mode to IP(IP).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a POUc board.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Aterconnection path between the MPS and the TCS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML betweenthe MPS and the main TCS.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL to add an Ater signaling linkbetween the MPS/EPS and the TCS.

6. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node. In thisstep, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC).

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path. To add moreIP paths, run this command repeatedly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State..

2. Verifing the physical layer link.

– When the PPPLINK is configured.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings ofLink state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IPaddress to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNKcommand and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IPaddress in the DSP PPPLNK command.

The expected result: the statistics on PING packets can be received, the linkis functional.

– When the MPLINK is configured.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings ofLink state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings ofLink state and LCP negotiated state.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set Source IPaddress to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRPcommand and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IPaddress in the DSP MPGRP command.

Expected result: the statistics on PING packets can be received, the link isfunctional.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD linkis functional.Expected result: the Usage status is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), the LAPD link isfunctional.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacentnode, number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checkingrelated parameters.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Expected result: the Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greaterthan 0, it indicates that the adjacent node is functional.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path isavailable.Expected result: the Operation status is AVAILABLE(AVAILABLE) and theavailable bandwidth is greater than 0, it indicates that the IP path is functional.

6. Make a call. The call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, run theBSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the usage of the Ater interfaceresources.Expected result: the UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same and theservice types are correct.

l Deactivation Procedure1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

7.66 Configuring BTS Ring TopologyThis section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-117801 BTS RingTopology.


– The BSC is configured with the XPUa and EIUa boards.– The BTS3900B does not support the feature.

l Dependency on Other Features– Huawei BTS ring topology II depends on GBFD-117802 Fast Ring Network Switch.– The feature conflicts with the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and GBFD-118611

Abis IP over E1/T1.l License


ContextRing topology is a special type of chain topology. In the topology, sites connect to each otherto form a normal chain. The lowest-level site is connected to the BSC through a transmissionlink, thus forming a ring. If the communication of the ring is broken at a point, the topology ofthe sites that precede the breakpoint remains the same. The sites that follow the breakpoint forma new chain connection in the reverse direction.

Compared with the ordinary chain topology, the advantage of the ring topology is as follows:When a connection is broken at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In thisway, the sites precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, thus improving therobustness of the system.




7-145

1. Configure the BTS data by referring to Configuring the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD BTS. In this step, set Config Ring to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT repeatedly to add BTSconnections.

NOTE

You need to configure at least one connection whose BTS In Port No. is set to 0.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR to set ring topologyattributes of the BTS. In this step, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and then setRing II Wait Time Before Switch, and Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to check that Config Ring is set toYes.


----End

7.67 Configuring TRX Mutual AidThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801TRX Mutual Aid.



– Nonel License


– TRX Mutual Aid is supported in a cell.– At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell.– BCCH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.– Baseband FH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.– Switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.– Switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid is supported in the test cell.

ContextTRX mutual aid is a function with which the BSC designates an available TRX in the cell toreplace a faulty TRX. TRX mutual aid ensures that the cell works normally when faults occuron some TRXs in the cell.l BCCH mutual aid is a function with which the BSC selects a normal TRX as the new BCCH

TRX by means of the TRX cooperation algorithm when the BCCH TRX is faulty. In this




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

way, the cell is always functional. When the fault in the original BCCH TRX is rectified,the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX.

l Baseband FH TRX mutual aid is a function enabled by the BSC when a TRX involved inFH is faulty in a cell whose Frequency hopping mode is set to BaseBand_FH(Basebandfrequency hopping). In such a case, the BSC removes the faulty TRX from the FH group,whereas other TRXs in the FH group remain BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequencyhopping).

TRX mutual aid is specific for each cell. That is, you can enable or disable the TRX Mutual Aidfunction for each cell independently.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRXAiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allow & Recover Immediately) andSwitchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part)

l Verification ProcedureVerifying BCCH TRX mutual aid and switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid1. Power off the BCCH TRX board for the test cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes

faulty and BCCH mutual aid is triggered.2. Wait 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML command

DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Check whether Channel Type ofchannel 0 (not the BCCH TRX in initial configuration) is set to Main BCCH.

3. Use an MS to access the cell with the BCCH TRX mutual aid function enabled, andmake a call. Check whether the call is set up successfully and whether voice can beheard clearly during the call.

4. Power on the TRX mentioned in step Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRXmutual aid.

5. Wait 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Check whether Channel Type ofchannel 0 (the BCCH TRX in initial configuration) is set to Main BCCH.

6. Use an MS to access the cell with the switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aid functionenabled, and then make a call. Check whether the call is set up successfully andwhether voice can be heard clearly during the call.

Verifying baseband FH TRX mutual aid and switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aid1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step,

set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping)and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop).

NOTE

l There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the basebandhopping frequency when a TRX in the same group is faulty.

l Operations such as performing a level-4 reset of a base station, adding a base station afterremoving it, activating a base station, and deactivating a base station clear the base stationstate recorded at the BSC. As a result, the cell participating in baseband FH TRXcooperation returns to the initial state.

2. Trace the CS messages over the Abis interface by referring to #mbsc-10-83. In theAbis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the OML tab. Then, power off a TRX inthe baseband FH group to enable Baseband FH Mutual Aid.



7-147

3. Wait for 15 minutes, and then check that the IE arfcnLst in the Set ChannelAttributes message of the faulty TRX includes only one frequency whereasarfcnLst in Set Channel Attributes of other TRXs in the same baseband FH groupincludes multiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX.

4. Trace the messages over the A interface by referring to #mbsc-10-76. In the A InterfaceTrace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related parameters to start the tracingtask. Trace the CS messages over the Abis interface by referring to #mbsc-10-83. Inthe Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parametersto start the tracing task. Use an MS to access the test cell and then to originate a call.Check whether voice can be heard clearly in the call and whether the messages tracedover the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that the field h in the IE hopping-channel of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message must be 1.

5. Power on the TRX mentioned in step Step 2 to enable the switchback of baseband FHmutual aid.

6. Wait for 15 minutes, and then check that the IE arfcnLst in Set ChannelAttributes of the fault-rectified TRX includes all frequencies in the baseband FHgroup.

7. Use an MS to access the test cell and then to originate a call. Check whether voicescan be heard clearly in the call and whether the messages traced over the Abis and Ainterfaces are correct. Ensure that h in hopping-channel of the ASSIGNMENTCOMMAND message must be 1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set TRX

Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReImmed, BHPREPOLICY=PART;//Verification procedure//Verifying BCCH TRX mutual aid and switchback of BCCH TRX mutual aidDSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;//Verifying baseband FH TRX mutual aid and switchback of baseband FH TRX mutual aidSET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=NO_Hop;//Deactivation procedureSET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=TRXAid_NotAllow;

7.68 Configuring MSC PoolThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401MSC Pool.






Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

– Nonel License

– The license is activated.l Others

– Two MSs are available and they are registered at the HLR.

– The MSCs and the MGWs are fully interconnected and the MSC pool function isconfigured on the MSC side.

– The interconnection data between the BSC6900 and the MSC is negotiated.

– The OSP and DSP are configured. For details, see Configuring the OPC and DPC.

– The transmission over the A interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the AInterface (over TDM) or Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

Context

An MSC pool consists of multiple MSCs handling the traffic generated from one MSC poolarea. A BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool.All MSCs in the MSC pool share load and resources for equal distribution of traffic in the MSCpool, thus reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing redundancy.

One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of 32 MSCs.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR to add a GSM operator.In this step, set Operator Type, Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, andMNC to select the network of a specific operator; set MSC Pool FunctionEnabled to YES(Yes); set Length of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Valueaccording to the data negotiated with the MSC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to add the mapping betweenan NRI and an MSC. In this step, set NRI Value according to the data negotiated withthe MSC. Ensure that the NRI value is the same as that on the MSC side.

l Verification Procedure1. Enable the TMSI reallocation function on the MSC side.2. On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages

on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DPCof MSC1.

3. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell whereMS1 camps on. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window isdisplayed.

NOTE

Start the A interface message tracing with the DSP of MSC2 by using the method described in Step2 and Step 3.

4. Switch on MS1. Use MS1 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC1 side. TheCN assigns a TMSI to MS1.

5. Switch on MS2. Use MS2 to initiate a location update procedure on MSC2 side. TheCN assigns a TMSI to MS2.



7-149

NOTE

To enable the MS to initiate a location update at a specific MSC, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GCNNODE to set the administrative states of all the other MSCs to UNAVAIL(Unavailable). After the location update, you need to change the states of these MSCs to NORMAL(Normal) again.

6. Move MS1 to the coverage area of MSC2. Then, use MS1 to originate a call and checkthe A interface message tracing.

The expected result: MS1 sets up the call through MSC1, and the home MSC of MS1remains unchanged.

7. Move MS2 to the coverage area of MSC1. Then, use MS2 to originate a call and checkthe A interface message tracing.

The expected result: MS2 sets up the call through MSC2, and the home MSC of MS2remains unchanged.

NOTE

In the TMSI reallocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured bythe CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to an appropriateMSC when the MS originates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSCon the BSC6900 side must be consistent with the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on theCN side. You can use the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to configure the mappingon the BSC6900 side.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set MSC

Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).

----End

7.69 Configuring the SGSN PoolThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

7.69.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

7.69.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.

7.69.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.


– The DPUd/XPUa/FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is configured. For details, see Configuringa Board.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– Nonel License


– The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

– The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.

– The BSC supports SGSN Pool.

– The interface board is configured with a device IP address or port IP address.

Context

SGSN Pool enables multiple SGSNs to form an SGSN pool. The SGSNs in an SGSN pool shareload and resources. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investmentin equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reducesthe number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.

2. Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUcBoard.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packetcontrol unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In thisstep, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mappingbetween the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add a network service

virtual link (NSVL) on the BSC6900 side. If the NSE is in static configuration mode,run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add an NSVL on theSGSN side.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSEIdentifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.

9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs inthe SGSN pool.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGP

virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP

messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sentfrom the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages arecorrect, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.



7-151

3. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PSservices are carried on one PTP BVC.

4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acesssesthe network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can performattach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to thetraced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carriedon another PTP BVC.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to NO(No).

----End

Example//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;

//Configure SGSN Pool (IP transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_IP, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=1, NSEI=1, IP="131.131.131.132", UDPPN=1355, SRN=1, SN=1; ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;//Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;//Deactivate SGSN Pool: MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

7.69.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.


– The DPUd/XPUa/PEUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.


– None

l License



– The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

– The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal.

– The BSC supports SGSN Pool.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Context

The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources in the pool. Configuring SGSN Pool canexpand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improvenetwork reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, whichimproves network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE to set the type of the packetcontrol unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In thisstep, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP to configure the mappingbetween the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add a network service entity (NSE).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BC to add a bearer channel (BC).

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVC to add a network service virtualconnection (NSVC).

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC. In this step, set NSEIdentifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.

9. Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs inthe SGSN pool.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of a PTP BSSGPvirtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record the state.

2. Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTPmessages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sentfrom the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages arecorrect, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.

3. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services.The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally.According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PSservices are carried on one PTP BVC.

4. Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Then ensure the MS acesssesthe network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can performattach, PDP context activation, upload, and download normally. According to thetraced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carriedon another PTP BVC.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set AllowSGSN Pool to NO(No).

----End



7-153

Example//Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: MOD GCNOPERATOR: SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=1, SGSNNULLNRI=1;

//Configure SGSN Pool (FR transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=1, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD BC: SRN=1, SN=1, PN=1, BCID=1; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=1, NSVCI=1, NSEI=1, SRN=1, SN=1, BCID=1, DLCI=20; ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3;//Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2;//Deactivate SGSN Pool: MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=1, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

7.70 Configuring Abis BypassThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601Abis Bypass.


– The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.

– The BTS3006C and BTS3002E need to be configured with the DMCM board supportingAbis Bypass.

– The DABB board needs to be added to the BTS3012(DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE(DTRU/QTRU).


– Under TDM networking, when ring topology is not used, Abis bypass can be usedtogether with Flex Abis. When ring topology is used, Abis bypass cannot be usedtogether with Flex-Abis.

l License


Context

Abis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topology. When the power supply to BTSs at a levelfails, this feature makes the BTSs at the level bypassed and used only as the transmission pathso that signals of lower-level BTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply isrestored, the BTS and lower-level BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore.

To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPassMode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS.

A maximum of five levels of cascaded NGBTSs support Abis bypass in TDM transmissionmode. This function requires the support from DIP switches. Table 7-6 and Table 7-7 describethe bits of DIP switches.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Table 7-6 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S4

DIP Switch Bit Status of S4 Remarks

BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4

S4 ON ON ON ON E1 bypass issupported.

OFF OFF OFF OFF E1 bypass isnotsupported.

Others Unavailable

Table 7-7 Description of bit values on the DIP switch S5


BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4

S5 ON ON ON ON E1 bypass isnotsupported.

OFF ON ON OFF Setting of theDIP switchS5 for thefirst-levelcascadedbypass BTSs

ON OFF ON OFF Setting of theDIP switchS5 for thesecond-levelcascadedbypass BTSs

OFF OFF ON OFF Setting of theDIP switchS5 for thethird-levelcascadedbypass BTSs

ON ON OFF OFF Setting of theDIP switchS5 for thefourth-levelcascadedbypass BTSs



7-155


BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4

OFF ON OFF OFF Setting of theDIP switchS5 for thefifth-levelcascadedbypass BTSs

Others Unavailable


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add an upper-level BTS. In this step,set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a lower-level BTS. In this step,set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection forthe lower-level BTS.If more cascaded BTSs need to be added, repeat step 1 to step 3. In this step,– Set Dest Node Type to BTS.– Set Dest Father Index Type to BYID(By Index).– Set Dest Father BTS Index to the index of the upper-level BTS.– Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lower-

level BTS to the upper-level BTS.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS specified by the

BTS index.l Verification Procedure

1. Power off the upper-level BTS.2. Click Device Maintenance on the LMT and then enter the lower-level BTS

maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization.Then right-click a GTMU board and choose Query Board Information. A dialogbox is displayed. Click Basic Information. If the basic information about the GTMUboard is displayed properly, you can infer that the Abis bypass function is enabled.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, specify the index of the

upper-level BTS. Set Abis ByPass Mode to FALSE(Not Support).2. Power off the upper-level BTS.3. Click Device Maintenance on the BSC6900 LMT and then enter the lower-level BTS

maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization.Then right-click a GTMU board and choose Query Board Information. A dialogbox is displayed. Click Basic Information. If a message is promoted, indicating thatthe OML is faulty, you can infer that the Abis bypass function is disabled.

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.71 Configuring Abis Transmission BackupThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803Abis Transmission Backup.


– Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission.– The BTS supports the Ring I topology.

l Dependency on Other Features– This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite

Transmission over Abis Interface or GBFD-117801 Ring Topology.l Dependency on License


ContextWhen a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-basedAbis interface, the system automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellitetransmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured.

With Abis transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is differentfrom that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverselink uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 Network topology when Abis transmission backup is enabled


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set TransmissionMode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).



7-157

l Verification Procedure1. Optional: Use the MS to originate a call.

NOTE

Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a non-ring topology network.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to query the value of Config Ring.

The expected result: The value of Config Ring is Yes.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission

Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSTRANS to query the value of

Transmission Mode.

The expected result: The value of Transmission Mode isTER_AND_SAT_TRANS.

6. Disrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example,remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS.

The expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set TransmissionMode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(SatelliteTransmission).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Config ring to NO(No).

----End

7.72 Configuring BSC Node RedundancyThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113725BSC Node Redundancy.



– Nonel License

– The license is activated.l IP transmission mode is used between the BSC and the CN and between the BSC and the

BTS.l A BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs. Initial configuration is complete for

BTSs and cells under the two BSCs and OPCs of the two BSCs. The BTSs and cells workproperly.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l If a BTS under a BSC in a BSC node redundancy group is single-homed, it can be configuredonly under one BSC. If the BTS is dual-homed, it should be configured with primary hostunder one BSC and secondary host under the other BSC.

Context

The BSC node redundancy feature can improve reliability of running services. When one BSCis faulty, services in cells controlled by this BSC can be quickly taken over by the other BSC,thus preventing service disruption in the cells.

Assume that a BSC node redundancy group consists of two BSCs, BSC 1 and BSC 2. BSC 1controls BTS 1, and BSC 2 controls BTS 2. The configuration of the BSC node redundancygroup consisting of BSC 1 and BSC 2 is taken as an example.


1. Configuring the homing type of signaling points

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD OPC on BSC 1. In this step, set Thehost type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC 1. In this step, set OSPcode of BSC 1 to be the same as OSP code of BSC 2, and set The host type ofsignalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD OPC on BSC 2. In this step, set Thehost type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST).

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC on BSC 2. In this step, set OSPcode of BSC 2 to be the same as OSP code of BSC 1, and set The host type ofsignalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST).

2. Configuring the homing type of BTSs

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC 1. In this step, setHostType of BTS 1 to PRIMHOST(Primary Host).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS on BSC 1 to add BTS 2. Then runthe BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP. In this step, set HostType of BTS2 to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host). For details on how to configure cells and TRXsfor BTS 2, see Configuring the BTS.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP on BSC 2. In this step, setHostType of BTS 2 to PRIMHOST(Primary Host).

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS on BSC 2 to add BTS 1. Then runthe BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP. In this step, set HostType of BTS1 to SLAVEHOST(Slave Host). For details on how to configure cells and TRXsfor BTS 1, see Configuring the BTS.

3. Configuring the link between two BSCs

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK on BSC 1 and BSC 2respectively. In this step, set Signalling link mode to SERVER(SERVERMOD) and Application type to BBAP(BBAP).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP on BSC 1 and BSC 2respectively to configure the BSC node redundancy group.



7-159

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY on BSC1 and BSC 2 respectively to set the re-host policy of the BSC node redundancy group.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP on BSC 1 and BSC 2respectively to activate the BSC node redundancy group.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 to query the hosting

status of BTS 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 2 toquery the hosting status of BTS 2.

The expected result: Hosted is Yes.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 2 to query the hosting

status of BTS 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 toquery the hosting status of BTS 2.

The expected result: Hosted is No.3. Disconnect BSC 1 from the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run

the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively toquery the hosting status of BTS 1. Hosted of BTS 1 is set to No under BSC 1 and toYes under BSC 2. Thus the hosting status is changed.

4. Reconnect BSC 1 to the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run theBSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to querythe hosting status of BTS 1. Hosted of BTS 1 is set to Yes under BSC 1 and to Nounder BSC 2. The hosting status is restored to the original one.

5. Disconnect BSC 2 from the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, runthe BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively toquery the hosting status of BTS 2. Hosted of BTS 2 is set to Yes under BSC 1 and toNo under BSC 2. Thus the hosting status is changed.

6. Reconnect BSC 2 to the MSC over the A interface. About 15 minutes later, run theBSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 and BSC 2 respectively to querythe hosting status of BTS 2. Hosted of BTS 2 is set to No under BSC 1 and to Yesunder BSC 2. The hosting status is restored to the original one.


----End

Example//Configure the homing type of signaling points on BSC 1: MOD OPC: SPX=1, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=123, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST; ADD OPC: NAME="abc", SPX=2, NI=INT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=234, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST;

//Configure the homing type of signaling points on BSC 2: MOD OPC: SPX=3, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=234, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST; ADD OPC: NAME="abc", SPX=4, NI=INT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=123, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST;

//Configure the homing type of BTSs on BSC 1: SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST, PEERBTSID=2, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.131", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=2; ADD BTS: BTSID=2, BTSNAME="abc", BTSTYPE=BTS30, SERVICEMODE=IP; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST, PEERBTSID=1, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.132", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=1;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

//Configure the homing type of BTSs on BSC 2: SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST, PEERBTSID=1, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.131", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=1; ADD BTS: BTSID=2, BTSNAME="abc", BTSTYPE=BTS30, SERVICEMODE=IP; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST, PEERBTSID=2, PEERBSCIP="132.132.132.132", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.0", PEERBSCID=2;

//Configure the link between two BSCs: ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=SERVER, APP=BBAP, LOCIP1="131.131.131.132", PEERIP1="131.131.131.133", PEERPN=1448, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=1, LocalBSCID=1, PeerBSCID=2; SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY; ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=1;//Query the hosting status of a BTS: DSP BTSSTAT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSIDLST=1;

7.73 Configuring TC PoolThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDMtransmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission.

7.73.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.

7.73.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.

7.73.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode.


– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUaOIUa board.


This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1.

l License

The license is activated.

l Network Topology

At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two BSCsare in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is configuredremotely.



7-161

The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on theconfiguration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.

l Initial Data Preparation

The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.

The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

Contextl To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC

pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only oneTC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.

l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC isonly configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to theTCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.

l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.

l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effectiveonly when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For detailson the setting of TFO, see 7.102 Configuring TFO.


1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), andset Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TCPool ID.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSCto add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to addthe OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC toadd a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the mainBSC and TC subrack.

2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add anE1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAINBSC).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.

3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In thisstep, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and setAter Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC PoolID and ID of a BSC in TC Pool.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to addan Ater connection path on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGBM(BM).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to addan Ater connection path on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specifiedin 3.1.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add anAter signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGBM(BM).

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add anAter signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in3.1.

4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an Ainterface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUBBSC), and set ID of slave BSC in TC Pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specifiedin 3.1.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.

NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to addan MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2(MTP2), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the sub-BSC specified in3.1. In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate.

Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC poolnetworking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring the BTS.

l Verification Procedure1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC



7-163

Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag toMAINBSC(MAIN BSC).The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC worksproperly.

3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPCGroup No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC worksproperly.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

----End

7.73.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode.


– The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configuredEIUa/OIUa/POUc board.


This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1.

l License


l Network Topology

At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two BSCsare in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is configuredremotely.

The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on theconfiguration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks.

l Initial Data Preparation

The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.

The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contextl To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC

pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only oneTC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.

l All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the main BSC. The sub-BSC isonly configured with the BM subrack. The main BSC and sub-BSCs are connected to theTCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.

l The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the main BSC and sub-BSCs.l If TFO Switch of the sub-BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective

only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the main BSC. For detailson the setting of TFO, see 7.102 Configuring TFO.


1. Configure the Ater interface link for the main BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), andset Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TCPool ID.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the main BSCto add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the main BSC to addthe OML on the Ater interface between the main BSC and the TCS.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the main BSC toadd a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the mainBSC and TC subrack.

(5) Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP linkgroup).– Add PPP link data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the TC subrack.

NOTE

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one PPP link at a time. Ifmultiple PPP links are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operationrepeatedly.

– Add MLPPP group data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC.In this step, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the IPinterface board in the TC subrack.



7-165

NOTE

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one MLPPP group at a time.If multiple MLPPP groups are to be added, you need to perform the precedingoperation repeatedly.

(6) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to addan Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.

(7) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to addan Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to TC(Ater Interface on TC).

(8) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. Inaddition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

(9) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC. In thisstep, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. Inaddition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

2. Configure the A interface link for the main BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add anE1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAINBSC).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the main BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the main BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.

NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the main BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the main BSC,MTP2 links are automatically added to the main BSC.

3. Configure the Ater interface link for the sub-BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In thisstep, set Is Support Tc Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and setAter Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC PoolID and ID of a BSC in TC Pool.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the sub-BSC to addan E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TCconfig flag to CFGBM(BM).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the main BSC to addan E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC configflag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the sub-BSC to add anAter signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag toCFGBM(BM).

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the main BSC to add anAter signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

(6) Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP linkgroup).– Add PPP link data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the sub-BSC toadd a PPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to the numberof the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the main BSCto add a PPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the numberof the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.

– Add MLPPP group data.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the sub-BSC toadd an MLPPP group on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to thenumber of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the main BSC toadd an MLPPP group on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to thenumber of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the sub-BSC toadd an MLPPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No. to thenumber of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the main BSC toadd an MLPPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No. to the numberof the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.

(7) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the sub-BSC to add anAter interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.

(8) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the main BSC to addan Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent NodeType to TC(Ater Interface on TC).

(9) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the sub-BSC to add anIP path on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of theadjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATERInterface).

(10) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the main BSC to add anIP path on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacentnode on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATERInterface).

4. Configure the A interface link for the sub-BSC.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the main BSC to add an Ainterface E1/T1 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUBBSC). In addition, specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSPindex, and Signalling link set name.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the sub-BSC to addan MTP3 signaling link.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the sub-BSC to add anMTP3 signaling route.



7-167

NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links,because the sub-BSC is not configured with the TCS.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the main BSC to addan MTP2 link to the sub-BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2(MTP2). In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate and BSC ID in theTC pool.

Subsequent procedures: You also need to configure BTS data for the TC poolnetworking. For details on how to configure the BTS data, see Configuring the BTS.

l Verification Procedure1. In a cell under the main BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the main BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag toMAINBSC(MAIN BSC).The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the main BSC worksproperly.

3. In a cell under a sub-BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC

Group No to those of the sub-BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPCGroup), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.The expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the sub-BSC worksproperly.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the main BSC. In this step,

set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the sub-BSC. In this step,

set Is Support Tc Pool to NO(No).

----End

7.74 Configuring OML BackupThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728OML Backup. When the OML backup function of the BTS is enabled, the BTS is automaticallyswitched to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML is disconnected, thereforereducing the duration of service disruption.


– The BTS3900B/BTS3900E does not support this feature.

– The BTS3006C and BTS3002E need to be configured with the DMCM supporting AbisBypass.

– The BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU) need to be configuredwith the DABB.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


l Exclusive Features– The feature conflicts with the features GBFD-117801 BTS Ring Topology,

GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface,GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, and GBFD-118401Abis Transmission Optimization.


CAUTIONl The BTS in TDM or HDLC transmission mode supports this feature. The BTS in IP

transmission mode does not support this feature.l The OMLs on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS main cabinet group can work in OML backup mode.

The OMLs on other ports and the OMLs of the main and extension cabinet groups do notsupport this feature.

l The active and standby OMLs between the BSC and the BTS must not be carried by the sameE1/T1 cable, including the same E1/T1 cable of the upper-level BTS. When the upper-levelBTS is connected to the BSC through only one E1/T1 cable, a secondary link should be addedto enable that the upper-level BTS or the lower-level BTS is connected directly to the BSCif the lower-level BTS needs to use the OML backup function.

l At least a 64 kbit/s idle timeslot needs to be reserved on E1/T1 port 1 for configuring thisfeature.

Contextl An OML is the operation and maintenance link between the BSC and the BTS. If an OML

is faulty, the BTS cannot work. The OML backup feature allows the configuration of twoOMLs on two independent E1 cables (one for each). When an active OML is faulty, theBTS uses a standby OML. Therefore, the BTS and cells can continue working withoutbeing out of service due to transmission failure or port failure.

l When this feature is used, two OMLs are configured respectively on ports 0 and 1 of theBTS. After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish OMLs on the two ports in turn. If theBTS establishes an OML on one port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTSis reset or the OML is broken. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts toestablish an OML on the other port. If the OML is successfully established, the BSC triggersan OML switchover.

l After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are notswitched over. That is, for port 0 and port 1, if the transmission link or port where theworking OML is located is faulty, all the TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoringtimeslots configured on this port become unavailable. The TRX channels, idle timeslots,and monitoring timeslots on a normal port, however, are still available. Therefore, servicesare still provided in the cells under the BTS.



7-169


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP to set ConfigureBackup OML to YES(Yes) and then set Wait Time before OML Switch and TrySwitching Duration Time.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOMLBACKUP to check the value ofConfigure Backup OML.

The expected result: The value of Configure Backup OML is YES(Yes) and thevalues of other parameters are the configured values.


1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=YES, WTBS=30, TBS=30;//Verification procedure LST BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.75 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510101Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).


– Currently, only the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, andDBS3900 GSM support the AFC feature.


– None

l License


ContextAFC is a frequency correction algorithm used on the base station side for fast-moving MSs. Itensures reliability of the radio links carrying high-quality speech services for the MSs movingat 500 km/h and also ensures service continuity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

If... Then...

The AFC function needs to be enabledin the uplink,

Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch toYES(Yes).

The AFC function needs to be enabledin the downlink,

Set both UL Frequency AdjustSwitch and DL Frequency AdjustSwitch to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT.

If... Then...

The value of UL Frequency AdjustSwitch is YES(Yes),

The AFC function is enabled in theuplink.

The values of both UL FrequencyAdjust Switch and DL FrequencyAdjust Switch are YES(Yes),

The AFC function is enabled in thedownlink.

2. Make a call in a fast-moving vehicle. On the LMT, click Trace. In the displayed "TraceNavigation Tree" pane, navigate to Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CSTrace. In the displayed dialog box, click RSL in the Trace Type area. Then, checkthe Uplink Receive Quality in the measurement report. If the AFC function isactivated, the Uplink Receive Quality is good. If the AFC function is not activated,the Uplink Receive Quality is bad.

NOTEThe Uplink Receive Quality is specified by the "rxquel-ul" field in the measurement report.The value ranges from 0 to 7. A small value indicates a good quality, for example, value 0indicates that the quality is best. A great value indicates a bad quality, for example, value 7indicates that the quality is worst.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT with both ULFrequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch set to NO(No).

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES;// Verification procedureLST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0;// Deactivation procedureSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=NO, DLFREQADJ=NO;

7.76 Configuring Fast Move HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102Fast Move Handover.



7-171



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.


Context

Handovers along railway lines need to be completed quickly because users move fast from thecoverage of one cell to that of another cell. To reduce failures, a second handover must beinitiated quickly upon a handover failure (for example, interference occurs abruptly on the radiointerface). The fast move handover algorithm, which is optimized on the basis of the currentalgorithm, can trigger better cell handover within a short period.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set QuickHandover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, set QuickMove Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick HandoverDown Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time,Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number,Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement ReportNumber, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover DirectionForecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency ShiftHandover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration as required.

NOTE

If the cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GEXT2GCELL. In this step, set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover PunishTime, and Quick Handover Punish Value as required.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set ULFrequency Adjust Switch and UL Frequency Adjust Value as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Move the MS away from the serving cell until the frequency offset in the measurement

report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT message is a negative value and the moving speedof the MS is greater than Quick Move Speed Threshold. When the frequency offsetinformation fails to be reported or the frequency offset information is invalid, theuplink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, thedownlink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Down TriggerLevel, and the path loss of configured chain neighboring cells is lower than thespecified threshold of the path loss of the serving cell.

2. On the LMT, trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC withthe handover cause value of "better-cell".




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Quick

Handover Enable to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activate the feature by running the following MML commands:SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES;SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=255;//Deactivate the feature by running the following command:SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=NO;

7.77 Configuring Chain Cell HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103Chain Cell Handover.



– Nonel License


ContextThis feature increases the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition and thus increasesthe subscriber satisfaction.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set ChainNeighbor Cell to YES(Yes). Optionally, run the MOD G2GNCELL command. Inthis step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to list the setting of Chain

Neighbor Cell.The expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Chain

Neighbor Cell to NO(No).

----End



7-173

Example//Activation Chain Cell HandoverADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ISCHAINNCELL=YES;//Verification Chain Cell HandoverLST G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542;//Deactivation Chain Cell HandoverMOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;

7.78 Configuring Multi-Site CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104Multi-Site Cell.


– The base station must be a distributed base station (for example, DBS3900 GSM).

– Only the GTMUb, RRU3004, and RRU3008 support this feature.


– None

l License


Context

The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one logical cell. Suchcell is also called a cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multipleRRUs that are served by one BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels,or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency,and thus improve user experience.

l The number of subsites and carriers supported by a multi-site cell is as follows:

– Twelve subsites with six carriers per subsite

– Nine subsites with eight carriers per subsite

– Eight subsites with nine carriers per subsite

– Six subsites with ten carriers per subsite

l In a multi-site cell, only one primary subsite can be configured.

l A TRX board bound with carriers can be added only to the primary subsite. TRX boardsthat are not bound with any carriers can be added only to the secondary subsite.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the primary subsitewith Location Group No. set to the desired one and Is Main Local Group set toYES(YES).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP to add the secondary subsitewith Location Group No. set to a desired one and Is Main Local Group set to NO(NO).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to theprimary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No.,and Slot No..

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP to add an RXU to thesecondary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., SubrackNo., and Slot No..

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP to bind a carrier inthe primary subsite to an idle channel on the TRX board in the secondary subsite afterspecifying Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, CabinetNo., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No..

NOTE

l This configuration takes effect only when the carriers in the primary subsite and those inthe secondary subsite are the same.

l All the subsites under a BTS or cell will be deleted when the BTS or cell is deleted.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT.

If... Then...

Only the power amplifier for the carriersunder the operating subsite needs to bestarted,

Set Location Group Power Switch toOnlyCurPwrLoc(Only CurrentWorking Location TRXes be TurnedOn).

The power amplifier for carriers underall subsites needs to be started,

Set Location Group Power Switch toALLPwrLoc(All Location TRXes beTurned On).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLOCGRP to query the values ofLocation Group No. and Is Main Local Group.The expected result: All the parameter values are the same as those set in activationprocedure.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP to query the values ofthe Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No..The expected result: All the parameter values are the same as those set in activationprocedure.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSBINDLOCGRP to query the values ofthe Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, Cabinet No.,Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No..The expected result: All the parameter values are the same as those set in activationprocedure.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SWP BTSLOCGRP to swap the primary andsecondary subsites after specifying Location Group No..



7-175

NOTE

The Location Group No. in the BSC6900 MML command SWP BTSLOCGRP is set to the valueof Sub-Location Group No..

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSLOCGRP to query the values ofLocation Group No. and Is Main Local Group.The expected result: The value of If Current Main Location corresponding to theLocation Group No. set in verification step 4 is YES(YES).


----End

Example// Activation procedureADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, ISMAINLOCGRP=YES;ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, ISMAINLOCGRP=NO;ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=0;ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1;ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=0;ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=2, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=1;// Verification procedureLST BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0;LST BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1;LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0;LST BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1;LST BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1;SWP BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1;DSP BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.79 Configuring GSM/WCDMA InteroperabilityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.


– The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectionalcell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA.

– The BSS and NSS support the GSM/WCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection,and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision,and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.



ContextThe GSM/WCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect aGSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA network or in an area




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

with weak WCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMAnetwork again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the WCDMA cell is higher than thatin the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a WCDMA cell if the handoveror cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided bythe WCDMA network.

The feature GSM/WCDMA Interoperability is applied to scenarios such as cell reselection andhandovers between GSM and WCDMA. This feature has no impact on services. The networkelements involved are the MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external cell.In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A InterfaceTag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportSent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and ClassmarkEnquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call controlparameters of a cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utrancell type.The expected result: The value of Utran cell type is TDD.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring3G cell.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G externalcell.

----End

ExampleADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=FDD;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES;

7.80 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA InteroperabilityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.



7-177


– The MS supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA networks. It also supportsbidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and TD-SCDMA.

– The BSS and NSS support the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cellreselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control,handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.


– None

l License


Context

The GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselecta GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the TD-SCDMA network or in thearea with weak TD-SCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the TD-SCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the TD-SCDMA cell ishigher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a TD-SCDMAcell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the variousservices provided by the TD-SCDMA network.

Procedurel Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add a 3G external cell.In this step, set Utran Cell Type to TDD(TDD).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add a neighboring 3G cell.


4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportSent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and ClassmarkEnquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to set basic call controlparameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).

l Verifying GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utrancell type.The expected result: The value of Utran cell type is TDD.

l Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL to remove the neighboring3G cell.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL to remove the 3G externalcell.

l Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toYES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step,set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Service-based(Service-based).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANTDD to set theUTRAN TDD handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HOAllowed to YES(Yes) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preferencefor 3G cell). In addition, set HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell and RSCPThreshold for Better 3G Cell HO according to the actual requirements.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL. In this step, set TDD 3GBetter Cell HO Watch Time, TDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, and RSCPOffset according to the actual requirements.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set ServiceBased Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES(Yes).

l Verifying GSM/TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover

1. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiatednormally, move the MS to the area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, setAllow Inter-RATLoad HO in Access State to CnService-based(CN Service-based). On the CN side,set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should beperformed.

2. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC withthe handover cause value of "better-cell".

l Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Service Based Handover

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toNO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANTDD. In this step, setBetter 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference toPre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

l Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRANsystem information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch Ito 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS tomodify the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In thisstep, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES(Yes), and set TDDCell Reselect Diversity, Best TDD Cell Number, TDD Reporting Offset, TDDReporting Threshold, Qsearch P, TDD MI System INFO BroadcastingProhibit, and TDD MI System Information Optimized according to the actualrequirements.



7-179

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, setSelect 3G Cell If No TD Cell Is Contained In MR according to the actualrequirements.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. Inthis step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed and Qsearch P according to theactual requirements.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,set Network Operation Mode according to the actual requirements.

7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLNWCTRLMSRPARA. In this step, set Cell Reselection MR Period inPacket Transfer Mode according to the actual requirements.

l Verifying 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State1. Move the MS within the GSM cell or TD-SCDMA cell, and ensure that the Received

Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) is normal duringthe neighboring cell measurement of the TD-SCDMA cell (TDD). If the measurementresult meets the following conditions within five seconds, the MS initiates the cellreselection from GSM to TD-SCDMA: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + TDD Cell ReselectDiversity.

2. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates thatthe MS is in the GSM cell; when the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell, the frequencyinformation of the MS indicates that the MS is in the TD-SCDMA cell.

l Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover

parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(No).

----End

ExampleADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES;SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based;SET GCELLHOUTRANTDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell, BET3GHOEN=YES;SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.81 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.



– The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and locationupdate. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handoversignaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.

l Dependency on Other Features– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.

This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.l License

– The license is activated.l Initial Data Preparation

The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toYES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step,set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Service-based(Service-based).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD to set the UTRANFDD handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed toYES(Yes), Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell),RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3GCell HO to 0.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL. In this step, set FDD 3GBetter Cell HO Watch Time, FDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, RSCPOffset, and Ec/No Offset according to the actual requirements.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set ServiceBased Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated

normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run theBSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, setAllowInter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based(CN Service-based). Onthe CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 shouldbe performed.



7-181

2. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC withthe handover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover

parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toNO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, setBetter 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference toPre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

----End

ExampleSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based;SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=YES, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell;SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES;

7.82 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322GSM/ WCDMA Load Based Handover.






– The license is activated.l Initial Data Preparation

The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

ContextThe MSC transparently transmits the load information of the WCDMA network to the BSC.Then, the BSC makes a decision on the inter-RAT handover based on its own load and the loadin the WCDMA network. In addition, the BSC sends a handover request carrying its own loadinformation to the WCDMA network for reference in the decision on the inter-RAT handover.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable andInter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS 2G3G Load Balance Delta Threshold according to the actual requirements.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set inter-RAT handover parameters.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL. In this step, setHandover Load Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set HandoverLoad Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements.


1. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiatednormally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run theBSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, setAllow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based). On theCN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should beperformed.

2. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface.The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC withthe handover cause value of "reduce load in serving cell".


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable toNO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD. In this step, setBetter 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference toPre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

----End

ExampleSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based;

7.83 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS StateThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-1143232G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.




7-183







1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handoverparameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to set the UTRANsystem information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch Ito 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).

3. Optional: If Utran Cell Type is set toTDD(TDD), run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCUTRANSYS to modify the UTRAN system information parametersfor call control in the cell. In this step, set TDD System Information OptimizedAllowed to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and

Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) arenormal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If thefollowing conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate the cellreselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset andCPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin.

2. When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates thatthe MS is in the GSM cell; when the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequency informationof the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover

parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(No).

----End

ExampleSET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.84 Configuring Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call ReleaseThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114325Fast 3G Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.



– Nonel License


– The network involves the 2G network and the 3G network.– The 2G cell and 3G cell are neighboring cells.– The UE supports the 2G and 3G frequency bands at the same time.

ContextIn areas where the 2G and 3G networks overlap, a UE will camp on the 2G cell after its call inthe 2G cell ends. After this feature is enabled, the UE returns to and camps on the 3G cell whenthe call is released. In this way, the cell reselection time is reduced.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Select 3GCell After Call Release of cell 0 (2G cell) to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to configure a FDD

neighboring 3G cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to configure this 3G cell as a

neighboring cell of cell 0.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC to set the basic attributes of the

BSC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag , and Abis InterfaceTag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4. Open the Abis interface tracing window. Use an MS to make a call in cell 0, ensurethat the call is set up successfully, and hold the call.

5. Release the call, and check the network identifier displayed on the MS. Ensure thatthe MS is in the 3G cell.

NOTEIf the identifier of the 2G network is the same as that of the 3G network, ensure that you can checkthe 2G or 3G functions through the MS.

6. Check whether the IE cell-selection-indicator-after-release is contained in thedownlink Channel Release message over the Abis interface.



7-185


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Select 3GCell After Call Release to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES;//Verification ProcedureADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5624, EXT3GCELLNAME="abc", MCC="460", MNC="123", LAC=16, CI=25, RNCID=2546, DF=123, SCRAMBLE=256, DIVERSITY=YES;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=1234, NBR3GNCELLID=5624;SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=NO;

7.85 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface.

Prerequisitel Dependencies on Hardware

– None

l Dependencies on Other Features

– None

l License



The cell to be verified is in normal state and has idle channels.

To ensure the normal processing of PS services in the satellite transmission mode, the PScell GPRS parameters T3168 must be set to 1000ms(1000ms), T3192 must be set to1000ms(1000ms), and BS_CV_MAX must be set to 15.

Context

With satellite transmission over Abis interface, operators can deploy BTSs in areas that aredifficult to be reached through conventional terrestrial transmission, thus solving thecommunication problem in those areas. Satellite transmission over Abis interface has a longerdelay in information exchanges than terrestrial transmission.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS with Transmission Mode setto SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA with Clock Mode set toINCLK(Internal Clock).

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLAPDWS with RSL LAPDWindow Size set to an appropriate value according to the actual delay.

NOTE

RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be set by the operator according tothe actual delay. A longer delay requires a larger value.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR with T200SDCCH set to 100, T200 SACCH SDCCH set to 100, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3set to 200. You can adjust the settings of these parameters according to the actual delayover the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with MSMAX Retrans set to an appropriate value if required.

NOTE

Adjusting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases the radio access rate and adjustingMS MAX Retrans to a smaller value reduces the load of the RACH and SDCCH.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell.The expected result: Cell Service State is set to Yes.

2. The MS initiates a call.3. Trace the CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS

Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.The expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call canbe seen.

4. The MS performs the PING service after being connected to the network through dial-up. The service succeeds.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS with Transmission Mode set

to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA with Clock Mode set to

an appropriate value if required.4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR with T200

SDCCH set to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH set to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 setto 60. Adjust the settings of these parameters according to the actual delay over theAbis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC with MSMAX Retrans set to 2_Times(2_Times). Adjust MS MAX Retrans as required.

6. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE with T3168set to 500ms(500ms), T3192 set to 500ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX set to 10.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.

----End



7-187

Example/*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*///Deactivating the BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Setting a transmission modeSET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=SAT_TRANS;//Setting a clock modeSET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CLKMOD=INCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=5;//Activating the BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;/*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*///Deactivating the BTSDEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;//Setting a transmission modeSET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=TER_TRANS;//Setting a clock modeSET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CLKMOD=BSCCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=5;//Activating the BTSACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

7.86 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902Satellite Transmission over A Interface.


– The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured.


– None

l License



The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normalstate and has idle channels.

Context

Satellite transmission can be applied on the A interface in situations where terrestrialtransmission cannot be established between the BSC and MSC (for example, in sites where anemergency situation occurs temporarily or in scenarios where satellite works as a backuptransmission means).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the Ainterface.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

An EIUa board provides 32 E1s/T1s. Each E1 has thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each T1 hastwenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each timeslot corresponds to a CIC.

For example, if Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then Start CIC of the second E1/T1 mustbelong to a CIC group that is different from the CIC group of Start CIC of the first configuredE1/T1. Here, if E1 is used, Start CIC of the second E1 must be greater than 31. If T1 is used,Start CIC of the second T1 must be greater than 24.

When the MSC Pool feature is enabled, the Start CIC of the E1s/T1s that have the same pairof originating and destination signaling points must be unique.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling linkset on the A interface.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling linkon the A interface. In this step, set Satellite flag to YES(YES).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route on the Ainterface.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MTP3LNK to query the status of the MTP3

signaling link.3. Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A

Interface. In this step, click BSSAP under Trace Type. Trace the CS domain messageson the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the AbisInterface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type.The expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call canbe seen.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK to remove the MTP3 signaling

link.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link

on the A interface. In this step, set Satellite flag to YES(YES).

----End

7.87 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface.


– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License




7-189

The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normalstate and has idle channels.

Context

In BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Aterinterface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Aterconnection path between the MPS and the TCS.

NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSCneeds to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL to add an Ater signaling

link. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).

NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSCneeds to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERCONSL. In this step, setWindow Size to a proper value according to the actual delay.

NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSCneeds to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command.

The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value to be set.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERSL to query the status of the Ater

signaling link.The expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERSL. In this step, set Transmission

Mode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

----End

7.88 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Pb InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113904Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface.


– None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



Contextl If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the

installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed on thePb interface.

l The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer thanthat over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmittedby these two types of cell, it takes more time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for aresponse message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellite-capable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the averagedownlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number ofdownlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time for the RLC sending window tooverflow is prolonged.


1. Configure the satellite transmission on the Pb interface through the LMT.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1 to add an E1/T1 link on the Pb

interface. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(SatelliteTransmission).

NOTE

The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128.

After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link switches tothe satellite transmission mode automatically based on the transmission mode of theselected port.

2. Configure the satellite transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.– Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell.– Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite

transmission for the cell.– Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), set T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and set BS_CV_MAX to15.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate a cell.2. Run the pcu add sattrans<LCNo> yes command to configure satellite transmission

for the cell.3. Run the mt gcell active<LCNo> command to activate the cell.4. Run the mt gcell show stat<LCNo> command to check that the state of the cell is

UNBLOCK.5. Use the MS to perform PS services. PS services are normally processed.



7-191

l Deactivation Procedure1. Disable the satellite transmission on the Pb interface through the LMT.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PBE1T1. In this step, set TransmissionMode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

2. Configure the terrestrial transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS.

– Run the mt gcell deactive<LCNo> command to deactivate the cell.

– Run the pcu set sattrans<LCNo> no command to configure terrestrialtransmission for the cell.

– Run the mt gcell active <LCNo> command to activate the cell.3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step,

set T3168 to 0ms(0ms), set T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and set BS_CV_MAX to 10.

----End

7.89 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.


– The DPUb board is configured.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License



1. The procedure for configuring the satellite transmission on the Gb interface is thesame as the procedure for configuring the terrestrial transmission on the Gb interface.For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the GbInterface (over IP).

l Verification Procedure1. After an NSE is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to query

the state of an SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC) by checking the setting ofSIG BVC State.The expected result: If SIG BVC State is set to Normal, it indicates that the SIG BVCworks properly.

2. After a PTP BVC is added, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to querythe state of the PTP BVC by checking the setting of Service State.The expected result: If Manage State is set to Unblock and Service State is set toNormal, it indicates that the PTP BVC works properly.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. This feature need not be deactivated.

----End

7.90 Configuring High Speed SignalingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115201High Speed Signaling.


– The MSC supports high-speed signaling.


– None



l Other prerequisites

– TDM transmission is applied over the A interface.

– The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.

– The OPC and DPC are configured.

Context

A high-speed signaling link is a 2 Mbit/s signaling link. Compared with the 64 kbit/s signalinglink, the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots; thus, the signalingtransmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced.

Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmissiondoes not use high-speed signaling links.

WARNINGReconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900.Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning.The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link

set.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK. In this step, set Link Bear

Type to MTP2(MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s).



7-193

NOTE

In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set AterMask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST MTP3LNK to query the information aboutthe MTP3 signaling link.

The expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK. In this step, set Signallinglink set index and Signalling link code.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT. In this step, set DSP index andSignalling link set index.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS. In this step, set Signalling linkset index.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AE1T1 to remove an E1/T1 on the Ainterface.

----End

7.91 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling PointsThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301Local Multiple Signaling Points.


– None


– None




– Mltiple OSPs are configured.

– Multiple DSPs are configured.

– The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link isAvailable.

Context

The local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logicalBSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load isdistributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

CAUTIONThe original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoingBSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points areconfigured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time areincreased.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC repeatedly to add the OSPs. Theparameters Network ID and OSP code bits of the multiple OSPs must be consistent.OSP Codes must be different among the OSPs. In addition, OSP Codes must bedifferent from DSP Codes.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC repeatedly to add the desired DSPs.In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set.

NOTE

After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take theestablishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you needto add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is thesignaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC areestablished.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to configure the OSP of the logicalBSC. In this step, set Network ID, OSP code bits, and OSP code according tonetwork planning. The OSP codes of multiple logical BSCs must be different.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to configure the logical linkbetween the OSP and DSP.

NOTE

If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, then the DSP code and DSP typefor each logical connection must be the same. The OSP index needs to be set to the OSP index ofthe logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to network planning. Inthe case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IP transmission, selectM3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA).

3. Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, thenthe MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear typeis M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, andM3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 beartype as an example.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to configure the link set betweenthe OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to configure the physical linkbetween the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the Signaling link set index as specifiedin Step 4.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to configure the route from theOSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in directconnection or transfer manner.



7-195

NOTE

In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP indexcorresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSPindex in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configuredin Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transferfunctionality.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the status of the DSPconfigured in Step 2.

The expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC to remove a DSP.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC to remove an OSP.

----End

7.92 Configuring Semi-Permanent ConnectionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701Semi-Permanent Connection.


– None


– None



Context

After a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslotat the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslotswitching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmittedin the BSC.

Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection:

l Semi-permanent link

The input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. Inthis case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the outputtimeslot.

l Monitoring timeslot

One end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the otherend of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC togetherperform timeslot switching.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Procedurel Activating a semi-permanent link

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK to add a semi-permanent linkin the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER(OTHER), and setSemipermanent Link Rate according to the bandwidth requirements.

NOTE

In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set according to the networkplanning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.

l Activating a monitoring timeslot

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMONITORTS to add a monitoringtimeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate according to the bandwidth requirements.

l Verifying a semipermanent link

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SEMILINK to view the state of a semi-permanent link.

The expected result: The value of State is OK.

l Verifying a monitoring timeslot

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSMONITORTS to view the state of amonitoring timeslot.

The expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed.

l Deactivating a semi-permanent link

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SEMILINK to remove a semi-permanentlink.

l Deactivating a monitoring timeslot

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSMONITORTS to remove amonitoring timeslot from a BTS.

----End

7.93 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling TracingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.


– The MSC and M2000 support end-to-end MS signaling tracing.


– None





7-197

ContextEnd-to-end MS signaling tracing is a function based on which tracing tasks are created by eachNE on the call path. After each NE traces the MS signaling, the M2000 interprets and summarizesthe MS signaling and then displays the MS signaling on the M2000 client.

By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect the informationabout the specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of systemresources. By recording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE wherethe fault occurs, thus facilitating fault handling.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set SupportEnd-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to query the value of

Support End-to-end User Tracing Function.

The expected result: The value of Support End-to-end User Tracing Function isYES(Yes).

2. Activate a task of end-to-end MS signaling tracing at the M2000 and use an MS tomake a call under the BSC.

The expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signalingtracing.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support

End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).

----End

7.94 Configuring Active Power ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602Active Power Control.



– Nonel License


ContextActive Power Control enables the immediate performance of power control after an MSsuccessfully gains access to the network or a handover is successfully performed in the BSC. In




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

such a case, the BSC can control the uplink and downlink power promptly. Therefore, both theBTS and the MS transmit signals at a proper power. With the active power control, the systeminterference is decreased, the QoS is ensured, and the power consumption of the MS or BTS isdecreased.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, setPower Forecast Allowed to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set ULPC Allowed to YES(Yes), and set DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step,

specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of cell 0 except SDCCH.

2. Perform the single user CS trace by referring toTracing CS Domain Messages of aSingle Subscriber in cell 0.

3. Make a call.

NOTE

Ensure that the level is good during the test with the uplink/downlink level being greater than-60 dBm in the measurement report.

4. Check the result in Single User CS Trace window.The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good.The TCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Resultmessage regarding the call is present before the Channel Activation message isdelivered. In this case, the values of the fields bs power and ms power in the ChannelActivation message are not the maximum (the maximum power level of the 900M cellis 5 and that of the 1800M cell is 0).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set

Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting

of Power Forecast Allowed.The expected result: Power Forecast Allowed is set to NO.

----End

7.95 Configuring CipheringThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate ciphering.



– None



7-199



Context

Ciphering helps ensure information security.

The use of ciphering algorithms in telecommunications increases the signaling load and theaccess delay of a call. If the BSS does not support a specified ciphering algorithm, call accessesor handovers might fail. In this case, the performance counters such as assignment success rateand handover success rate are affected. The configuration of A5/3 ciphering algorithm is takenas an example. Ciphering needs to be configured at both the BSC6900 and the MSC.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set SD QuickHO to ON(On).

NOTE

SD Quick HO is configured to improve the security of the A5 ciphering algorithm.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to select the A5/0and A5/3 ciphering algorithms.

NOTE

A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the test cell, and SD Quick HO to ON(On).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the test cell, and set Encryption Algorithm toA5/0-1&A5/3-1.

4. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(Hex) of the test cell. In the Trace Type area, select BSSAP. On the BSSAP tab page,set Cell ID (cell1,cell2,…cell16) of the test cell. Then, click Submit.

5. After the A interface tracing window is opened, use the MS to initiate a call in the testcell.

The expected result: The call is set up. The chosen-encryption-algorithm IE in theCipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.



----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.96 Configuring Speech VersionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the speech version.





ContextWhen Huawei MSC is used, the BSC6900 must support FR speech version 3 or HR speechversion 3.

If a BTS supports AMR but its software version does not, then the AMR cannot be configured.In this case, the BTS needs to be installed with a software version supporting AMR.

NOTE

l The 7.95 kbit/s AMR HR is supported only when Service Mode of the Abis interface is IP or HDLC.

l In A over IP mode, the EFR function cannot be enabled.

Procedurel Activating EFR

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2).

l Activating AMR1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface

Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set

Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3). If the cell supports theHR service, set Speech Version to HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step,set call control parameters when AMR is applied on the FR and HR channels.

NOTE

l AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively.

l By setting AMR Rate Control Switch, you can select different algorithms.

l By setting AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes), you can enablethe adaptive adjustment function of AMR downlink thresholds.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set theparameters of the handover between the TCHF and the TCHH in an AMR cell, suchas Intracell F-H HO Allowed, Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, Intracell F-H HO LastTime, F2H HO Threshold, and H2F HO Threshold.



7-201

5. Run the SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set the AMR power control parameterssuch as AMR PC Interval.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMRTCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold.

l Activating HR1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set

Speech Version of a cell to HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1),HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rateVER 3). HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2) of Speech Version is reserved.Currently, no service uses HR speech version 2.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the value of

Speech Version.

The expected result: The activated speech versions are in the USED state.l Deactivation Procedure

The BSC6900 must be configured with at least one speech version. Thus, the speechversions cannot be deactivated. The BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLCCACCESS, however, can be used to modify the selected speech versions.

----End

7.97 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HRThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the following feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech.


l Other Prerequisites– The cell is a non-concentric cell and works properly.– The core network, cell, and MS support half-rate speech.– All the TCHs in the cell are full-rate channel.

ContextWith this feature, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamicallyconverted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cellduring the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereasthe other type of channel is idle can be prevented.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Procedurel Activation Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set the device attributes ofTRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes).

l Verifying Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to specify a cell. In this

step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that the new call is preferentiallyassigned half-rate TCH.

2. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.The expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication isnormal. A full-rate TCH is converted into two half-rate TCHs and are used by the MS.

3. End the call.The expected result: The half-rate TCHs are not converted into full-rate TCH.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to specify all thefull-rate TCHs in the cell. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) andblock all full-rate TCHs in the cell. Reserve only half-rate TCHs.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to specify a cell. In thisstep, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that the new call ispreferentially assigned full-rate TCH.

NOTE

In Step 5, if the caller and the called party camp on the same cell, you need to reserve a full-rate TCH to ensure the successful setup of the call.

6. Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell.The expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication isnormal. The MS uses a full-rate TCH.

l Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set the device attributes of

TRXs in the cell. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to check the value of TCH Rate

Adjust Allow.The expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.

----End

7.98 Configuring the Cell BroadcastThrough the cell broadcast service, the mobile operator can broadcast specified short messagesin the cells controlled by one or more BTSs in the mobile network. All the MSs in the cells canreceive the short messages.

7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).

7.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell BroadcastThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602Simplified Cell Broadcast.



7-203

7.98.1 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).




– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified CellBroadcast.

l License


l Other PrerequisitesThe Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) works properly.To enable Short Message Service Cell Broadcast, you must install the hardware andsoftware of the CBC and the corresponding networking equipment.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributesof a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN to add the VLAN attributes ofthe XPU board. In this step, specify IP Address as required and set the VLANattributes on the BSC that is connected to the CBC.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET XPUPORT to set the attributes of ports onthe XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCBSADDR to add CBC information. Inthis step, specify CBC INDEX, and set OP INDEX SET to the index of the operatorto which the cell to be verified belongs, Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSCIP to those of the XPU board added by the ADD XPUVLAN command. In addition,specify BSC Port, Mask, and CBC Port, and set BSC GateWay IP to the gatewayIP address of the lab, CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC, and If CB ShakeHand to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set TRX and channelattributes. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCHTRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH).

NOTEChannel Type can also be set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH). In this case, TRX IDcan be set to the index of any TRX.

6. Add the settings of the BSC, cell, area, channel, and user on the CBC side, and dividecells into different cell groups. In addition, send cell broadcast messages to the cells.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the port whose Panel Port Switch is set to OPEN(Open). Then, check that the IP address of this port can be pinged.The expected result: The IP address can be pinged. The port works normally.

2. Use an MS with the CBC function enabled to connect to the network in different cells,and check the messages on the BSC-CBC and Abis interfaces.The expected result:

In the initial phase of connection, the messages CBCH Query and CBCH QueryResponse can be traced on the BSC-CBC interface.

When system information messages are sent, messages Write/Replace Message andReport can be traced on the BSC-CBC interface.

The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abis interface.

The MS can properly receive the cell broadcast messages sent from the CBC.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, setSupport Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

7.98.2 Configuring Simplified Cell BroadcastThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602Simplified Cell Broadcast.




– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message ServiceCell Broadcast (TS23).

l License


Context

The simplified cell broadcast feature provides the simple cell broadcast services without theCBC system.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributesof a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify ChannelNo., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified andChannel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH).



7-205

NOTEChannel Type can also be set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH). In this case, TRX IDcan be set to the index of any TRX.

3. Send cell broadcast messages.– Sending a specified message without any restrictions

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSBC. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified and set Support Cell BroadcastName to YES(Yes). In addition, specify Chan ID, Geography Scope,Broadcast Interval, Coding Scheme, and Broadcast Content.

– Sending a specified message at a specified time and with a specified number oftransmissions

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GSMSCB. In this step, set CellIndex List to the index of the cell to be verified, Geography Scope toLAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, and Update to 0. In addition, specifyRepeat and Broadcast Interval, set Start Time and End Time to thespecified time, and set Chan ID, Coding Scheme, and Content ofMessage as required.

NOTE

l Start Time set through the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the real time ofthe OMU.

l When Repeat is set to 60, the interval from Start Time to End Time must be greater thanone hour to ensure that the simple broadcast message can be successfully transmitted for60 times.

l Verification Procedure1. Create an Abis interface signaling tracing task on the LMT. Set the same channel on

the MS side as the channel specified by Chan ID in Step 3 (the setting proceduredepends on the MS brand).The expected result: The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on theAbis interface. The MS can receive the Content of Message specified in Step 3.

NOTE

Content of Message set through the SET GCELLSBC command can be received at any time.Content of Message set through the ADD GSMSCB command can be received only withinthe specified time period.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set

Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601Automatic Level Control (ALC).


None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


When a call uses the Automatic Level Control (ALC) feature, ALC is mutually exclusiveto features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.

l License



A over TDM transmission is used.

Context

With the ALC feature, the gain of the digital voice signals on the uplink and downlink is adjustedevery 20 ms, and the amplitude of the digital voice signals is changed statically or dynamically.This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a defined state, thus preventing the interferenceto a call due to the volume fluctuation of the two parties involved in the call.


– Set ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode).

To do so, run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALCSwitch to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALCFix Target Level to its recommended value.

NOTE

If DSP No. is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set.

To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to -4; to decrease the acousticvolume, set ALC Fix Target Level to -23.

– Set ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode).

To do so, run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALCSwitch to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALCFix Gain to its recommended value.

NOTE

To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12; to decrease the acoustic volume, setALC Fix Gain to 3.

– SetALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).

To do so, run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALCSwitch to OPEN(Open) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode). Inaddition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to theirrecommended values.

l Verification ProcedureThe following takes the verification of the fixed gain mode as an example.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch ofall the DSPs on the tested DPU board to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0.

2. In the same cell, use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 with a normal voice. Then, hang upthe phone.



7-207

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch ofall the DSPs on the tested DPU board to OPEN(Open), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all theparameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previouscommands are executed successfully.

5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1.

The expected result: The volume of the heard voice increases, compared with thevolume in Step 2.

NOTE

The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode).Similar steps are required when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode) orADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch to

OFF(Off).

----End

7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).



When a call uses the Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) feature, this feature is mutuallyexclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.


l Other PrerequisitesA over TDM transmission is used.

ContextTFO and AEC cannot be used together.

The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, which improves the speechquality.

Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver.After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, some voice is transmitted back to PartyA through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known asacoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminatedby means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set AEC Switch toON(On) and other parameters to their default values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to OFF(Off) and

other parameters to their default values.2. Use one test MS (MS 1) to make a call to another test MS (MS 2). Check that acoustic

echo occurs, and then hand off the call.

NOTE

The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the handsfree function is placedin a sealing box.

3. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch of the DPU boardon the test BSC to ON(On) and other parameters to their default values.

4. Run the LST TCPARA command to check whether all the parameters set in stepStep 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executedsuccessfully.

5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced.If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification.

If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then run the SET TCPARAcommand. In this step, set AEC Echo Return Loss to a smaller value. If AEC EchoReturn Loss is already set to the smallest value, set AEC Echo Path Delay to a greatervalue. Repeat step Step 5 to check whether the echoes are reduced.

NOTE

l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixed-line phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side.

l When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must beset, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the SET TCPARA command. In this step, set AEC Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).



When a call uses the ANR feature, this feature is mutually exclusive to featuresGBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.

l License



7-209



Context

ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink speech signals and improves the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearlyhear the voice.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch toUPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink), and set NoiseSuppression Algorithm Switch to MODE1(Optimized version). In addition,specify Noise Attenuation Mode, Noise Suppression Mode, and TransparentTransmit Thresh of Noise Lev as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch for

all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to OFF(Off).2. Ensure that two test MSs (MS 1 and MS 2) are in the same cell. Use MS 1 to make a

call to MS 2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heardthrough the MS 2, and then hand off the call.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch forall the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to UPLINK(On for uplink) orDOWNLINK(On for dnlink).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all theparameters set in step Step 3 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previouscommands are executed successfully.

5. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1, andcheck that the background noises heard through MS 2 are reduced.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANR Switch for

all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested to OFF(Off).

----End

7.102 Configuring TFOThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701TFO (Tandem Free Operation).






Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic LevelControl (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation(ANC), and GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).

l License




Context

The TFO solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated encoding and decoding bypassing one encoding and decoding process, which improves the signal quality.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFOSwitch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1).

NOTE

When Speech Version is set to only FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), two test MSsuse the same FR coding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFOSwitch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

3. Use MS 1 and MS 2 to access the test cell, and make a call from MS1 to MS2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User IdentityType to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN), and set MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS 1 and MS2. Check whether Tfo State is TFO not start in the result area.

5. Hand off the call.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFOSwitch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable).

7. Make a call from MS 1 to MS 2 again.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. In this step, set User IdentityType to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN), and set MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS 1 and MS2. Check whether Tfo State is TFO immediate success in the result area. If TfoState is TFO immediate success and the speech quality is improved, TFO isconfigured successfully.

NOTE

Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover for the MSs is not performed during the callwhen verifying TFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed insuch a handover.




7-211

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFOSwitch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).


The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally.


When a call uses the Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) feature, this feature is mutuallyexclusive to features GBFD-115701 TFO and GBFD-115702 TrFO.

l License




Procedurel Configuration Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch toON(On), and set ANC Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. andSlot No..

2. Check the settings of ANC Switch, ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain in thecommand execution result.The expected result: ANC Switch is set to ON(On), which indicates that the ANCfeature is enabled.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ANC Switch toOFF(Off).

----End

7.104 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment(EPLC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– None


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-115501 AMR FR or GBFD-115502 AMR HR.

– When a call uses the EPLC feature, this feature is mutually exclusive to the featureGBFD-115701 TFO or GBFD-115702 TrFO.

l License


Context

With EPLC, the frames of the lost packets can be recovered and compensated. This, to a certainextent, solves the problem of speech frame loss during transmission and in a poor radioenvironment. Thus, the speech quality is improved, the user satisfaction is improved, and anetwork with enhanced performance is provided.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch toON(On) and other parameters to their default values.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to check the settings ofAMR ACS[H] and AMR ACS[F].The expected result: AMR ACS[H] and AMR ACS[F] can be set to one to four codingrates respectively.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch toOFF(Off) and other parameters to their default values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configurationinformation about the TC.The expected result: EPLC Switch is set to Off.

4. When only one DPU board is configured, run the BSC6900 MML command SETFHO and record the MOS of the speech quality.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch toON(On) and other parameters to their default values.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configurationinformation about the TC.The expected result: EPLC Switch is set to On.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO and record the MOS of the speechquality.The expected result: The command is successfully executed. The MOS of the speechquality is recorded.

8. Compare the MOSs recorded in Step 4 and Step 7.



7-213

The expected result: The MOS recorded in Step 7 is greater than that recorded in Step4.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to

OFF(Off) and other parameters to their default values.

----End

7.105 Configuring Voice Quality IndexThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801Voice Quality Index.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the features GBFD-117501 Configuring of Enhanced MeasurementReport (EMR).

l License– None

l Configuration– The BTS that controls the cell supports downlink VQI.

l Prerequisites for verification– Report Downlink VQI Allowed for the cell to be verified is set to ENABLE

(Enable),and Measurement Report Type in the call control message toComMeasReport(Common Measurement Report).

– Measurement Report Type for the cell to be verified is set to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).

– MR.Preprocessing is set to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing).l Other Prerequisites

– The cell is configured with 2G neighboring cells and supports enhanced measurementreport (EMR).

ContextThe VQI establishes the mapping between the radio network performance and voice quality.The VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the parameters relatedto the radio quality of the uplink/downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method is appliedin VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of the middle-rateand low-rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5.

Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels. TheVQI is obtained through the analysis of the BER, FER, LFE, and CODE of the uplink/downlinkspeech signal. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate the identification of thevoice problem and network optimization.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set ReportDownlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable).

NOTEVQI is recorded in a measurement report during a voice service only when Report Downlink VQIAllowed is set to ENABLE(Enable). When the MS does not support enhanced measurement reportsor Measurement Report Type is not set to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report),VQI is 255.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified, and Report Downlink VQI Allowed toENABLE(Enable). Perform the voice service test, and check whether the value ofVQI in the measurement report is 255 (invalid value)

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, setCell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, and Measurement Report Type toEnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).

NOTEYou need to configure a neighboring GSM cell if no enhanced measurement report is obtained whenthe MS support enhance measurement reports.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to one that matches the channel type. Speech versions includeFULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER2), FFULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rateVER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3). Perform the voice service test, and check whether the value ofVQI in the measurement report is a valid value.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setMR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and set SentFreq.of preprocessed MR based on site requirements. Perform the voice service test,and check the value of VQI.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set ReportDownlink VQI Allowed to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example//Activating VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE;

//Deactivating VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=DISABLE;

7.106 Configuring of Enhanced Measurement ReportThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501Configuring of Enhanced Measurement Report.



7-215


– None


– None

l License



– The cell is configured with 2G neighboring cells and supports enhanced measurementreport (EMR).

– This EMR feature should be supported by the MS.

Context

EMR is a new downlink measurement report available from R99. Measurement results, such asBit Error Probability (BEP) and Frame Erase Ratio (FER), are added to an EMR. This improvesthe performance of power control algorithm and handover algorithm.

This function brings the following benefits:

l The capability of monitoring voice quality is improved, and the performance of powercontrol algorithm and handover algorithm is improved as well.

l As many as 15 3G neighboring cells can be configured with EMR. This provides a betterperformance of interoperability between the GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA systems.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step,specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type toEnhMeasReport.

l Verification ProcedureAssume that cell 0 and cell 1 are 2G neighboring cells.1. Use the test MS to make a cell in cell 0.2. Query the result of the RSL message tracing over the Abis interface.

The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good.An EMR on RSL messages over the Abis interface is reported.

NOTE

A common MR is reported if the MS does not support EMR.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step,

specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type toComMeasReport.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step,specify the test cell as cell 0 and set Measurement Report Type toComMeasReport.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: Measurement Report Type is set to ComMeasReport.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport;LST GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1587, CELLID=1024;

7.107 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR AdaptationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.



– Nonel License


– The test cell is enabled with the HR function. In addition, the test cell is configured withTCHFs and TCHHs and these channels are available.

ContextDynamic HR/FR Adaptation is a feature based on which dynamic adjustment of TCHH/TCHFresources is performed on the call that is established.

l When TCH resources are sufficient, the call that occupies a TCHH and whose transmissionquality is bad is handed over a TCHF to improve voice quality.

l When TCH resources are insufficient, the call that occupies a TCHF and whosetransmission quality is good is handed over a TCHH to increase cell capacity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setIntracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), set Current HO Control Algorithm toHOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), and set AMR F-H Ho Allowed toYES(Yes).

2. Configure conversion between FR calls and HR calls.– Adjusting FR calls to HR calls

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,set Speech Version to Select All.



7-217

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step,set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold to 0, set AMR F-H Ho Qual.Threshold to 7, set AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold to 255, and set AMRF-H Ho ATCB Threshold to 0.

– Adjusting HR calls to FR calls

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step,set Speech Version to Select All.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step,set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), set AMR TCH/H Prior CellLoad Threshold to 0, and set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step,set AMR H-F Traffic Threshold to 100, set AMR F-H Ho Qual.Threshold to 0, set AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold to 0, and set AMRH-F Ho ATCB Threshold to 255.


Adjusting FR calls to HR calls

1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interfaceby referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messageson the Abis Interface.

2. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface andRSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started.

3. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on theAbis interface.The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good.The speech version FAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speechversion switches to HAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messagesare traced on the Abis interface.

Adjusting HR calls to FR calls

1. Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and RSL messages on the Abis interfaceby referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messageson the Abis Interface.

2. Make a call in the cell where the BSSAP message tracing task on the A interface andRSL message tracing task on the Abis interface are started.

3. View the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface and RSL messages traced on theAbis interface.The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good.The speech version HAMR is used when the call is set up. During the call, the speechversion switches to FAMR. Handover Detection and Handover Complete messagesare traced on the Abis interface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR

F-H Ho Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the setting of

AMR F-H Ho Allowed.The expected result: AMR F-H Ho Allowed is set to No.

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.108 Configuring VQE3.0Voice Quality Enhancement 3.0 (VQE3.0) is a feature set that contains five voice qualityenhancing features: Automatic Level Control (ALC), Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC),Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Anti-clip(ACLP). The five features improve the user experience when A over TDM transmission isapplied.

Procedurel Configure ALC by referring to 7.99 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC).l Configure AEC by referring to 7.100 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).l Configure ANR by referring to 7.101 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).l Configure ANC by referring to 7.103 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation

(ANC).l Configure ACLP by referring to Configuring Anti-Clip.

----End

7.109 Configuring KPIs Based on User ExperienceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115707KPIs Based on User Experience.


The DPUa, DPUb, or DPUc board starts normally.l Dependency on Other Features

Nonel License


ContextThis feature defines KPIs and CHR information based on user experience. The information aboutKPIs is provided to the operator through traffic statistics so that the operator can learn the userexperience directly.

Of the KPIs defined in this feature, only the traffic measurements related to the TC have switches,which are set to enable or disable the traffic measurement reporting. Other traffic measurementsare automatically reported.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set EnableTC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes).



7-219

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, specifyCell Index. In addition, set TFO Switch to ENABLE(Enable).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to query the setting ofEnable TC Performance Measurement.The expected result: Enable TC Performance Measurement is set to YES.

2. View traffic statistics on the M2000.The expected result: The cells with TFO Switch enabled report traffic statistics relatedto TFO, such as Number of Successful TFO Establishments (HR).

The following table lists the KPIs that are based on user experience.

Table 7-8 KPIs that are based on user experience

KPI Classification KPI Name

CS KPIs Number of UL Measurement Reports Without DLMeasurement Reports

Number of Timeouts Waiting for CC Message (MobileOriginated)

Number of Timeouts Waiting for CC Message (MobileTerminated)

Number of Timeouts Waiting for CC Message (LocationUpdate)

Number of Call Alertings

Number of Put-Throughs

Mean Call Setup Duration

Mean Call Access Duration

Number of Disconnect Messages Received from MSC (MobileOriginated)

Number of Disconnect Messages Received from MSC (MobileTerminated)

TC KPIs Number of Successful TFO Establishments (HR)

Number of Successful TFO Establishments (FR)

Number of Successful TFO Establishments (EFR)

Number of Successful TFO Establishments (FAMR)

Number of Successful TFO Establishments (HAMR)

Number of Successful TFO Establishments (WBAMR)





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set EnableTC Performance Measurement to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to query the setting ofEnable TC Performance Measurement.The expected result: Enable TC Performance Measurement is set to NO.

----End

7.110 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold AdaptiveAdjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.


– The test BTS supports AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment. The BTS3006C/BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE that is configured with non-optimized DTRUs doesnot support this feature.

– An MOS tester and a vehicle for drive test are ready.l Dependency on Other Features

– The features that this feature depends on are configured. Downlink AMR Coding RateThreshold Adaptive Adjustment depends on the feature GBFD-117501 EnhancedMeasurement Report (EMR).

l Dependency on License– The license for this feature is activated.

ContextAMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment is a function based on which the target voicequality of the network is set and the coding rate threshold is adjusted adaptively, so that a propercoding rate is selected for the AMR speech service and thus to gain optimal AMR voice quality.

AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment, which is uplink/downlink specific, brings thefollowing benefits:l A proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service.l Optimal AMR voice quality is gained.

Procedurel Activating the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMRUplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes).

l Verifying the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function

Select a test BTS. Assume that the coverage of the test BTS is continuous. Select a test pathfrom the area that the test cell covers. The downlink level that ranges from -50 dBm to -110dBm, is evenly distributed on the test path.



7-221

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) andHALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMRUplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes).

3. Connect the MOS tester to the test MS. Use the test MS to make a call, and thenperform a drive test on the test path.

NOTE

The recommended distance of the test path is 1-2 km. The recommended speed of the drive testvehicle is 20 km/h. It is recommended that the drive test be performed three times (three come-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMRUplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No).

5. Repeat Step 3.6. Based on the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5, compare the speech quality obtained

when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) with the speechquality obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).

The expected result: The MOS obtained when AMR Uplink Adaptive ThresholdAllowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS obtained when AMR UplinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).

l Deactivating the Uplink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR

Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to query the value of

AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.

The expected result: The value of AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is NO(No).

l Activating the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR

Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes) and Is Ratscch FunctionEnabled to ENABLE(Enable).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS. In this step, setReport Type to Enhanced Measurement Report.

l Verifying the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function

Select a test BTS. Assume that the coverage of the test BTS is continuous. Select a test pathfrom the area that the test cell covers. The downlink level that ranges from -50 dBm to -110dBm, is evenly distributed on the test path.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) andHALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMRDownlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to YES(Yes).

3. Connect the MOS tester to the test MS. Use the test MS to make a call, and thenperform a drive test on the test path.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

The recommended distance of the test path is 1-2 km. The recommended speed of the drive testvehicle is 20 km/h. It is recommended that the drive test be performed three times (three come-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMRDownlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No).

5. Repeat Step 3.6. Based on the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5, compare the speech quality obtained

when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) with thespeech quality obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is settoNO(No).

The expected result: The MOS obtained when AMR Downlink Adaptive ThresholdAllowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS obtained when AMR DownlinkAdaptive Threshold Allowed is set toNO(No).

l Deactivating the Downlink AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR

Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR to query the value of

AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed.

The expected result: The value of AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed isNO(No).

----End

7.111 Configuring WB AMRThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507WB AMR.


– The type of the BTS is BTS3900.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License

– The license is activated.l The core network supports the WB AMR.l The MS supports the WB AMR.

Contextl WB AMR is a coding scheme that can significantly improve speech quality. With WB

AMR, the sampling rate is increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extendedto 0.05–7 kHz. WB AMR provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech comparedwith the narrow band AMR with the sampling rate of 8 kHz and the speech frequency rangebetween 200 Hz and 3400 Hz.



7-223

l WB AMR adopts the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports therates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A InterfaceTag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to set the accesscontrol parameters of the cell.

NOTE

When setting Speech Version, select FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5), as well as thedefault speech versions.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR to set the call controlAMR parameters of the cell. The call control AMR parameters are AMR UL CodingRate adj.th1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR UL Coding Rateadj.hyst1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rateadj.th1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rateadj.hyst1[WB], and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB].

NOTE

For cells with good Um interface quality, the value of the coding rate adjustment thresholdshould be relatively low. In this way, the rate can be adjusted to a higher rate more easily. Ifthe value of the coding rate adjustment threshold is high, the low rate coding mode should beused to improve the robustness on the Um interface.

The lower the coding rate hysteresis is, the more frequent the rate adjustment is. The higherthe coding rate hysteresis is, the more stable the rate is.

l Verification Procedure1. Use two MSs supporting the WB AMR to call each other.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to check that Channel Service

Type is set to WB_AMR(WAMR).l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS to deselectFULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) of Speech Version.

----End

Example//Activating WB AMR: SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-1;//Verifying WB AMR: DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13818889988";//Deactivating WB AMR: SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-0;

7.112 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901Streaming QoS(GBR).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– None


– None

l License


l The cell supports packet services.

l The MS and SGSN support the PFM procedures and R99 QoS.

l The cell is configured with static PDCHs.

Context

In the case of streaming class, the BSC allocates radio blocks to users according to the GBR ofthe QoS attributes and ensures that the data transmission rates meet the requirements of streamingclass. If streaming services support resource preemption, high-priority streaming services canpreempt the radio blocks of low-priority streaming services when radio resources areinsufficient. This ensures that high-priority services can preferentially use radio resources. Ifstreaming services do not support resource preemption, the GBRs are decreased; when radioresources become sufficient, the GBRs are restored to the negotiated values. When the BSCneeds to decrease or restore GBRs, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBRs through the PFMprocedures.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setSupport GBR QoS to YES(Support) . If you plan to enable the streaming services topreempt PDCHs, set Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to ON(ON).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSEIn this step, set PFC Support to YES(Support).

3. On the SGSN side, enable network service entity (NSE) to support Packet FlowContext (PFC). If you plan to enable the streaming services to preempt PDCHs, ensurethat the NSE contains ARP.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset SIGBVC to ensure thatthe NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.

l Verification Procedure1. Enable Um Interface PS Trace and view the information of PSI13.

The expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1.2. Enable Gb Interface PTP Trace. Perform PDP context activation on the MS whose

registration type is streaming services.The expected result: Signaling such as CREATE BSS PFC and CREATE BSS PFCACK are in the trace messages.

3. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MS whose registrationtype is interactive or background to perform PS services. The MSs share the samechannel group.



7-225

The expected result: For the MS whose registration type is streaming service, the BSSassigns resources according to the registered GBR. The other MSs share remainingresources.

4. Use multiple MSs whose registration types are streaming service to perform PSservices.The expected result: If the priorities of the MSs are the same, the BSS assigns resourcesto the MS that accesses the network earlier. If the priorities are different andpreemption is supported, the MS with higher priority can preempt the resources of theMS with lower priority.

NOTEThe information element ARP of CREATE BSS PFC of the Gb interface specifies the priority ofstreaming services and whether resources can be preempted.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set

Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support) and Preempt Switch of StreamingResource to OFF(OFF).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSEIn this step, set PFC Support to NO(No Support).The expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 0.

----End

Example//Activating Streaming QoS(GBR) SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES, OccupyStreamingSwitch=ON; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;//Deactivating Streaming QoS(GBR) SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO, OccupyStreamingSwitch=OFF; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO;

7.113 Configuring QoS ARP&THPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902QoS ARP&THP.



– Nonel License

– The license is activated.l The cell supports packet services.

ContextThe BSC allocates the radio resources to the MS according the ARP and THP of the QoS. Thehigher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. The BSC mapsthe R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS according to the 3GPP specifications.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

With this feature, the operator allocates the radio resources according to different service typesand user priorities. As a result, the user with higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoyhigher data rate and better quality of service.

Interactive services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP and THP ofthe QoS. If the ARPs of the users are the same, the users with higher THP are allocated moreradio resources. If the THPs of the users are the same, the users with higher ARP are allocatedmore radio resources.

Background services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP of the QoS.The users with higher ARP can be allocated more radio resources.

For the services that do not support the QoS, the BSS allocates the radio resources according tothe BEST EFFORT.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setSupport QoS Optimize to YES(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set the valuesof THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT,THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT,THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT,THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT,THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT,BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT, andBEARP3PRIWEIGHT according to the bandwidth occupied by the users withdifferent priorities.


1. Use the MSs whose registration types are interactive or background to perform PSservices. The MSs share the same channel group.The expected result: When the same coding scheme is used, the ratio of thetransmission rate of the MSs is similar to the ratio of the weight of THP or ARP.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setSupport QoS Optimize to NO(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating QoS ARP/THP SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=YES; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT=10, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT=6, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT=6, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, BEARP3PRIWEIGHT=2;//Deactivating QoS ARP/THP SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QOSOPT=NO;



7-227

7.114 Configuring PS Active Package ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904PS Active Package Management.


– Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board isrequired.


– None

l License



– GPRS/EGPRS is already configured for the cell.

Context

Active queue management (AQM) is an algorithm used to maintain the buffer queue lengthwithin an appropriate range by discarding data packets in the buffer queue actively. It increasesdata throughput and reduces service delay at the price of buffer utilization.

AQM is applicable to scenarios in which bandwidth is limited and congestion may occur.

AQM not only ensures high link utilization but also reduces the delay of services that requirelow transfer delay. It also enhances fair utilization of bandwidth among services and increasesdata throughput.

AQM is applicable to interactive services, background services, and BE services (namely,services without QoS requirements). It is not applicable to conversational services or streamingservices.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQMSwitch to OPEN(Open). Set AQM Congestion Threshold, AQM TargetThreshold, AQM Maximum Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Initial Interval,AQM Packet Discard Interval Lower Threshold, AQM Packet Discard IntervalUpper Threshold, and AQM N Update Interval according to actual networkconditions. It is advised that these values be set to recommended values.


1. Use an MS to download a large-sized file (about 2 MB) through FTP. After thedownload is started, use the MS to download a small-sized file (about 200 KB) throughFTP.

2. View the result of downloading the small-sized file.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: When AQM Switch is set to OPEN(Open), the time required todownload the small-sized file is reduced, and the rate for downloading the large-sizedfile is decreased.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set AQMSwitch to CLOSE(Close).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA and view the value ofAQM Switch.The expected result: The value of AQM Switch is Close.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256, AqmTarTh=384, AqmMaxTh=1024, AqmSwitch=OPEN, AqmNinit=20, AqmNLowerBound=10, AqmNUpBound=20, AqmM=20;//Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmSwitch=CLOSE;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;

7.115 Configuring PoC QoSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905PoC QoS.


– Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board isrequired.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the following features GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR).

l License



– The MS and the CN support PoC service.

Context

The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of group call service implemented on theGSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and it is carried on theGPRS/EGPRS networks.

Huawei GBSS equipment can correctly distinguish PoC services from other services and applyQoS mechanisms for the PoC services. The QoS mechanisms consist of GBR, reduced datatransmission delay, and uplink/downlink balanced channel allocation method.



7-229


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, setPOC Support to Support(Support). Set Min. GBR for POC Service, Max. GBRfor POC Service, and Transmission Delay of POC Service according to actualsituations.

l Verification Procedure1. Set the registration type of the MS to streaming service. Ensure that the GBR value

is between the values of Min. GBR for POC Service and Max. GBR for POCService. The transfer delay must be smaller than Transmission Delay of POCService.

2. Use the MS to perform PoC service.The expected result: The PoC result runs properly.

3. Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs of other typesto perform Ping service. The MSs share the same channel group.The expected result: The Ping delay is smaller after PoC QoS is activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set

Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, POCGBRMIN=6, POCGBRMAX=16, POCDELAY=650, PocSup=Support;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PocSup=NotSupport;

7.116 Configuring PS Service in PriorityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907PS Service in Priority.


– Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board isrequired.






Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

ContextUsing different resource scheduling policies on the Um interface, this feature makes it possibleto provide differentiated services for PS users of different priorities. This ensures betterexperience for high-priority users.


1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set SupportPS Service in Priority to SUPPORT(Support) and MAC Scheduling Type toPFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling); set Downlink MinimumGuaranteed Rate and Rate Filter Time Window according to actual requirements.

l Verification Procedure1. Use MS 1 and MS 2 to perform the EDGE download service. (Account information

of MS 1 and MS 2 is basically the same expect that MS 1 and MS 2 are configuredwith ARP1 and ARP2 respectively. The coding scheme is MCS_9. MS 1 and MS 2occupy four PDCHs respectively.) View the download rates.The expected result: The ratio of MS 1 download rate to MS 2 download rate is 2:1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support

PS Service in Priority to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=SUPPORT, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=10, RATEFILTERTIMEWIN=50;//Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=NOTSUPPORT;

7.117 Configuring NC2This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional featureGBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).




This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.l License




7-231

– The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service.

– The test cell has a neighboring cell.

– The serving cell supports NC2 and works properly.

– This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and MS.

Context

NC2 can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection for an MS.

In NC2 mode, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality or heavy load can reselect a neighboringcell with good signal quality or light load. Compared with the MS-initiated cell reselection, thenetwork-controlled cell reselection considers factors such as the receive level and traffic loadof neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set theparameters as follows:

– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkControl Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set thethresholds at cell reselection.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPSBASE to query Network

Control Mode and ensure that this parameter is set to NC2(NC2).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGPRS to query Support NC2 and

ensure that this parameter is set to YES(Yes).3. Use an MS to perform the GPRS service, and then trace the messages on the Um

interface in the originating cell before NC2 cell reselection on the LMT. Check thePacket Cell Change message in the displayed result.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to

SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=50;//Verification ProcedureLST GCELLPSBASE:;LST GCELLGPRS:;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.118 Configuring the Network Assisted Cell Change(NACC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC).






– This feature should be supported by the MS and Core Network(CN).– The test cell is a GSM cell and has a neighboring GSM cell.– The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service.– Both the serving cell and the target cell support NACC.– The network control modes of both the serving cell and the target cell are set to NC0 or

NC1.– The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring

cell with better signal strength.

ContextNACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period ofservice disruption caused by cell reselection.

The BSC sends the system information on the neighboring cells to the MS that works in packettransfer mode so that the MS can initiate packet access after cell reselection. After receiving thesystem information on neighboring cells through the PACCH, the MS that is in packet transfermode can keep these information for 30s, during which it can attempt to access the neighboringcell according to these system information.


– Activate intra-BSC NACC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setNetwork Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).



7-233

NOTETo further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be setto YES(Yes).

– Activate inter-BSC NACC

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).

NOTETo further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be setto YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support toYES(Support).

NOTE

l Both the serving cell and the target cell support RIM.

l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the cell under the BSC and peer BSC/RNC is setto Yes.

l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to activate RIM.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set SupportNC2 to NO(No).

NOTE

When Network Control Mode is set to NC2, you are advised to disable NC2 before verification.

2. Use the MS to originate GPRS services, and monitor the signaling over the Uminterface. Ensure that the MS is in the serving cell.

3. Move the MS or increase the power of the target cell to make the receive level of thetarget cell higher than that of the serving cell.

4. Perform the operations in Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

After detecting signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and an externalneighboring cell with better signal strength, the MS sends the PACKET CELLCHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. Then, the BSC responds with thePACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message, which contains the SI1, SI3, andSI13 system information about the target cell. In addition, the BSC sends thePACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS, instructing the MS toproceed with the cell reselection procedure.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support

NACC to NO(No) and ACKET SI to NO(No).The expected result: Support NACC is NO(No), PACKET SI is NO(No). The celldoes not support NACC and PACKET SI STATUS.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0;SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES;MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=NO, PKTSI=NO;

7.119 Configuring GPRSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101GPRS.


– The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used.– The DPU is installed if the built-in PCU is used.



l Other Prerequisites– This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and MS.– If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Pb Interface.– If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).– The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Transmission Data.

ContextThis feature implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources, controllingMS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters asfollows:– If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external

Pcu), and then run the PCU set attr command on the PCU maintenance consoleto support GPRS.

– If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-inPCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set Channel Type toPDTCH(PDTCH) for at least one channel.



7-235

3. Optional: If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots forthe BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots.

4. Optional: If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH byreferring to 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data.

The expected result: The MS downloads or uploads data successfully.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set GPRS to NO(Notsupport).

----End

Example/*Activating GPRS*///External PCU commandSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;PCU SET ATTR 0 460009162963A 1 02187 1 yes 2 255 true Cell-0//Built-in PCU commandSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH;//Deactivating GPRSSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=NO;

7.120 Configruing Network Operation Mode IThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001Network Operation Mode I.


– Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board arerequired.



l Other Prerequisites– The Gs interface is configured.– The Gs interface should be supported by the MSC if the paging co-ordination is

supported.– One dual-mode MS is ready.

ContextThe combination of Network Operation Mode I and Gs interface (the interface between MSC/VLR and SGSN) supports coordinated paging or CS paging in packet transfer mode.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkOperation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the dual-mode MS to perform PING services.2. The network sends CS paging messages on the PACCH.

The expected result: The paging is successful and the call can be made successfully.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkOperation Mode to NMOII(Network Operation Mode II).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOI;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOII;

7.121 Configuring EGPRSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201EGPRS.


– The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used.– The DPU is installed if the built-in PCU is used.




– This feature should be supported by the GSN and the MS.– If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Pb Interface.– If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).– The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the

Transmission Data.



7-237

Context

Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS servicesand the congestion rate, thus improving the service quality and enhancing the user experience.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters asfollows:

– If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as externalPcu) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

– If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-inPCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

2. Optional: If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots forthe BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots.

3. Optional: If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH byreferring to 7.143 Configuring Abis over IP.


– In the case that the external PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then,start the message tracing over the Um interface on the PCU maintenance console. Theresult shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS areused.

– In the case that the built-in PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then,start the task Um Interface PS Trace on the LMT. The result shows that the codingschemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used.


– In the case that the external PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as externalPcu) and EDGE to NO(No).

– In the case that the built-in PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-inPCU) and EDGE to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating EGPRSSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; //Deactivating EGPRSSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO;

7.122 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS AccessThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-11920111-Bit EGPRS Access.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)




– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l License



– This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context

The extended uplink TBF can shorten the transmission delay and reduce the MS powerconsumption. The 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH can improve the access performance ofthe EDGE MS. The BTS takes over the packet and immediate assignments. This can improvethe access performance of the MS and shorten the access delay.

For PCU commands, see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU.

NOTE

l In external PCU mode, the PCU supports the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS andthe takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS by default.

l In external PCU mode, if you need to disable the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS,run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo> g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command. If you need to disablethe takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command. After running the command, you should reset the cell.


1. Configure the extended uplink TBF.

– In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCUmaintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to a valuegreater than 0.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period ofExtended Uplink TBF to a value greater than 0.

NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setEXT_UTBF_NODATA to NOTSEND to reduce the MS power consumption.

2. Configure the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.

– In external PCU mode, run the PCU ADD EGPRSPara command on the PCUmaintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on theCCCH for the cell.



7-239

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Accessto YES(Yes).

3. Configure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu

g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal toconfigure the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS. After running thecommand, you should reset the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move ImmediateAssignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes).

4. Configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu

g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal toconfigure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. After running thecommand, you should reset the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move PacketAssignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA to checkwhether Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF is greater than 0. Use the MS toperform PS services. After transmitting the uplink data to the BSC, the MS does notrelease the uplink TBF immediately. Instead, it releases the uplink TBF after theduration equal to Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF.

2. Use the MS that supports 11-bit EGPRS to perform PS services. The TBF is set upafter the BSC receives the phase-one channel request of the 11-bit EGPRS.

3. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the pingfunction. Enabling Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the firstping delay by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface.

4. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the pingfunction. Enabling Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the ping delayby 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Deactivate the extended uplink TBF.

– In external PCU mode, run the PCU set privateoptpara command on the PCUmaintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period ofExtended Uplink TBF to 0.

2. Deactivate the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH.– In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU

maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the function of 11-bitEGPRS access on the CCCH.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Accessto NO(No).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

3. Deactivate the takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS.

– In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppug_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal toconfigure the cell not to support the takeover of the immediate assignment by theBTS. After running the command, reset the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move ImmediateAssignment Down to BTS to NO(No).

4. Deactivate the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.

– In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppug_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal toconfigure the cell not to support the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS.After running the command, reset the cell.

– In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move PacketAssignment Down to BTS to NO(No).

----End

Example/*Activating the extended uplink TBF*///external PCU modePCU ADD PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 2000 2400//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=2000;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=NOTSEND;/*Activating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*///external PCU modePCU ADD EGPRSPara 11 la 8 yes unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=YES;/*Activating the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS*///external PCU modePCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSDLSHIFT=YES;/*Activating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*///external PCU modePCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=YES;/*Deactivating the extended uplink TBF*///external PCU modePCU SET PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 0 2400//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=0;/*Deactivating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*///external PCU modePCU SET EGPRSPara 11 la 8 no unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=NO;/*Deactivating the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS*///external PCU modePCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSDLSHIFT=NO;



7-241

/*Deactivating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*///external PCU modePCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0//built-in PCU modeSET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=NO;

7.123 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCSCoding

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119204Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding.




– None

l License



– The cell is configured with EGPRS, and the uplink coding scheme of the cell can bechanged.

ContextWith this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH basedon the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH coding scheme canquickly adapt to the changes in the radio condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, setSupport EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink qualitymeasurements reported by BTS).


1. Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet.

2. After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combinedsignals to the receive end of the TRX.

3. Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set thetransmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet.

4. Use the MS to load files through FTP.

5. Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMTby referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result ofuplink MCS coding adjustment.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplinkEGPRS coding scheme decreases.

NOTEThe interference source power cannot be too great. Otherwise, the PS services may fail.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, setSupport EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 1(According to downlinkquality measurements reported by MS)

----End

Example//Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=2;//Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS CodingSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=1;

7.124 Configuring Packet Channel DispatchingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302Packet Channel Dispatching.




feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.l License


– The PCU type is set to built-in PCU.– The cell supports the EGPRS service.– An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service is available.– An MS (GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service is available.

Contextl The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system

uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services andGPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks withthe USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRSdownlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects thedownlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate theEGPRS service from the GPRS service, thus effectively increasing the downlinkthroughput of the EGPRS MS.



7-243

l This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS service and the GPRS service use thesame channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire networkperformance, and enhancing the user experience.

7.124.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS ServiceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special ChannelBe Used by Only EGPRS Service.

7.124.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred ChannelThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.

7.124.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up ScenarioThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E DownG Up scenario.

7.124.1 Configuring the Feature of EGPRS Special Channel Be Usedby Only EGPRS Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special ChannelBe Used by Only EGPRS Service.


1. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.2. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu

(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.3. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No.,

Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority.

The expected result: The values of Channel Type of six channels are TCHFR(TCHFull Rate), and the values of Timeslot Priority are EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS SpecialChannel).


NOTEAn MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service and an MS(GPRS MS) that supports only GPRSservice are available.

1. Monitor the channels used by the MSs.2. Use the GSM MS to make a voice call in the cell.3. Attach the GPRS MS to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation.

The expected result:

– The GSM MS cannot make a voice call in the cell.

– The GPRS MS cannot be attached to the GPRS network and the PDP activation fails.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special Channel).

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=YES;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;

7.124.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred ChannelThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel.


1. Configure two EGPRS TRXs for the cell.2. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu

(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.3. Run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command. In this step, set TRX ID,

Channel No., and Administrative State.The expected result: The values of all Administrative State for all the TCHs on theBCCH TRX are Lock(Lock).

4. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set Channel Type and PDCHChannel Priority Type.

The expected result: The values of Channel Type are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate).PDCH Channel Priority Type of four channels is EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS PriorityChannel) and PDCH Channel Priority Type of the other four channels is GPRS(GPRS Channel).


NOTEThe GPRS MS1 (class10), MS2 (class10), and EGPRS MS1 (class10) are attached to the GPRS cell.

1. Record the process of configuring devices.2. EGPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.3. GPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.4. GPRS MS2 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.5. EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH.6. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again after a period of time.7. Use a drive test tool to record the channels used by the MSs.


– After EGPRS MS1 activates PDP for the first time, it starts DL FTP and uses the EGPRSpreferred channel.

– After GPRS MS2 starts DL FTP, it shares packet channels with GPRS MS1. The systemdoes notallocate the EGPRS preferred channel to GPRS MS2.



7-245

– After EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 isswiched to the correct channel instead of sharing the PDCH with GPRS MS1. Thecorrect channel is the EGPRS preferred channel used by EGPRS MS1.

– After EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is switched out ofthe EGPRS preferred channel and then shares the PDCH with GPRS MS1 or GPRSMS2.

– The EGPRS preferred channel is allocated to EGPRS MS1 again, and EGPRS MS1starts DL FTP on the EGPRS preferred channel.


1. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of theEGPRS-capable TRX, Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and PDCHChannel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS PriorityChannel).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS;

7.124.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G UpScenario

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E DownG Up scenario.


1. Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.2. Run the SET GTRXCHAN command. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No.,

Channel Type, and Timeslot Priority.

The expected result: The values of Channel Type are TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), andthe values of Timeslot Priority of at least two channels are EGPRSNORCH(EGPRSNormal Channel).

3. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G UpSwitch to CLOSE(Close).

l Verification ProcedureNOTETwo GPRS MSs (class 8) and one EGPRS MS (class10) are available.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Attach GPRS MS1 to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. GPRS MS1starts UL FTP and uses an uplink channel. The uplink channels are not used.

2. Attach EGPRS MS1 to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. EGPRSMS1 starts DL FTP and does not share the channel with GPRS MS1.

3. Attach GPRS MS2 to the GPRS network and initiate the DPD activation. EGPRS MS1starts UL FTP and share the uplink channel with GPRS MS1.

4. Record the channels used by each MS.


– After EGPRS MS1 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRSMS1 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.

– After GPRS MS2 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS2does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1.


1. Run the SET BSCPSSOFTPARA command. In this step, set Allow E Down G UpSwitch to OPEN(Open).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=CLOSE;//Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=OPEN;

7.125 Configuring BSS Paging CoordinationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305BSS Paging Coordination.




– None

l License



– The Gs interface does not exist.

– One dual-mode MS is ready.



7-247

ContextIn the case the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is not configured and the MS isin packet transfer mode, the network can send CS paging messages for a user on the PACCH toenable the user in packet transfer mode to respond to the CS paging.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSSPaging Co-ordination to YES(YES).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the dual-mode MS to perform PING services.2. The network sends CS paging messages on the PACCH.

The expected result: The paging is successful and the call can be made successfully.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set BSSPaging Co-ordination to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES;

7.126 Configuring PS HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502PS Handover.






– The MS supports the PS handover.– The SGSN supports the PS handover.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

– The system is configured with GSM or UMTS neighboring cells.

Context

After an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells related to this NSE supportthe PS handover. This helps to reduce the service disruption interval when the MS in a cellreselects another cell.

l After the intra-RAT PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PS service can behanded over from a GSM cell to another GSM cell under the same or different BSC. Thishelps to reduce the service disruption interval.

l After the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PSservice can be handed over from a UMTS cell to a GSM cell. This helps to reduce theservice disruption interval.

l After the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover is supported, the MS handling the PSservice can be handed over from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell. This helps to reduce theservice disruption interval.


– Activate the PFC on the NSE.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support toYES(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.

NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operationwhen the traffic volume is low.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step,set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support).

– Activate the PS handover on the NSE.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS HandoverSupport to YES(Support).


NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operationwhen the traffic volume is low.

– Activate the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RATInter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

– Activate the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RATInter-Cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).




7-249

NOTE

The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure; otherwise,some messages may not be traced.

– Verify that the NSE supports the PS handover.

1. Initiate the SIG message tracing over the Gb interface on the BSC6900 LMT byreferring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface.


Expected result: In the BVC-RESET message, the PS Handover carried in theExtended Feature Bitmap is 1.

– Verify that the NSE supports the intra-RAT PS handover.

1. Initiate the PTP message tracing over the Gb interface on the BSC6900 LMT byreferring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. The network conditions for the MS handover from a GSM cell to a neighboringGSM cell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated.

Expected result: The message PS Handover Required carries the Target CellIdentifier IE.

– Verify that the cell supports the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover.


2. The network conditions for the MS handover from a UMTS cell to the local GSMcell are met, and the PS handover request is initiated.

Expected result: The message PS Handover Request carries the Source RNCIdentifier IE. In addition, the message PS Handover Request Ack from the BSC canbe viewed.

– Verify that the cell supports the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover.


2. The network conditions for the MS handover from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell aremet, and the PS handover request is initiated.

Expected result: The message PS Handover Required carries the Target RNCIdentifier IE.

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivate the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RATInter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– Deactivate the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cell.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RATInter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– Deactivate the PS handover on the NSE.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS HandoverSupport to NO(No Support).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


----End

Example//Activating the PFC on the NSEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, PFCSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Activating the PS handover on the NSEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Activating the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Activating the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Deactivating the incoming inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;//Deactivating the outgoing inter-RAT inter-cell PS handover in the cellSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;//Deactivating the PS handover on the NSEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=NO;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;

7.127 Configuring PS Power ControlThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504PS Power Control.

Prerequisitel Dependencies on Hardware

– None

l Dependencies on Other Features

– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.

– This feature cannot be enabled together with the feature GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGE Coverage.

l License


Contextl Only PS downlink power control needs to be activated.

l Activating PS power control enables the transmit power of the TRX to be controlled.

l In situations that a good link quality can be obtained without the need of maximum transmitpower, PS power control helps to reduce the transmit power, thus reducing the entirenetwork interference and increasing the system capacity.



7-251


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA to activate the PSpower control. Set Support PS Downlink Power Control to YES(Yes).

Then, set the following parameters according to the network plan:

– Code Scheme Statistics Threshold

– Code Scheme Stable Threshold

– P0

– Target CIR Position

– Target CIR Offset

– Max Power Control Fall Step

– Power Control Precisionl Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, setUplink Fixed MCS Type and Downlink Fixed MCS Type to MCS9(MCS9).

2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to perform GPRS services.

3. Trace the signaling over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring toTracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. The information elements P0 andPR_MODE are carried in the messages PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT,IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT, DTMASSIGNMENT COMMAND, and PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIG.

NOTE

Take the message PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT as an example. The value of is-p0 is1, and p0 and pr-mode are carried in the message. (When PS power control is not activated,the value of is-p0 is 0.)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA. In this step, setSupport PS Downlink Power Control to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating PS Power ControlSET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=YES, MCSSTATTHR=10, MCSSTABTHR=8, DLPCINITPR=DB0, TGTCIRPOS=3, TGTCIROFFSET=2, MAXPCSTEP=1, PSPCPRES=0.6dB;//Deactivating PS Power ControlSET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=NO;

7.128 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with TwoThresholds

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



– Nonel License


– The cell supports the GPRS and EDGE.– The cell is configured with dynamic TCHFs.

ContextWith this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performedaccording to the traffic load in the cell. This feature effectively increases the channel usage,reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and thusimproves the CS access performance and PS retainability performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM to set Uplink MultiplexThreshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Downlink Multiplex Threshold ofDynamic Channel Conversion, Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, andLower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate. The value of Upper Threshold forCS Idle Channel Rate must be smaller than 100.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA to set PS ServiceGuaranteed Rate.

l Verification Procedure1. Enable the MS to camp on the serving cell to process PS services.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to specify Cell Index of the serving

cell and query the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS and the number of TBFson the PDCHs.

3. Enable another MS to access the serving cell to process PS services.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to specify Cell Index of the serving

cell and query the number of PDCHs occupied by this MS and the number of TBFson the PDCHs. Comparing with the preceding query result, you can infer that the twoMSs occupy different PDCHs.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM to set Upper Threshold

for CS Idle Channel Rate to 100.

----End

Example//Activating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two ThresholdsSET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPDYNCHNTRANLEV=20,



7-253

DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, CHIDLHIGHTHR=20, CHIDLLOWTHR=10;SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=64K;//Deactivating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two ThresholdsGPRS SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CHIDLHIGHTHR=100;

7.129 Configuring EDAThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).





l Other Prerequisites– The cell is configured to support GPRS/EGPRS.– This feature is supported by MS.

ContextGenerally, the GPRS/EGPRS traffic is higher in downlink than in uplink. In some specificsituations (for example, sending large size email through the GPRS/EGPRS network), however,the requirement on uplink bandwidth is stricter. The EDA feature can allocate three or moretimeslots for an MS in the uplink. If the high multislot class is supported, five timeslots can beallocated to the MS of high multislot class 34 in the uplink, thus meeting the requirement forhigher bandwidth in the uplink.

The use of the EDA feature needs the support from the MS. In the radio access capability reportedto the network, the MS indicates whether it supports GPRS uplink EDA or EGRPS uplink EDA.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport EDA to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Start the Gb Interface PTP Trace window on the LMT and use the MS to dial a number

(activate PDP context).The expected result: Check in the ACTIVE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message thatthe value of gprs-extended-dynamic-allocation-capability is 1or the value of egprs-extended-dynamic-alloccation is 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value ofSupport EDA.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.4. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.5. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.

NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check numberof PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs(EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, setSupport EDA to SUPPORT(Support).

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value ofSupport EDA.The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support.

8. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.9. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS.

NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check numberof PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs(EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

10. Compare the results obtained in Step 5 and Step 9.

The expected result: As recorded in Step 9, the number of PDCHs occupied by theMS is greater than or equal to 3, and the uploading speed is improved to a great extentthan that recorded in Step 5.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set

Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of

Support EDA.The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;DSP PDCH: IDXTYPE=BYCELL, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;//Deactivation ProcedureSET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT;LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;

7.130 Configuring DTMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151DTM.



7-255




– This feature is mutually exclusive to the features GBFD-114001 Extended Cell,GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).

l License



– If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must beconfigured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmissionmode.

– Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS canautomatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possibleafter the immediate assignment.

– DTM should be supported by the MSC, SGSN, and MS.

ContextDTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS services and PS services. That is, a subscriber can sendphotos or browse websites during a voice call. In a 3G network, the speech and data services areprocessed in parallel. In this sense, DTM enables the GSM subscribers to enjoy the servicessimilar to those provided by the 3G network. In addition, the 2G network can complement the3G network in terms of coverage.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support).


1. Make a CS call.

2. Initiate the operation by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a SingleSubscriber.

3. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.

4. Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result.

The expected result: PS downloading services are performed successfully while theCS call is not affected.

NOTE

The following messages are traced: Packet Notification, DTM Request, DTM AssignmentCommand, or Packet Assignment.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and SUPPORT DTM toUNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=UNSUPPORT;

7.131 Configuring Class11 DTMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403Class11 DTM.




feature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM and GBFD-119401EDA.


l Other Prerequisites– If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be

configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmissionmode.


– DTM should be supported by the MSC and the SGSN. Class11 DTM should besupported by the MS.

ContextBased on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth of the uplink PS services of theMS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channel assignmentof Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and one downlinkPDCH are assigned to the MS.




7-257

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to SUPPORT(Support).


1. Make a CS call.

2. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MSCONTEXT. In this step, specify theIMSI of the user.The expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is notaffected.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureDSP MSCONTEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIMSI, IMSI="460180122223515";//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=UNSUPPORT;

7.132 Configuring HMC DTMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404HMC DTM.




– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-119401 EDA,GBFD-119402 MS High multislot classes.

l License



– If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must beconfigured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmissionmode.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– DTM should be supported by the MSC and SGSN. DTM HMC should be supported bythe MS.

ContextBased on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PSservices of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHsrespectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech +3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink.

The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP specifications are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 31–33,36-38, and 41–44. The classes 31-33 are called HMC DTM. For an MS of DTM multislot classes32-33, the Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) function must be used if the MS requires morethan three channels in the uplink.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Make a CS call.2. Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MSCONTEXT.

The expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is notaffected.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureDSP MSCONTEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIMSI, IMSI="460180122223515";//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=UNSUPPORT;

7.133 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched DataThis chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature 14.4 kbit/sCircuit Switched Data.



7-259



– Nonel License


– 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data of single-timeslot mode should be supported by theMSC.

ContextHuawei GSM BSS supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with ahigh rate of 14.4 kbit/s for transparent data services.

NOTEThe BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, selectNT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to check the value of

Data service allowed.The expected result: The values of both T14_4K and NT14_5K in the Data serviceallowed parameter are USED.

2. Use an MS to initiate a 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service. Then, trace thesignaling on the A interface.The expected result: The service is set up successfully. Check the assignment messagetraced on the A interface, the value of the Channel Type IE shows that the servicetype is 14.4 kbit/s CS services.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, deselect

NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter.

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DATATRAFFSET=NT12K-0&NT6K-0&T14_4K-1&T9_6K-0&T4_8K-0&T2_4K-0&T1_2K-0&T600_BITS-0&T1200_75-0;//Verification ProcedurLST GCELLOTHEXT:;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

DATATRAFFSET=NT14_5K-0&NT12K-0&NT6K-0&T14_4K-0&T9_6K-1&T4_8K-0&T2_4K-0&T1_2K-0&T600_BITS-0&T1200_75-0;

7.134 Configuring Resource ReservationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001Resource Reservation.





ContextWith the resource reservation feature, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for high-priority users to ensure their QoS.l Channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, thus ensuring the QoS of the VIP

users and improving user experience.l Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. Using this function,

operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities. In thisway, the operation revenue is increased.

This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi LevelPrecedence and Preemption (eMLPP) to better guarantee the benefits of users and improve theuser satisfaction.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setGrade Access Allow to YES(Yes), and set Highest Priority and Reserved ChannelNumber to proper values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set

Highest Priority to 7 and Reserved Channel Number to 1.2. Block the TCHs in cell 0 and reserve only one idle TCH.3. Start Trace BSSAP Message on the A Interface of cell 0 on the LMT.4. Use MS 1 to make a common call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the

CN in the assignment request.

The expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the callcan be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.

5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered bythe CN in the assignment request.



7-261

The expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the callcan be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setGrade Access Allow to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the valueof Grade Access Allow.

The expected result: The value of Grade Access Allow is NO(No).

----End

7.135 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence andPreemption (eMLPP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).


– None


– None



Context

eMLPP offers a segmentation function. By enabling this function, operators can provide differentlevels of services for subscribers with different priorities. The eMLPP function is enabled toensure the speech quality of high-priority MSs when the network is busy.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCBASIC to query the value of AInterface Tag.

NOTE

If the value of A Interface Tag unequal to GSM_PHASE_2Plus, then run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set AllowEMLPP to YES(Yes) to activate the eMLPP function.


1. Get three test MSs ready, namely, MS 1, MS 2, and MS 3. The priorities configuredfor these MSs at the HLR in descending order are MS 1, MS 2, and MS 3.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. Configure data on the MSC side, and ensure that the resources for the MSs with lowpriorities can be preempted and the MSs with high priorities can preempt theseresources.

3. On the LMT, start message tracing over the A interface by referring to TracingMessages on the A Interface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click theBSSAP tab, and set related parameters. Start CS message tracing over the Abisinterface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Inthe Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set the relatedparameters.

4. Use MS 2 and MS 3 to make PSTN calls in the test cell.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the

remaining idle TCHs in the cell.6. Use MS 1 to make a PSTN call in the cell.

The expected result: The call of MS 3 is handed over to another cell or is released.MS 1 occupies the channel of MS 3 and successfully makes the call. The call of MS2 is not affected.

NOTE

l When the eMLPP function is enabled, a low-priority MS can be handed over to another cell onlyif neighboring relations are correctly configured. The configuration of neighboring relations isnot mandatory for the eMLPP function.

l When the eMLPP function is enabled, ensure that the data configuration on the CN side is correct,and the “Priority” information element carried in the assignment request message sent by theMSC is consistent with the setting on the BSC side. In this case, the resources of MSs can bepreempted. The assignment request message is displayed in the window for tracing messagesover the A interface.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set Allow

EMLPP to NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface

Tag to original value of the step 1 in activation procedure.

----End

7.136 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency CallThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521Guaranteed Emergency Call.




– The license for this feature is activated.l The MSC is enabled with the eMLPP function.



7-263

Context

The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to improve the setup success rate ofemergency calls to the greatest extent. Therefore, normal communications are ensured in disasterrelief activities.

This feature has the following characteristics:

l Emergency calls are preferentially assigned TCH/F in the immediate assignment phase.l The system reserves TCH/F for the MS making an emergency call.l The MS making an emergency call preempts the channel resources seized by the call with

a lower priority.

When this feature is disabled, an emergency call can be preempted by other call in high prioritylevel. when this feature is enabled and there is no idle TCH, an emergency call can preempt thechannel resources seized by another call except emergency call.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of Priorityof Emergency Call. When the value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15, thefunctions of reserving TCHs for emergency calls and preempting TCHs are notenabled.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority ofEmergency Call to a proper value according to the actual requirements, for example,1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, setMax Channel Num Reserved for EC to a proper value according to the actualrequirements, for example, 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set EmergencyCall Preemption Permitted to ON(On).

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, setTimer of Reserved TCH for EMC to a proper value according to the actualrequirements, for example, 15.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of Priority

of Emergency Call.

The expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to view the value

of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC.

The expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of

Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.

The expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON(On).

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLTMR to view the valueof Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: The value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC is 15.5. Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in the cell.

All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle channels.There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call andthe channel resources of the call can be preempted.

The expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted.6. MS 1 makes the emergency call successfully. In the immediate assignment phase, an

SDCCH is assigned and in the assignment phase, a TCH/F is assigned.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Priority ofEmergency Call to 15.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCADto view the value of Priorityof Emergency Call.

The expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Emergency

Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to view the value of

Emergency Call Preemption Permitted.

The expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF(Off).

----End

7.137 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell PriorityThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.





ContextWhen service congestion occurs in the BSC, flow control is started. The calls in the VIP cellsor paging of the VIP users are preferentially processed. Thus, the normal operation of the BSCis ensured, and the call setup success rate of the VIP users is not affected.




7-265

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL or MOD GCELL. In this step, setVIP Cell to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set SupportPriority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes), and set VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIPAccess CPU Rate, and VIP Priority.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value of VIP Cell.

The expected result: The value of VIP Cell to YES(Yes).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCFCPARA to query the values of

Support Priority Based Flow Control, VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPURate, and VIP Priority.

The expected result: The value of Support Priority Based Flow Control is YES(Yes). The parameters VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIPPriority are set to some values.

3. When service congestion occurs in the BSC, check whether the call setup success rateof a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are affected.

The expected result: The call setup success rate of a VIP cell and the call setup successrate of VIP users are normal. No abnormal call drops occur.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA. In this step, set Support

Priority Based Flow Control is NO(No).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set VIP Cell to NO

(No).

----End

7.138 Configuring Network Support SAICThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103Network Support SAIC.


– The MS supports SAIC.l Dependency on Other Features



ContextSingle Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique that restraints both intra-frequency and inter-frequency interference when the MS receives signals through a singleantenna. SAIC aims to minimize the impact of interference on the receive quality of downlinksignals through signaling processing.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The MS that supports SAIC has a greater capability of bearing interference than the MS thatdoes not. Therefore, the strategy of power control can be adjusted if the MS supports SAIC, toreduce the transmit power of the BTS and thus to reduce interference in the entire network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set SaicAllowed to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set PowerControl Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set PowerControl Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 3.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Switch forBTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to ON(On).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setMR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the value of

Saic Allowed.The expected result: The value of Saic Allowed is Yes.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR2 to query the value of PowerControl Threshold Adjust for SAIC.The expected result: The value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC is 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the value of PowerControl Threshold Adjust for SAIC.The expected result: The value of Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC is 3.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of Switchfor BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust.The expected result: The value of Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust isOn.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOCTRL to query the value ofMR.Preprocessing.The expected result: The value of MR.Preprocessing is BTS Preprocessing.

6. Initiate a call. Then, query whether the MS supports SAIC by checking the value ofthe Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance information element in the MobileStation Classmark 3 message.The expected result: The value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance isSupport SAIC.

7. Check the MS Capability information element that is carried in the channel activationcommand sent to the BTS by the BSC6900.The expected result: The SAIC support capability is set to 1, which indicates that theMS supports SAIC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Saic

Allowed to NO(No).



7-267

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Switch forBTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to OFF(Off).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setMR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing(BSC preprocessing).

----End

7.139 Configuring NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115401NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).



– Nonel License


– The MSC supports the LCS.– The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

ContextLCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specificservices based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates anemergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services(VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-basedLCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID +TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculatesthe MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS locationbased on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In thesimple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID andTA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.


1. Run the SET AITFOTHPARA command. In this step, set Add TA to A InterfaceEST IND to OPEN(Open).

l Verification Procedure1. Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the test

cell.2. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully.3. Check that the first message traced through A interface signaling trace contains the

APDU information element, which carries TA information of the MS.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the SET AITFOTHPARA command. In this step, set Add TA to A Interface

EST IND to CLOSE(Close).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN;//Deactivation ProcedureSET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE;

7.140 Configuring BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA).



– Nonel License



ContextLCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specificservices based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates anemergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services(VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-basedLCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID +TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculatesthe MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS locationbased on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In thesimple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID andTA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.


1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).

NOTE

Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.



7-269

2. Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell.l Verification Procedure

1. Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the testcell.

2. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully.3. Check that the Perform Location Request message and Perform Location

Response message are traced over the A interface after the MSC is triggered on theMSC side to request location information query. Check that the correct MS locationcan be displayed on the MSC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.

In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER;SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NSLATI=North_latitude;//Deactivation ProcedureMOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

7.141 Configuring Simple Mode LCS (cell ID + TA)This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115403simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA).



– Nonel License



ContextLCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specificservices based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates anemergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services(VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-basedLCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID +TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculatesthe MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In thesimple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID andTA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.


1. Run the ADD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).

NOTE

Run the LST GCELL to obtain Operator Name.

2. Run the SET GCELLLCS command to configure the LCS parameters of a cell.l Verification Procedure

1. Start single User CS Trace. Select Location Flag.2. Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully.3. Check that the MS location information in single user trace messages is correct.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell.

In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER;SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, NSLATI=North_latitude;//Deactivation ProcedureMOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

7.142 Configuring Lb InterfaceThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404Lb Interface.



– Nonel License


– The MSC supports the location service.

– The MS must support the AGPS location service when the AGPS positioning methodis used.



7-271

ContextThe Lb interface is a standard interface between the BSC and the Serving Mobile Location Center(SMLC). The main function of the SMLC is to locate an MS based on the measurement resultsprovided by the MS.

Huawei BSS equipment supports the standard Lb interface, and thus can be interconnected withthe SMLC of other vendors to provide the CELLID+TA and AGPS positioning methods. Figure7-9 shows the position of the SMLC in the network.

Figure 7-9 Position of the SMLC in the network

Generally, one BSC is connected to only one SMLC. When the RAN Sharing feature is enabled,one BSC can be connected to four SMLCs of four different operators.

A BSC can be connected to an SMLC in the following ways:l By adding an Lb interface board

TDM or IP transmission can be used over the Lb interface.l Without adding an Lb interface board

– In BM/TC separated configuration mode, if TDM transmission is used over the Lbinterface, the Lb interface must be configured on the Ater interface board of the BMsubrack or on the A interface board of the TC subrack.

– In BM/TC combined configuration mode, if TDM transmission is used over the Lbinterface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A interface board.

– If IP transmission is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured onthe A or Abis interface board of the BM subrack.

Procedurel Activation Procedure (Adding an Lb Interface Board)

1. Add an Lb interface board by referring to Adding an Lb interface board.2. Select an activation procedure according to the transmission over the Lb interface,

and then perform the activation procedure.l Activation Procedure (BM/TC Separated Configuration, Lb over TDM, and Lb Interface

Configured on Ater Interface Board)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP

name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code to




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type toMTP3(MTP3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step,set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLCMode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.

NOTE

If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC.In this step, set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling linkset. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signallinglink set index to the index of an unoccupied signaling link set.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE(BSC Interface); setSignalling link code, Ater connection path index, and MTP2 link No. to the valuesof the unoccupied resources; set Ater Mask to the value negotiated with the SMLC.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index and Signalling link set index to the values specified in Step 3.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 to add an E1/T1 over the Aterinterface. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM); set Ater connectionpath index to the value specified in Step 4; set Subrack No., Slot No, and Port Noaccording to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface.

l Activation Procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb Interface Configured on A Interface Board)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP

name, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code tothe signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type toMTP3(MTP3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step,set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLCMode to OUTER(Outer); set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.

NOTE


3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling linkset. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signallinglink set index to the index of an unoccupied signaling link set.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC) orTOGETHER(BSC/TC Together).

NOTE

l In BM/TC separated configuration mode, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC); set Signalling link code, Ater connection path index, and MTP2 link No.to the values of the unoccupied resources; set A interface subrack No., A interface slot No.,and A interface port No. according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface; setAter Mask and A interface timeslot mask to the values negotiated with the SMLC.

l In BM/TC combined configuration mode, set TC mode to TOGETHER(BSC/TCTogether); set Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to the values of the unoccupiedresources; set A interface subrack No., A interface slot No., and A interface port No.according to the actual cable connection over the Lb interface; set A interface timeslot maskto the value negotiated with the SMLC.



7-273

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index and Signalling link set index to the values specified in Step 3.

l Activation Procedure (Lb over IP)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a DSP. In this step, set DSPname, DSP index, and OSP index according to the actual situation; set DSP code tothe signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type toM3UA(M3UA).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC to add an SMLC. In this step,set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual situation; set SMLCMode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1.

NOTE


3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE to add an M3UA local entity. In thisstep, set Local entity No. to the value of an unoccupied resource; set OSP index andLocal entity type according to the actual situation.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE to add an M3UA destination entity.In this step, set Destination entity No. to the value of an unoccupied resource; setLocal entity No. and DSP index to the values specified in Step 3 and Step 1respectively; set Destination entity type.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. In thisstep, set Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and Logic Port Flag according tothe actual condition; set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) andApplication type to M3UA(M3UA); set First local IP address, First destinationIP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to the values negotiated with the SMLC.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set. In thisstep, set Signalling link set index to the value of an unoccupied resource.

– If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP) in Step 3, set Workmode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP).

– If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) in Step 3 andDestination entity type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA SP) in Step 4, set Workmode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). Otherwise, set Workmode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route. In this step,set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the values specified inStep 4 and Step 6 respectively.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. In this step,set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 6; set Signaling link ID,Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and M3UA Signaling link name accordingto the actual situation.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLCMode.

The expected result: The value of SMLC Mode is OUTER(Outer).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC. In this step, set DSP index to DSPindex of the SMLC.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible. The value of MTP3DSP state is Available or the value of M3UA DSP state is Available.

3. Initiate a location service on the LCS client side, as shown in Figure 7-9.

The expected result: The target MS is located.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the MOD GEXTSMLC command. In this step, set SMLC Mode toNOTSUPPORT.

----End

7.143 Configuring Abis over IPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601Abis over IP.


The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board is in position.The BTS supports IP transmission.

l Dependency on Other FeaturesThis feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology,GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.


l Other PrerequisitesWhen device IP is used in transmission, the BTS is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.

l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

ContextNOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.

When the layer 2 networking is used on the Abis interface, the BSC and BTS automatically performs theBidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on links. In this case, the BTS is not allowed to use the deviceIP address in communication.

With this feature, the BSC is connected to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on thelocation of the BSC and the BTS. This feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports theIPv4 protocol.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, orGOUc board.



7-275

2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the EquipmentData.

3. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the LogicalData.

4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring theTransmission Data.

5. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring to Configuring the BTS Clock.6. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS

Configuration.l Verification Procedure

1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT. In this step, set SubrackNo., Slot No., and Port No. to those of the peer interface board connected to theBTS. Check Port state and Link Availability Status in the command executionresult. If Port state is Activated and Link Availability Status is Available, thelink is normal.

2. Verify the control plane on the Abis interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of anadjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidthby checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operationstate is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent nodeis normal.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPDlink is functional. If UsageStatus is Normal, the LAPD link is functional.

3. Verify the user plane on the Abis interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP pathis available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth isgreater than 0, the IP path is normal.


----End

7.144 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611Abis IP over E1/T1.


– The PEUa/POUc board is in position.– The BTS supports IP transmission.

l Dependency on Other FeaturesThis feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology,GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

ContextNOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.

A license is required to implement Abis over IP.

When TDM transmission is used over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be usedto carry traffic and signaling data.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a PEUa/POUc board.2. Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment

Data.3. Configure the logical data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Logical

Data.4. Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the

Transmission Data.5. Configuring BTS/NodeB clock by referring to Configuring the BTS Clock.6. Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS

Configuration.l Verifying Abis over IP


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check whether the port isfunctional by viewing Port running state.

(2) If the PPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK toquery the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

(3) If the MLPPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP toquery the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Linkstate and LCP negotiated state.

(4) If the PPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step,set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSPPPPLNK command and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IPaddress in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets canbe received, the PPP link is normal.

(5) If the MLPPP link is used, run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In thisstep, set Source IP address to the same value as Local IP address in the DSPMPGRP command and Destination IP address to the same value as Peer IPaddress in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can bereceived, the MLPPP link is normal.



7-277

2. Verify the control plane on the Abis interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPDlink is normal. If UsageStatus is Normal, the LAPD link is normal.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of anadjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidthby checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operationstate is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent nodeis normal.

3. Verify the user plane on the Abis interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP pathis normal. The IP path is normal if Operation state is Available and the availablebandwidth is greater than 0.


----End

7.145 Configuring Abis MUXThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604Abis MUX.


The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The BTS supports UDPmultiplexing.


feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IPover E1/T1.


Context

Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS serveas transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the transmittingend multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing requirements. Multiple UDPpackets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then demultiplexedat the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets. Thus, the transmissionefficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable Abis MUX. In this step, set IP MUXType to ABISMUX.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to display the application of Abix MUX.

The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable Abis MUX.

----End

7.146 Configuring A over IPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602A over IP.


The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board is in position.l Dependency on Other Features

This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control(ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 AutomaticNoise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC),GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO.


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring aBoard.The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

l Other PrerequisitesWhen device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.

Context

A over IP supports only the IPv4 protocol.

When A over IP is enabled, the functions of the TCS are taken over by the MGW, and the BSCdoes not perform transcoding. The A interface uses IP over FE/GE transmission.



2. In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data LinkLayer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board.



7-279

3. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUcboard by referring to Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

4. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUcboard by referring to Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types andTransmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.

5. Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, or GOUcboard by referring to Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

l Verification Procedure1. Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT. In this step, set SubrackNo., Slot No., and Port No. to those of the peer interface board connected to theBTS.The expected result: Port state is Activated, and Link Availability Status isAvailable. That is, the links carried on the port are normal.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to display the setting ofStatus of ETHTRK.The expected result: Status of ETHTRK is UP, which indicates that the linkaggregation group is normal.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRKLNK to display the settingof Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port.The expected result: Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is UP, which indicatesthat the sub-port for the link aggregation group is normal.

2. Verify the control plane on the A interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCPDSP state.The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that theSCCP DSP is normal.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings ofOperation status and Activated status.The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status isActivated. That is, the link set is normal.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whetherOperation state is Normal.The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTPlink is normal.

3. Verify the user plane on the A interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of anadjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and bandwidths bychecking related parameters, for example, Operation state.The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth isgreater than 0.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting ofOperation state.The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidthis greater than 0.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


----End

7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622A IP over E1/T1.


The PEUa/POUc board is in position.l Dependency on Other Features

This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control(ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 AutomaticNoise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC),GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO.


l Initial Data PreparationThe global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.The PEUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

l Other PrerequisitesWhen device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.

ContextWhen this feature is enabled, the traffic and signaling data can be carried by the PPP based IPtransmission over the A interface. The port of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.



2. In MPS/EPS, perform the operations in Configuring the Physical Layer and Data LinkLayer for the PEUa Board or Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer forthe POUc Board.

3. Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).4. Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for

the Adjacent Node.5. Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).




7-281


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of PortState..The expected result: Port State. is normal.

(2) Verify state of the links.– The link is a PPP link.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settingsof Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set SourceIP address to the value of Local IP address obtained in the precedingsub-step, and set Destination IP address to the value of Peer IPaddress obtained in the preceding sub-step.The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

– The link is an MLPPP link.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settingsof Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settingsof Link state and LCP negotiated state.The expected result: Both Link state and LCP negotiated state areavailable.

c. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, set SourceIP address to the value of Local IP address, and set Destination IPaddress to the value of Peer IP address.The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

2. Verify the control plane on the A interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCPDSP state.The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that theSCCP DSP is normal.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings ofOperation status and Activated status.The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status isActivated. That is, the link set is normal.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whetherOperation state is Normal.The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTPlink is normal.

3. Verify the user plane on the A interface.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of anadjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidthby checking related parameters, for example, Operation state.The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth isgreater than 0.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting ofOperation state.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidthis greater than 0.


----End

7.148 Configuring UDP MUX for A TransmissionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610UDP MUX for A Transmission.


The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The Core Network (CN)supports UDP multiplexing.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP overE1/T1.


l OthersWhen device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to thedevice IP of the local BSC.

Context

When this feature is enabled, multiple Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets aremultiplexed onto one UDP packet. In this way, the proportion of the packet header to the totalpacket decreases, and thus the A interface transmission efficiency is improved.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX. In this step, set IP MUX Type toUDPMUX. Repeat this step if this feature is to be enabled on the A interfaces betweenthe BSC and multiple CN devices.

NOTE

Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time[ms] must be set as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of UDP

MUX for A Transmission.The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.




7-283

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable IP MUX.

----End

7.149 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over AInterface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface.


– The DPUc or DPUf board is in position.– The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc, PEUa, or POUc board is in position.– The MSC supports this feature. In addition, the configuration of this feature is complete.



l Initial Data Preparation– The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. A over TDM transmission is used.

ContextThis feature enables TDM transmission and IP transmission to be used simultaneously over theA interface on the BSC side. This feature is applicable to the scenario where GSM is upgradedfrom the TDM network to the IP network.

Whether the user plane on the A interface uses TDM transmission or IP transmission isdetermined by the MSC in the assignment procedure or in the incoming BSC handoverprocedure.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a DPUc or DPUf board.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCTYPE. In this step, set Subrack No. and

Slot No. to those of the DPU board. In addition, set The type of TC resource to ITC(Packet Conversion).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc,PEUa, or POUc board.

4. Configure A over IP transmission.– When IP over FE/GE transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations

by referring to 7.146 Configuring A over IP.– When IP over E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations

by referring to 7.147 Configuring A IP over E1/T1.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear typeto MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA). In addition, specify Net PRI as required.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer forA Interface User Plane to TDM_IP, and set Report BSS TransmissionCapability to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the settings of MTP3

DSP state and M3UA DSP state.The expected result: MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state are both Available.

2. Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Make a call in the cell. The call is successfullyestablished.

3. Observe the speech codec list Information Element (IE) is correctly carried in the CmService Request message on the A interface.The expected result, "full-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both1.

NOTE

When "codec-type" is cs-data, "pcm-over-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IEare both 1.

4. View the assignment request message.The expected result:– The circuit-identity-code IE is carried when the Core Network (CN) instructs the

user plane to use TDM transmission, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Assignment request message in TDM transmission

– The aoip-transport-layer-address-mgw and speech codeclist-msc-preferred IEs arecarried when the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, as shown inFigure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Assignment request message in IP transmission

5. Check whether the assignment complete message carries the related IEs.The expected result:– When the CN instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, the assignment

complete message does not carry the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.– When the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, the assignment

complete message carries the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.



7-285

l Deactivation Procedure1. Change the TDM/IP dual transmission mode over A interface to TDM transmission.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for

A Interface User Plane to TDM, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability toNO(No).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set Net PRI toMTP3_FIRST(MTP3_FIRST).

----End

7.150 Configuring Gb over IPThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603Gb over IP.


The FG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is in position.The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd board is configured.The SGSN supports Gb over IP.

l Dependency on Other FeaturesNone


l Other PrerequisitesA cell is activated and supports GPRS.

ContextGb over IP enables operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR) betweenthe BSC and the SGSN.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, or GOUc board.2. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/

GOUc Board.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE to add an SGSN node. In this

step, specify Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE to add an NSE. In this step, specify

NSE Identifier, Subrack No., Slot No., Subnet Protocol Type, Operator Name,SGSN Node ID, and Subnetwork Configure Mode.

5. Configure the NSVL.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL to add an NSVL onthe BSC side. In this step, specify Local NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Local IPAddress, Local UDP Port No., Subrack No., and Slot No..




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

When port IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to theport IP address of the interface board in Step 2. When device IP addresses are used forthe communication, Local IP Address is set to the device IP address of the interfaceboard in Step 2.

(2) Optional: When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE to add anNSVL on the SGSN side. In this step, specify Remote NSVL ID, NSEIdentifier, Remote IP Address, and Remote UDP Port No..

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC to add a PTP BSSGP virtualconnection (PTP BVC). In this step, specify PTP BVC Identifier. In addition, setCell Name to the name of the GPRS cell that needs to be bound, and set NSEIdentifier to that of the NSE added in Step 4.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot

No., Source IP address, and Destination IP address.

NOTE

l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is DYNAMIC(Dynamic), you need to setSource IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL andDestination IP Address to the same value as Server IP in ADD NSE.

l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), you need to set SourceIP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and DestinationIP Address to the same value as Remote IP Address in ADD NSVLREMOTE.

The expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicatesthat the IP link on the Gb interface is functional.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GBIPROUTE. In this step, specify NSEIdentifier and Local NSVL ID, or specify NSE Identifier and Remote NSVL ID.The expected result: IP Path State is Normal, which indicates that the IP path at theservice layer on the Gb interface is functional.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to check whether SIG BVCState is Normal. In this step, specify NSE Identifier.The expected result: SIG BVC State is Normal, which indicates that the SIG BVCon the signaling plane of the Gb interface is normal.

l Deactivation Procedure1. This feature need not be deactivated.

----End

7.151 Configuring IP Fault detection based on BFDThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118609IP Fault detection based on BFD.


– The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc board is configured on the Abis/A/Gb interface.– The device connected to the BSC supports BFD.



7-287


– The features that this feature depends on are configured. This feature depends on thefollowing features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, andGBFD-118603 Gb over IP.



Context

BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by periodically transmitting BFD packetsbetween two nodes. With this feature, IP route reselection is triggered when the gateway or thepeer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop.

BFD applies to the following scenarios:

l When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through arouter, BFD detects whether the router is available.

l When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly,BFD detects whether the peer device is available.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set the parametersCheck type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect local ipbased on the actual networking.

NOTE

l If the Ethernet ports work in active/standby mode, set Check mode toCHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT; if the Ethernet port works in independent mode, set Checkmode to CHECK_ON_INDEPENDENT_PORT.

l If Check type is set to SBFD, the single hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Peer IPaddress to an IP address that is on the same network segment as the local IP address.

l If Check type is set to MBFD, the multi-hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Multi hop BFDdetect local ip to the device IP or port IP if the local board, and set Peer IP address to an IPaddress that is on a different network segment from the local IP address.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query the value of Check state.

The expected result: The value of Check state is UP or DOWN.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STP IPCHK to stop the function of IP FaultDetection based on BFD.

----End

7.152 Configuring Ethernet OAMThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630Ethernet OAM.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– The FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc board is configured for the Abis or A interface, or theFG2a/FG2c/GOUc board is configured for the Gb interface.

– The interconnected transmission devices support the Ethernet OAM protocol.


– The features that this feature depends on are configured. This feature depends on thefollowing features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, andGBFD-118603 Gb over IP.



Context

As a layer-2 protocol, Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network at the data link layer.Thus, the network is monitored and managed more effectively.

The BSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah)and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.1ag).

Procedurel Activating the Ethernet EFM OAM function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH to activate the Ethernet EFM OAMfunction.

l Verifying the Ethernet EFM OAM function

1. After EFM OAM is enabled, ALM-21371 ETHOAM 3AH Discovery Failure isreported if the transmission link is faulty or the peer end does not support the EFMOAM function.

2. After EFM OAM is enabled, the alarm ALM-21374 ETHOAM 3AH RemoteLoopback is reported if the loopback is successful because the loopback operationblocks the ongoing services.

l Deactivating the Ethernet EFM OAM function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH to deactivate the Ethernet EFMOAM function.

l Activating the OAM 1AG function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD to add a maintenance domain(MD) of Ethernet OAM. In this step, set MD INDEX, MD LEVEL, and MDNAME.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA to add an Ethernet OAMmaintenance association (MA). In this step, set VLAN ID, MA Index, and MAName, and set MD INDEX to the value specified in Step 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add a Connectivity FaultManagement Maintenance association End Point(MEP). In this step, set MEP ID, setMEP Type to LocalMep(LocalMep) and Port Type to ETHER, and set MAIndex to the value specified in Step 2.



7-289

NOTE

The value of MEP ID at the interconnected device must be the same as that at the BSC6900.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST to activate theunidirectional connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivitybetween the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MA Index to the valuespecified in Step 2 and MEP ID to the value specified in Step 3.

l Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING MAC. In this step, set MA Index and MEP

ID to the values specified in the ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP IDof the peer device.

The expected result: The number of received packets is the same as the number ofsent packets.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command TRC MAC. In this step, set MA Index and MEPID to the values specified in the ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP IDof the peer device.

The expected result: "Succeed in tracing the destination address" is displayed in theresult.

l Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST to deactivate the

unidirectional connectivity test of Ethernet OAM.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP to remove an Ethernet OAM

MEP.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA to remove an Ethernet OAM MA.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD to remove an Ethernet OAM MD.

----End

7.153 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS AutomaticConfiguration and Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS AutomaticConfiguration and Planning.


– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


– The initial parameters required for BTS automatic planning algorithm are set in onlinemode through the M2000 client.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contextl The compact BTS refers to the BTS3900E. If the feature is applied to the BTS3900E, a

maximum of two carriers can be configured and the cells of the BTS3900E are configuredin O2 mode.

l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.l After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can connect with the

BSC automatically with the network automatic detection feature. Operators do not need toconfigure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based onfrequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surroundingfrequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration andplanning of the BTS39000B and BTS3900E. This feature can be applied in newly deployedor swapped sites. By using this feature, site deployment duration is decreased and operatorintervention is reduced. As a result, OM costs are reduced.

l Before the automatic planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithmmust be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTSadjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress andresult of the BTS GSM automatic planning and perform data analysis and fault location onthe M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

l If the version of the BSC is V900R012 or later vesions, the BSC supports the automaticconfiguration and automatic planning of 128 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode,and the M2000 supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 512BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode.


1. Run the MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to establish the BTS in automaticplanning mode. The established BTS is enabled with the automatic planning featureby default. The automatic planning algorithm switch and automatic optimizationalgorithm switch are set to ON.

NOTE

l The established BTS that is in automatic planning mode enables the automatic planning featureautomatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first automatic planning scansucceeds, the BTS does not enable the automatic planning feature automatically after the BTSis powered off again or reset. If the site data needs to be planned again, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand RST AUTOPLAN.

l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run theBSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS ConfigurationMode to AUTO.

l For the BTS3900E, set BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set Freq. and BSIC PlanSwitch ,Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switchand ,andCapacity and Coverage OptimizeSwitch to ON. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command toplan the site data automatically.

l For the BTS3900B, set BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM, and set Freq. and BSIC PlanSwitch,CGI and RAC Plan Switch,and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run theBSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.




7-291

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check thatCGI and RAC Plan Switch, Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch, and Neighbor Cell PlanSwitch are set to ON.

l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to NORMAL.

CAUTION1. After BTS Configuration Mode is set to NORMAL, all the automatic planning and

automatic optimization switches are deactivated.

2. The deactivation of the feature during the automatic planning will result in the reset ofthe BTS.

----End

Example// Activation procedureADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="10.161.30.1", MAINDEVTAB="1111222222333333", CELLNAME="pico_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1, MASTERIPADDR="127.0.0.1";ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CELLNAMELIST="pico_cell0", // Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico";// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

7.154 Configuring PICO SynchronizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602PICO Synchronization.


– Neighboring cells of the BTS3900B are available and the neighboring relations areconfigured.

– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.


– None

l License

– None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contextl The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.

l In the GSM network, the 13 MHz frequency synchronization is mandatory among multipleBTSs to maintain the network QoS, such as the MS handover success rate. The clocksynchronization function of the BTS3900B implements the Um frequency synchronizationwith the neighboring macro BTSs through software. The output synchronization clock is13 MHz.

l After the feature is activated, you do not need to configure a clock server for the BTS3900B.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type toUM_CLK(Um Clock).

l Verification procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK, and then check thatClock Typeis set to UM_CLK(Um Clock).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK, and then set Clock Type toINT_CLK(Internal Clock).

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=UM_CLK;// Verification procedureLST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;// Deactivation procedureSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK;

7.155 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planningThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603PICO Dual-band Auto-planning.


– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.


– None

l License



– The M2000 supports the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature.



7-293

Contextl The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is license-controlled.l The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. Pico auto-planning indicates that the BTS3900B

scans the uplink and downlink frequencies of operators according to the frequency bandcapability of the BTS3900B. The M2000 evaluates the interference condition of eachfrequency according to the scanning result. In addition, considering the neighboringrelationship of the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimuminterference as the frequency of the BTS3900B. PICO Dual-band Auto-planning supportsthe 900 MHz/1800 MHz and 850 MHz/1900 MHz dual-band scenarios on the basis of theoriginal single-band auto-planning function. PICO auto-planning helps operators toimplement fast network deployment and flexible network adjustment and reduce theworkload of manual configuration.

l Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm shouldbe set in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS neighboring relations,BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS3900BGSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. Fordetails, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

l The auto-planning function is mostly used in the site setup scenario. During the executionof the auto-planning function, the services within the network coverage of the BTS3900Bare disrupted.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the auto-planningBTS3900B, and set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support). Theadded BTS3900B is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition,the auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set toON, and the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is set to NO(NO) bydefault. You can run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG tomodify the status of the switches.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

l The added BTS3900B that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning functionautomatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scansucceeds, the BTS3900B does not enable the auto-planning function automatically duringthe subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needsto be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN.

l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, runthe BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS ConfigurationMode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch,auto-optimization algorithm switch and Frequency BandAdaptation Allowed switchaccording to the actual conditions. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RSTAUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. The Frequency BandAdaptationAllowed switch has impacts on the auto-planning result. Operators can determine whetherto enable the switch according to the actual conditions. For details, see the following note.

l Operators can select appropriate planning modes to perform auto-planning according tothe actual conditions. The BTS3900B supports the following planning modes:l If the BTS3900B is configured with one or two TRXs in band A, the Frequency Band

Adaptation Allowed switch is invalid. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 orO2 site in band A according to the number of configured TRXs.

l If the BTS3900B is configured with two TRXs and the two TRXs are in band A andband B respectively, the BTS3900B will scan the frequencies of band A and band B.The frequency bands and site types of the frequencies planned by the BTS3900B,however, vary with the status of the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch.a. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to YES(YES):The M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the workingfrequency according to the reported scanning results of the two frequencies. Thefrequency band where the frequency exists is the working frequency band of theBTS3900B. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 site in corresponding frequencybandsb. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to NO(NO):The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O2 site in dual-band. The M2000 selects theBCCH frequencies in low frequency bands (such as 900 MHz or 850 MHz) and selectsthe TCH frequencies in low frequency bands or high frequency bands.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that BTSConfiguration Mode is set to AUTO(AUTOPLAN).

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS

Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

CAUTIONThe deactivation operation during the execution of the auto-planning function will resultin the reset of the BTS3900B.

----End

Example// Activation procedureADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC,



7-295

SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1;SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FREQSELFADAPT=YES;ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico"; // Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico";// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

7.156 Configuring PICO USB EncryptionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604PICO USB Encryption.

Prerequisitel The license of this feature is activated.l The M2000 supports the PICO USB Encryption feature.

Contextl The PICO USB Encryption feature is license-controlled.l The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. During the local commissioning for BTS3900B setup,

the USB devices are required to save configuration files. With the PICO USB Encryptionfeature, the encryption software is used to encrypt configuration files on the M2000 side,and the configuration files are decrypted on the BTS side. In this case, the configurationfiles in the USB are not displayed in the plain tests, thus preventing potential risks causedby information leak.

l The USB encryption operation is performed on the M2000. For details, see the M2000Operator Guide.

7.157 Configuring PICO Sleeping ModeThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606PICO Sleeping Mode.


– Currently, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E support the sleeping mode feature.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


Contextl The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. The PICO Sleeping Mode feature helps to save the site

energy by enabling or disabling the cells in a period. When the BTS3900B is used at nightwhen the traffic is unavailable in the scenarios, such as offices, warehouses, and exhibition




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

halls, users can specify the period for enabling or disabling the PICO cells, such as, 00:00to 6:00 am. In this period, the power amplifiers of all the carriers (including BCCH carriers)in the cells are shut down.

l When the PICO Sleeping Mode feature takes effect, the PICO cells do not provide radionetwork services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then setEnable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell StartTime and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time.

NOTE

When Enable Turning Off Cell is set to SLEEPING, the BSC6900 disables the cell withinthe disabling period unconditionally and enables the cell within the enabling periodunconditionally. Currently, the Enable Turning Off Cell parameter of only the BTS3900Band BTS3900E can be set to SLEEPING.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell toSLEEPING, and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off CellStop Time to ensure that the current time is within the period specified by the twoparameters.

2. Wait for about five minutes and run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH to check the currentstatus of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set to Yes, it indicatesthat the PICO Sleeping Mode feature is effective.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set CellIndex to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell toSLEEPING, and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off CellStop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the period specified by the twoparameters.

4. Wait for about one minute and run the BSC6900 MML command DSPGCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH to check the currentstatus of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set to No, it indicatesthat the cell is enabled.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then setEnable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE.

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=SLEEPING, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=10&00, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=12&00;// Deactivation procedureSET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;



7-297

7.158 Configuring PICO Automatic OptimizationThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607PICO Automatic Optimization.


– None


– None

l License


l Other

– The M2000 supports the PICO Automatic Optimization feature.

Contextl The PICO Automatic Optimization feature is license-controlled.

l The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. During the operation of the BTS3900B, theautomatic optimization task is created on the M2000 and the BTS3900Bs to be optimizedand the counter thresholds are specified. When the working frequencies are severelyinterfered, the M2000 triggers the BTS3900B to restart the uplink and downlink frequencyscan. In addition, the M2000 selects the working frequency with the minimum interferencefor the BTS3900B through the automatic optimization algorithm. Through automaticoptimization of working frequencies, the BTS3900B can shield itself from the frequenciesthat are severely interfered. In this case, the communication quality within the coverage ofthe BTS3900B and the KPIs are improved significantly. In addition, the handover successrate of the MS in the coverage of the BTS3900B is increased and the call drop rate isreduced.

l The progress and result of the PICO Automatic Optimization feature can be viewed on theM2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 OperatorGuide.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN), BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM(BTS3900BGSM), and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Then, set therelated auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switchaccording to the actual conditions.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that Freq.and BSIC Optimize Switch is set to ON(ON).





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Freq.and BSIC Optimize Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=ON;// Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10;// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;

7.159 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic CapacityPlanning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning.


– This feature is supported by only the Compact BTS.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


– The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online modethrough the M2000 client.

– Before this feature is configured, the BTS has performed automatic configuration andplanning.

– The automatic optimization task of the GSM BTS is created on the M2000 client beforethe feature is activated. For details, see the M2000 Operator Guide.

Contextl The Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning feature is license-controlled.l The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.l According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time

to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initiallyconfigured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, anotherTRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.

NOTEAfter the feature is activated, the M2000 measures the traffic volume of the BTS within 24 hours, and thencompares the measurement result with the threshold of the actual traffic volume. If the traffic volume of theBTS exceeds the threshold, the BTS adds a TRX automatically for expansion.



7-299


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and Capacity andCoverage Optimize Switch to ON.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that

Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch is set to ON.l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then setCapacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to OFF.

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=ON;// Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;

7.160 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor CellPlanning and Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization.


– This feature is supported by only the BTS3900E.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


– The scanning frequency set and neighbor cell list are configured on the M2000 inadvance.

– The parameters related to automatic optimization are set on the M2000 in advance.

Contextl The Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature is license-

controlled.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.

l Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning

– The automatic neighboring cell planning feature is mostly applied in the site deploymentscenario.

– The automatic neighboring cell planning feature indicates that the M2000 triggers theBTS3900E to perform downlink frequency scan. The BTS3900E reports theinformation about the neighboring cells to the M2000. Then, the M2000 configures thescanned cells as the neighboring cells of the BTS3900E. In addition, the M2000 addsthe cells of the BTS3900E in the scanned cells to the neighboring cell list to set up thebidirectional neighboring relation. If the scanned cells are beyond the serving area ofthe M2000, the M2000 can set up only the unidirectional neighboring relation andprompt users to manually configure neighboring cells.

l Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization

– The automatic neighbor cell optimization feature is used during the operation of theBTS.

– During the operation of the BTS3900E, the automatic optimization task is created onthe M2000. With this feature, the M2000 determines that redundant neighboring cellsexist in the BTS3900E or certain neighboring cells are missed according to the analysisof the measurement reports. Then, the M2000 triggers the neighbor cell optimizationprocess automatically and updates the neighboring relation.

l The Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature can improve networkquality, increase handover success rate, and reduce call drop rate automatically, thusreducing the workload of manual configuration and improving OM efficiency.

l The progress and result of the automatic planning and optimization can be viewed on theM2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 OperatorGuide.

Procedurel Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the BTS3900E inauto-planning mode. The added BTS3900E is enabled with the auto-planning functionby default. In addition, the related auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch supported by the BTS3900E are set to ON. You canrun the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to modify the statusof the switches.

NOTE

l The added BTS3900E that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning functionautomatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scansucceeds, the BTS3900E does not enable the auto-planning function automatically duringthe subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needsto be enabled again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN.

l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, runthe BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS ConfigurationMode to AUTO. Then, set Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON. Then, run the RSTAUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.

l Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization



7-301

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set NeighborCell Optimize Switch to ON.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that

Neighbor Cell Plan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch are set to ON.l Deactivation procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTSConfiguration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, Neighbor CellPlan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch to OFF.

----End

Example// Activation procedureADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="10.161.30.1", MAINDEVTAB="1111222222333333", CELLNAME="micro_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1, MASTERIPADDR="127.0.0.1";ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CELLNAMELIST="micro_cell0", SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, NBRCELLSWITCH=ON, NBRCELLOPTSWITCH=ON;// Verification procedureLST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro";// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

7.161 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power OffThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705Compact BTS Timing Power Off.


– The solar controller is connected to the BTS.– Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature.



l Other Prerequisites– The version of the solar controller is POWER2000 V1R1C04.– The time of the solar controller is consistent with that of the BTS3900E.

Contextl The compact BTS is the BTS3900E. Within the coverage of the BTS3900E, if the

BTS3900E uses solar boards to supply power, users can set the enabling and disabling time




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

of the BTS3900E on the BSC when the traffic is unavailable or is light. By using the solarcontroller, the BTS3900E can enable or disable automatically in the specified periods, thusreducing the power consumption of the site, the number of solar boards, and constructioncost.

l The BTS3900E does not provide services when the Compact BTS Timing Power Offfeature takes effect.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BoardParameter Configuration Enabled toYES and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, andset Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the actualconditions.

NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPWR to query the power information about theBTS.

l Verification procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BTS Index to

the index of the BTS to be verified, Board Parameter Configuration Enabled toYES, and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON, and set Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the verification time at the site to ensure that theverification time is within the period specified by Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time.

2. On the main interface of the LMT, click Alarm. The Alarm tab page is displayed.3. Double-click OML Fault on the Fault tab page under Browse Alarm. The Alarm

Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.4. Check Alarm Cause of Location Info, if Alarm Cause is displayed as Green Base

Station Power-off, it indicates that the BTS3900E is powered off.

NOTEThe OML Fault alarm is generated after the BTS is powered off. Thus, check the alarm after Power-offStart Time.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board

Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO or set Board Parameter ConfigurationEnabled to YES and BTS Power-off Enabled to OFF.

----End

Example// Activation procedureSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=ON;// Deactivation procedureSET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=OFF;



7-303

7.162 Configuring Local User ManagementThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706Local User Management.


– The BTS3900E is in IP over FE transmission mode.


– None

l License


l Other

– The PC installed with the Local User Management software is in normal communicationwith the BTS3900E.

Contextl The Local User Management feature is license-controlled.

l Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Local User Management feature.

l This feature can be used to deploy a special commercial mode. When the BTS3900E isused in rural areas, operators can contract the BTS3900E to entrepreneurs. Theentrepreneurs manage the local users through a PC and provide the registration andderegistration services, local services, public network services, and local services in single-site mode.

– The entrepreneurs gain profits by increasing the number of local users. Theentrepreneurs are responsible for registration and communication charging (includingcharging strategies) of local users.

– The transmission in rural areas is unstable. This feature ensures that the local usermanagement can be performed even if the transmission is disrupted. In addition, thecommunication and charging between local users are supported.

– The BTS3900E contracted to the entrepreneurs can also provide services for publicnetwork users of operators. In this case, the communication requirements of publicnetwork users can be ensured when the BSC transmission is disrupted.

l The calls between local users support only full rate.

l When the transmission on the Abis interface is disrupted, the BTS3900E enters the single-site mode. The handover procedure lasts for six minutes, during which services aredisrupted.

l During the communication between local users, only the reporting of the originalmeasurement report is supported.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local callsupport flag to YES(YES).

l Verification procedure– Local services and public network services1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local

call support flag is set to YES(YES).2. Use MSs to perform the service dialing test.

Expected result: The call services between local services, between public networkusers, and between local users and public network users are normal.

NOTEThe local signaling process of call services between local users is different from the common callprocess. You can observe the signaling information through message tracing on the Web LMT.

– Local services in single-site mode1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local

call support flag is set to YES(YES).2. Disconnect the BTS3900E from the BSC and wait for six minutes. Then, perform the

local service dialing test.Expected result: The call services between local users are normal.

l Deactivation procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA, and then set local call

support flag to NO(NO).

----End

Example// Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=YES;// Deactivation procedureSET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=NO;

7.163 Configuring VGCS/VBSThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate VGCS/VBS.


– The test cell is configured with the VGCS function and VGCS ID at the MSC.– Non-single channel originating is configured at the MSC.– VGCS and VBS are enabled for the corresponding IMSIs at the HLR.– Two test MSs, MS 1 and M2, that support VGCS and VBS are available.


l Dependency on License– The license for this feature is activated.




7-305

– The test cell has idle TCHs.– The channel state monitoring of the test cell is started. For details, see Monitoring

Channel Status.

ContextCompared with the GSM system, the GSM-R provides new features, such as VGCS, VBS, andenhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) service. The GSM-R can providediversified voice dispatch services required in the private network.

The cell does not support the VGCS/VBS by default, that is, the default value of NCH OccupyBlock Number is 0. Configure the VGCS/VBS by setting NCH Occupy Block Number andNCH Start Block. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0, the BSC6900 informs the MSof the NCH information in system information type 1. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call afterreceiving the message indicating that the system supports the VGCS/VBS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCHOccupy Block Number and NCH Start Block.

NOTE

l NCH Occupy Block Number cannot be set to 0. The sum of NCH Occupy BlockNumber and NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the value of CCCH BlocksReserved for AGCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC toquery the value of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH.

l After the command is executed, the BSC6900 sends related messages to the MS. VGCSand VBS can be originated in the group only after the MS receives these messages.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGSMR to check that NCH OccupyBlock Number is not 0. That is, the VGCS or VBS is successfully configured in thetest cell.

l Verification Procedure– Verifying VGCS

1. Use MS 1 to perform VGCS in the test cell, and ensure that the service is performedproperly.

2. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP.The expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack,VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, VGCS/VBS Assignment Result, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface.

3. Check the status of TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH forVGCS, another TCH is occupied and that the TCH is released five minutes later.

4. Use MS 2 to perform VGCS with the same VGCS ID as MS 1 in the cell.The expected result: MS 2 is notified that the VGCS is ongoing. After MS 2 isadded to the VGCS call, you can see that the current VGCS ID is displayed on thescreen of MS 2.

5. Press the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink, and check the traced messagesdisplayed in the A Interface Trace window and those displayed on the screen ofMS 1.The expected result: The messages Uplink Request, Uplink Request Ack, UplinkRequest Confirmation, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

A interface. The phone number of MS 2 is displayed on the screen of MS 1. Inaddition, you can hear the voice from MS 2 on MS 1.

6. Press the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink, and at the same time press thePTT key on MS 1 to preempt the uplink. Preemption rejection is displayed on thescreen of MS 1.

– Verifying VBS

1. Use MS 1 to perform VBS in the test cell, and ensure that the service is performedproperly.

2. On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP.

The expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack,VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result aretraced on the A interface.

3. Check the status of TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH forVBS, another TCH is occupied.

4. Use MS 2 to perform VBS with the same ID as MS 1 in the cell.

The expected result: You can see that MS 2 is notified that the VBS call is ongoing.After MS 2 is added the VBS call, you can see that the phone number of MS 1 isdisplayed on the screen of MS 2 and you can hear the voice from MS 1 on MS 2.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCHOccupy Block Number to 0.

----End

7.164 Configuring GSM-T RelayThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310GSM-T Relay.


– The MS, MSC, and HLR need to support this feature.

– The BTS has been upgraded to a version that supports trunking services.

– The MS supports trunking services.


– None

l License


Context

If a BSC supports GSM-T Relay, the BSC is connected to both the public MSC and the trunkingMSC. By routing trunking services to the trunking MSC, the BSC separates the networking oftrunking services and point-to-point call services.



7-307


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add a signaling point of thetrunking MSC. In this step, set DSP index according to the network planning, and setDSP type to A(A) and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node. In this step,set CN Node Index, DPC Group Index, and Operator Name according to thenetwork planning; set MSC ID to a value that identifies a trunking MSC; set DSPindex to the value specified in Step 1; set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC),Trunking MSC to YES(Yes), and Support Paging Message from TrunkingMSC to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to add an MTP3 signaling link

set. In this step, set Signalling link set index according to the network planning.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to add an MTP3 signaling link.

In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 4 and set TCmode based on the subrack combination mode.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to add an MTP3 route. In thisstep, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link setindex to the index of the signaling link set added in Step 4.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR. In this step, set NCHOccupy Block Number of the target cell to a value that is not less than 1.

l Verification Procedure1. On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages

on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DPCof the trunking MSC.

2. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the target cellspecified in Step 7. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window isdisplayed.

3. Initiate a successful VGCS call. Then, check the messages traced on the A interface.

The expected result: The A interface signaling of the VGCS initiating MS is displayedin the A interface tracing window.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Trunking

MSC to NO(No).

----End

7.165 Configuring HUAWEI II HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501HUAWEI II Handover.


– None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



ContextHuawei II handover algorithm will traverse all the handover types in the handover decision-making phase. In the process of traversing the handover types, Huawei II handover algorithmdoes not execute a handover immediately but creates a candidate target cell list when thetriggering conditions of the handover are met, compared with the common handover algorithm.After all the handover types are traversed, the intersection of the candidate cell lists that meetthe handover triggering conditions is selected as the final target cell list. Huawei II handoveralgorithm, which is different from a common handover algorithm, considers comprehensivelyall handover decision-making results so that the final handover decision-making result is moreaccurate.

Huawei II handover algorithm is classified into emergency handover, intra-cell handover, andinter-cell handover.

l The emergency handover is classified into quick handover, bad quality handover, and TAhandover.

l The intra-cell handover is classified into handover between TCHF and TCHH.l The inter-cell handover is classified into interference handover, no downlink measurement

report handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, edge handover, fast-moving microcell handover, better cell handover, and SDCCH handover.



7-309

CAUTIONl After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successfully performed,

penalty is applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handoverback to the old cell.

l In Huawei II handover algorithm, the serving cell must not be selected as the target cell ofbad quality handover.

l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-sited neighboring cell is lower than orequal to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the neighboring cell isprohibited.

l An interference handover can be an intra-cell handover. However, when intra-cell handoveris triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified duration. InHuawei II handover algorithm, only the serving cell can be selected as the target cell ofinterference handover.

l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the sameunderlaid/overlaid cell group when the load handovers between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and LoadHO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handoverof a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the overlaid cell and theunderlaid cell on the network.

l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered betweenthe enhanced dual-band network cells.

l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, the penalty is applied on all theneighboring micro cells.

l Huawei II handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover,interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, enhanced dual-bandnetwork handover, edge handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, better cell handover,handover between TCHF and TCHH, and SDCCH handover.

l Load handover is not treated as an independent handover type for handover decision-making.The load handover decision is made in the network adjustment phase. The selection of atarget cell should be processed by the better cell handover. That is, the load handover istriggered when the triggering conditions of load handover and better cell handover are metsimultaneously.

l Better cell handover is an optimization of inter-layer handover and PBGT handover inHuawei I handover algorithm. It is specific to Huawei II handover algorithm.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithmII).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set CurrentHO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithmII).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set CurrentHO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

5. Activating the quick handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set ChainNeighbor Cell to YES(Yes) and set Chain Neighbour Cell Type according tothe actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setQuick Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST. In this step, setQuick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, QuickHandover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick HandoverPunish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MRNumber, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore MeasurementReport Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS,Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast StatisticTimes, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency ShiftHandover Duration according to the actual situation.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, Quick Handover Offset, QuickHandover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value need to be set by runningthe BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, setUL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and ULFrequency Adjust Value based on the frequency offset information reported bythe BTS.

6. Activating the TA handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setTA HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set TAThreshold according to the actual situation.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setPenalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO according to theactual situation.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set TA HOWatch Time and TA HO Valid Time according to the actual situation.

7. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setBQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

(2) Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLHOEMG. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual.Threshold according to the actual situation.

(3) Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMRFR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DLQual. Limit for AMR HR according to the actual situation.



7-311

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setPenalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO according to theactual situation.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set TA HOWatch Time and BQ HO Watch Time according to the actual situation.

8. Activating interference handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInterference HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Intracell HO Allowed andForbidden time after MAX Times according to the actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInter-layer HO Threshold, Interfere HO Static Time, and Interfere HOValid Time according to the actual situation.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold according to the actual situation.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, setAdjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis according to the actual situation.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, setInterfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR,Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, andInterfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR according to the actualsituation.

9. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG. In this step, set NoDl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR,UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limitaccording to the actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, setFilter Length for TCH Qual. and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. accordingto the actual situation.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set UL BQHO Static Time and UL BQ HO Last Time according to the actual situation.

10. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Cell IUOType to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell) and then set Cell Inner/Extra Property, Same Group Cell Index Type, Same Group Cell Index, andSame Group Cell Name according to the actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA. In this step,set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner CellSerious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level,Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious OverloadThreshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL SubcellLower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, OutgoingOL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, StepLength of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells,and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries according to the actual situation.

11. Activating the edge handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setLoad Handover Support to YES(Yes) and then set Inter-layer HOThreshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm II EdgeHO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Valid Time.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Inter-cell HO Hysteresis, Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time, and Edge HO AdjCellValid Time according to the actual situation.

12. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, setLayer of The Cell according to the actual situation.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Layer of The Cell according to the actualsituation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setMS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set MSFast-moving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MSFast Moving HO according to the actual situation.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external 2G neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GEXT2GCELL to set Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO and Penaltyon MS Fast Moving HO.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setInter-layer HO Threshold according to the actual situation.

NOTE

If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GEXT2GCELL to set Inter-layer HO Threshold according to the actual situation.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, setAdjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, HCS HO Watch Time, and HCSHO Valid Time according to the actual situation.

13. Activating the better cell handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setBetter Cell Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and then set Pathloss Ho. Enableaccording to the actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL. In this step, set BetterCell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time according to the actualsituation.

14. Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH



7-313

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setAMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO toYES(Yes), Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Allow Non-AMRH-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes). Then, set AMR F-H TrafficThreshold, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss AdjustStep, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold,F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H ATCBOffset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H HoLast Time, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F HoATCB Threshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho PathlossThreshold, H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, H-F Ho Stat. Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB AdjustStep, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCBThreshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F TrafficThreshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F HoPathloss Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold according to theactual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH RateAdjust Allow to YES(Yes).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, setSpeech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set AInterface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

15. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setSDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, setInter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed according to the actual situation.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the value of

Current HO Control Algorithm.The expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm isHOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

2. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the A interface by referring to TracingMessages on the A Interface. Select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.The expected result: The BSC sends a Handover performed message to the MSC.

– In the case of a quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.– In the case of a TA handover, the handover cause value is distance.

– In the case of a BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality ordownlink-quality.

– In the case of an interference handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or downlink-quality.

– In the case of a no downlink measurement report handover, the handover causevalue is uplink-quality.

– In the case of an enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause valueis better-cell or traffic.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

– In the case of a load handover, the handover cause value is traffic.

– In the case of an edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength ordownlink-strength.

– In the case of a fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value isbetter-cell.

– In the case of a better cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell.

– In the case of a handover between TCHF and TCHH, the handover cause value isdownlink-quality.

– In the case of an SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell,distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, ordownlink-strength.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

----End

7.166 Configuring Handover Re-establishmentThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502Handover Re-establishment.


– None


– None




– An available neighboring cell is configured for the test cell. A TRX in the test cellsupports handover re-establishment.

Context

When receiving the Error Indication message from the BTS during a handover, the BSC attemptsto re-establish the call on the original channel instead of treating it as a call drop.

Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:

l Reducing the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction

l Improving network KPIs




7-315

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2Re-establishment to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Configure two cells: cell 0 and cell 1. Configure these two cells as neighboring cell

of each other. The two cells are operating normally on the same frequency band.2. On the LMT, open the Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box of cell 0

and cell 1.3. Use the test MS to make a cell in cell 0.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set both Better

Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time to 1, and set PBGT HOThreshold to 64.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, setCurrent HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithmII).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set both T200FACCH/F and T200 FACCH/H to 5, set N200 of FACCH/Half Rate to 30, and setN200 of FACCH/Full Rate to 34.

7. Rapidly decrease the BTS transmit power in cell 0 to initiate a better cell handover tocell 1.

8. After the handover command is delivered, an Error Ind message is received from cell0. The MS cannot receive the handover command. Then, increase the transmit powerin cell 0. The transmission of the Error Ind message indicates that the number of timerT200 expires exceeds N200 plus one.

9. View the result of the RSL message tracing on the Abis interface of cell 0.

The expected result: The call is established successfully and the voice quality is good.The following messages can be traced on the Abis interface of cell 0: HandoverCommand, Error Indication, Establish Request, and Establish Confirm. The call ofthe MS is normal.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Activate L2

Re-establishment to NO(No).

----End

7.167 Configuring RAN SharingThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701RAN Sharing.


– The MSC is configured with two PLMNs, PLMN A and PLMN B. PLMN A belongsto operator A, and PLMN B belongs to operator B.

– Two test MSs are get ready. MS 1 is a subscriber of operator A and MS 2 is a subscriberof operator B.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– The license for this feature is activated.l Other prerequisites

– A BTS is configured with two cells, cell 1 and cell 2. The two cells operate normallyand have idle channels.

ContextWith the RAN sharing function, different operators with independent core networks (CNs) canshare the resources (such as BSC, BTS, antenna, and transmission resources) in a GBSS network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RANSharing to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, setOperator Type to PRIM(Primary Operator) (assume that PLMN A belongs to theprimary operator), set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC accordingto the actual conditions of PLMN A, and set other parameters according to the actualrequirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR again. Inthis step, set Operator Type to SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that PLMN Bbelongs to the secondary operator), set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, andMNC according to the actual conditions of PLMN B, and set other parametersaccording to the actual requirements.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE. In this step, set OperatorName to the name of the operator of PLMN A and set other parameters according tothe actual conditions. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE again.In this step, set Operator Name to the name of the operator of PLMN B and set otherparameters according to the actual conditions.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING. In this step, select the testBTS and set Sharing Allow to YES(Yes).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set OperatorName of cell 1 to the name of the operator of PLMN A. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSP Code of cell 1 to the OSPallocated to the BSC6900 by the operator of PLMN A. Similarly, configure theattributes of cell 2.

l Verification Procedure1. On the LMT, open the Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface dialog box

and select RSL.2. On the LMT, open the Tracing Messages on the A Interface dialog box and select

BSSAP.3. Use MS 1 to access cell 1 and make a call to a fix phone. The call is set up successfully.

Check the signaling procedure of cell 1 in Tracing CS Domain Messages on the AbisInterface and Tracing Messages on the A Interface.

The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of a mobile-originated call ofMS 1 is displayed.



7-317

4. Use MS 2 to access cell 2 and make a call to a fix phone. The call is set up successfully.Check the signaling procedure of cell 2 in Tracing CS Domain Messages on the AbisInterface and Tracing Messages on the A Interface.

The expected result: The complete signaling procedure of a mobile-originated call ofMS 2 is displayed.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL. In this step, set Operator

Name of cell 2 to the name of the operator of PLMN A.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP. In this step, set OSP

Code to the OSP allocated to the BSC6900 by the operator of PLMN A.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING. In this step, select the test

BTS and set Sharing Allow to NO(No).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE. In this step, set Operator

Name to the name of the operator of PLMN B.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNOPERATOR to remove the operator

whose Operator Name is SEC(Secondary Operator) (assume that the operator ofPLMN B is the secondary operator).

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Support RANSharing to NO(No).

----End

7.168 Configuring MOCN Shared CellThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702MOCN Shared Cell.



– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the features GBFD-117401 MSC Pool and GBFD-119701SGSN Pool.


l Others– If the routing of an MS needs to be selected by the CN, then the location areas that MSs

can access need to be configured at the HLR.– Operators A and B are configured. Both operator A and operator B have enabled the

features MSC Pool and SGSN Pool in their networks.

ContextThe RAN Sharing feature enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basiswhereas using their respective core network (CN) equipment. With this feature, differentoperators cannot share the same cell.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

The MOCN Shared Cell feature enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per cellbasis while using their respective CN equipment.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCNSwitch to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL(BSC Select), and then set Re-RoutingOccasion, Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List, and Filter PS Basedon Operator Neighboring Cell List.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a cell named CELL1. In thisstep, set MOCN Sharing Cell to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRA to add a routing sharing area. In thisstep, set Routing Sharing Area Code and Routing Sharing Area Description.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD LAOPMAP to add the mapping between alocation area and operators. In this step, set Location Area Record Index, MCC,MNC, Cell LAC, Operator Name 1, Operator Name 2, and Operator Name 3.Assume that CELL1 is the selected location area, Operator Name 1 is the name ofoperator A, and Operator Name 2 is the name of operator B.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRALAMAP to add the mapping betweena routing sharing area and a location area. Based on the settings specified in , setRouting Sharing Area Record Index, Routing Sharing Area Code, MCC,MNC, and Cell LAC of CELL1.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP to add an IMSI segment. In thisstep, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI segment, Start IMSIvalue, and End IMSI value. Assume that the IMSI of MS1 is between Start IMSIvalue and End IMSI value.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT to add a subscriber routingcategory. In this step, set Subscriber Category Index, Operator Name 1, Rate ofOperator 1, Operator Name 2, Rate of Operator 2, Operator Name 3, and Rateof Operator 3.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISRAMAP to add a routing categoryof an IMSI segment. In this step, set IMSI Category Index; based on the settingsspecified in Step 3, Step 6, and Step 7, set Routing Sharing Area Code, IMSISegment Index, and Subscriber Category Index.

l Verification Procedure (CS Services)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCNSwitch to BSCSEL(BSC Select), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(NotRedirect), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), andFilter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT. In this step, set Operator Name1 to the name of operator A, Rate of Operator 1 to 30, Operator Name 2 to the nameof operator B, and Rate of Operator 2 to 70.

3. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the A interface by referring to TracingMessages on the A Interface, Select BSSAP in the Trace Type area.

Start message tracing on the A interface twice by setting DPC(HEX) to the DPCs ofoperator A and operator B respectively.



7-319

4. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of CELL1. Then,click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is displayed.

5. Initiate a location update procedure for MS1 to view the traced messages on the Ainterface.


– If the number indicated by the last two digitals of the MS1 IMSI is smaller than30, the signaling related to location update is found in the CS tracing messages ofoperator A on the A interface.

– If the number indicated by the last two digitals of the MS1 IMSI is greater than orequal to 30, the signaling related to location update is found in the CS tracingmessages of operator B on the A interface.

l Verification Procedure (PS Services)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCN

Switch to BSCSEL(BSC Select), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(NotRedirect), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), andFilter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT. In this step, set Operator Name1 to the name of operator A, Rate of Operator 1 to 30, Operator Name 2 to the nameof operator B, and Rate of Operator 2 to 70.

3. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 in Activation Procedure to add the mapping betweenthe routing sharing area and the location area of CELL2.

NOTE

The routing sharing area of CELL2 must be different from that of CELL1.

4. MS1 camps on CELL2 and processes PS services.5. On the LMT, start the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing PS

Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLADMSTAT. In this step, set CELL2

to the Lock state so that MS1 camps on CELL1.7. Check the PS tracing messages of MS1.


– If the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI are smaller than 30, the signaling related toMS1 access to the network of operator A is found in the PS tracing messages ofMS1.

– If the last two digits of the MS1 IMSI are greater than or equal to 30, the signalingrelated to MS1 access to the network of operator B is found in the PS tracingmessages of MS1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set MOCN

Switch to CLOSE(Close).

----End

7.169 Configuring IMSI-Based HandoverThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703IMSI-Based Handover.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


– A test MS (MS1) is available and its IMSI is recorded.l Dependency on Other Features

– Nonel License


– The Common Id and Handover Request messages sent by the MSC need to carry IMSI.– A BTS is configured with two test cells (CELL1 and CELL2) of the same operator.

These cells are in the normal state and support the GPRS function.– Idle channels are available in CELL1. CELL1 and CELL2 are neighboring cells of each

other. The two cells are in different location areas.

ContextAccording to the network planning and service requirements, an operator can divide the networkinto multiple areas (called handover shared areas) and restrict the service area of an MS byconfiguring the mapping between the IMSI range and the handover shared area.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IMSIHandover Switch to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP to add an IMSI segment. In thisstep, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI segment, Start IMSIvalue, and End IMSI value according to the actual situation (assume that IMSI ofMS1 is within the configured IMSI segment).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHA to add a handover shared area. In thisstep, set Handover Sharing Area, Operator Name, and Handover Sharing AreaDescription according to the actual situation (assume that Operator Name is thename of the operator of CELL1).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHALAMAP to configure the mappingbetween a handover shared area and a location area. In this step, set HandoverSharing Area Record Index, Handover Sharing Area, MCC, MNC, and CellLAC according to the actual situation (assume that MCC, MNC, and Cell LAC arethose of CELL2).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISHAMAP to add an IMSI-supportedhandover area. In this step, set IMSI Index of Handover Sharing Area Record,Handover Sharing Area, and IMSI Segment Index according to the settingsspecified in and .

l Verification Procedure (CS Services)1. MS1 camps on CELL1 to call a fixed-line phone. The call is set up successfully.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index

Type to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.



7-321

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index or CellName to the index or name of CELL1.

4. On the LMT, start the message tracing over the Abis interface by referring to TracingCS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Select RSL in the Trace Type area.

5. On the RSL tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to those of CELL1 and CELL2.Then, click Submit. The Abis Interface CS Trace message interface is displayed.


– If idle channels are unavailable in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abisinterface of CELL1 indicate that handover cannot be performed and measurementreports are reported continuously.

– If an idle channel is available in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abisinterface of CELL2 indicate that the incoming internal inter-cell handoverprocedure for MS1 is performed properly and measurement reports are reportednormally.

l Verification Procedure (PS Services)

1. MS1 camps on CELL1 and processes PS services.

2. On the LMT, start the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing PSDomain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set CellIndex or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set CellIndex or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Network OperationMode to NC2.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellIndex or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Cell Urgent ReselectionAllowed to PERMIT(Permit) and MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold to 2.

7. Check the PS tracing messages of MS1.

The expected result: The signaling for the handover of MS1 from CELL1 to CELL2is found in the PS tracing messages of MS1 when the transmission quality in CELL1deteriorates.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set IMSIHandover Switch to NO(No).

----End

7.170 Configuring MSRDThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)




feature depends on the feature: GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink.l License


– The cell supports the GPRS.– This feature should be supported by the MS.

ContextThe MSRD improves the signal receiving capability of the MS. Two antennas are used toeliminate interference, thus achieving enhanced channel diversity capability.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set MSRDPDCH Multiplex Threshold to 10 or MSRD MCS Threshold to MCS9.

l Verification Procedure1. Assume that the interference is the same and dual carrier in the downlink are not be

supported. Use the MS that supports MSRD to perform packet services. Check thatthe rate of this MS is more stable than the MS that does not support MSRD.


----End

Example//Activating MSRDSET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSRDPDCHLEV=10, MSRDMCSLEV=MCS9;

7.171 Configuring Dual Carriers in DownlinkThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).






7-323

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-510801 MSRD.l License


– The cell has sufficient resources and supports the Enhanced General Packet RadioService (EGPRS). In addition, the cell is configured with more than two carriers.

– The DPUd board is configured.– This feature should be supported by the MS.

ContextThe network supports the feature of allocating downlink channel resources on the two carriersat the same time. This improves the rate of the downlink packet data.

The dual carriers in downlink function can improve the rate of the downlink packet data of asingle MS (100% at the most). A single MS may take up more resources, and thus the numberof MSs supported by the network is reduced.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and SupportDownlink Dual-Carrier to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to perform streaming services.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MSCONTEXT to check the usage of

occupied channels.Expected result: The information on the two downlink TFIs is displayed. Thisindicates dual carriers in downlink takes effect.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Downlink Dual-Carrier to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport).

----End

Example//Activating DLDCSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, DLDCSPT=SUPPORT;//Deactivating DLDCSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, DLDCSPT=UNSUPPORT;

7.172 Configuring the EGPRS2-AThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)



– This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios, the PEUa / POUc boards areneeded as Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS / GEPS subrack.


feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP orGBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.


l Other Prerequisites– The DPUd board is configured.– The cell supports the GPRS and the EGPRS feature.– The Abis interface of the cell works in HDLC or IP mode.– Only DBS3900(RRU3008) supports this feature.– The TRXs configured for the BTS should support this feature.– MS should support this feature.

Contextl After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the Temporary

Block Flow (TBF) in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell.l Impact on the performance: The UL/DL packet rate of a single MS is improved. The uplink

data rate over the air interface can be increased to 76.8 kbit/TS and the downlink to 98.4kbit/TS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, Uplink

EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type and Downlink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type to thecoding types required by the test.

2. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on theUm Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. In this step, The uplink/downlink EGRPS2-Acoding schemes set in Step 1 can be viewed.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).

4. Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on theUm Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. The output result shows that only the codingschemes from MCS1 to MCS9 are used.




7-325

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=YES;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPE2AFIXMCS=MCS2, DNE2AFIXMCS=MCS2;SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;

7.173 Configuring Latency ReductionThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805Latency Reduction.


– BSC6900 built-in PCU should be used, the Gb interface board and the DPU board thatsupports the built-in PCU are installed.

– This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios, the PEUa/POUc/FG2a boards areneeded as Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS/GEPS subrack.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IPover E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization.

l License



– The DPUd board is configured.

– The cell supports the EDGE.

– The BTS and MS support the latency reduction.

Context

Latency reduction is introduced in the HDLC/IP transmission mode over the Abis interface toreduce the transmission latency, enhance user experience on the conversational service, andimprove user satisfaction.

NOTEThe BTS3900B/E supports this feature, and the BTS3006C/BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE that isconfigured with non-optimized DTRUs does not support this feature.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and SupportReduced Latency Capability to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure1. Use the MS to perform conversational services in the PS domain.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to query the status of the PDCH.

Expected Result: In the displayed result, the number of RTTI TBFs on the PDCH isnot zero.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Reduced LatencyCapability to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport).

----End

Example//Activating Latency ReductionSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, SPTREDUCELATENCY=SUPPORT;//Deactivating Laterncy ReductionSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, SPTREDUCELATENCY=UNSUPPORT;

7.174 Configuring License Control for UrgencyThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511001License Control for Urgency.



– Nonel License


Context

CAUTIONThis function is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, forexample, in a disaster.This function can be enabled only three times for each R version and it is valid only in sevendays since it is enabled.



7-327

l The license file includes function items and resource items. The restricted functions in thelicense file can be enabled by configuring license control for urgency function. In this way,the hardware capacity can reach the maximum.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set GraceProtection Period Switch to ON.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to view the resource items of

the license.The returned result shows that all the values of the resource items reach the maximum.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting ofGrace Protection Period Switch State.The returned result shows the settings of Remaining Grace Protection Times,Remaining Grace Protection Days, and Grace Protection Period Switch State (thestate is ON).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace

Protection Period Switch to OFF.

----End

7.175 Configuring Access Control ClassThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002Access Control Class(ACC).



– Nonel License


– The MS and its SIM card comply with the protocols related to ACC.

ContextThis feature enables special users and some common users to access the network preferentiallywhen the network traffic is excessively high.

When the ACC feature is enabled, the MS checks the access control class set in the SIM cardbased on the access control class included in the cell broadcast message. If the access controlclass is an allowed one, the MS can preempt the RACH to access the network. If the accesscontrol class is an forbidden one, the MS cannot access the network.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCACCCTRLP. In this step, set AccessControl Policy Index, ACC Control Window Size, Starting Point of the AccessControl Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window as required.

NOTE

A maximum of 32 access control policies can be set. You can run the command in Step 1 formultiple times to set multiple access control policies.

When the Access Control Policy is enabled and the system message is sent by the BSC, theaccess of the MSs of classes 10 to 15 is not affected regardless of the Access Control Policyconfiguration.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set AccessControl Allowed to YES(Yes), and then set ACC Control Policy to the value ofAccess Control Policy Index specified in Step 1.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC.

The expected result: Access Control Allowed is set to YES(Yes), and Access ControlPolicy is specified.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCACCCTRLP.The expected result: The values of Access Control Window Size, Starting Point ofthe Access Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Windoware those specified during configuration.

3. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS DomainMessages on the Abis Interface.

NOTE

The ACC field contains two octets and is 16 bits in length. Each bit indicates a level of the SIMusers and its value is 0 or 1. When a bit is 0, the SIM users of a certain level are allowed toaccess the network. When a bit is 1, the SIM users of a certain level are forbidden to access thenetwork.

The expected result: The Information Element (IE) RACH Control Parameters isincluded in the system message, and within the sliding window range the value of thebits in the ACC field of the RACH Control Parameters is 1 from the starting pointonwards.

4. When an MS is used to make a call, the MS cannot access the network if the level ofthe SIM card of the MS belongs to the forbidden levels. If the level of the SIM carddoes not belong to the forbidden levels, the MS can access the network normally.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC to deactivate the ACC

feature in a cell. In this step, set Access Control Allowed to NO(No).

----End

7.176 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement onIur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.



7-329


– The multi-mode base station controller (BSC6900) is required.– The BSS and the RNS are connected properly through the Iur-g interface.


l License– None

l GSM+UMTS multi-mode handsets are required.l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.l IP transmission is applied on the Iur-g interface.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC must be activated respectively.

l The RNC can be configured with a maximum of 32 neighboring BSCs.

l The BSC can be configured with a maximum of 16 neighboring RNCs.

l If the inter-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured, the data for this interface must be negotiated and planned.

ContextWith the Co-RRM feature, the common measurement procedure and interaction between GSMand UMTS cells is implemented on the Iur-g interface. In this manner, the handover based onload is enhanced.

The connections of the Iur-g interface are described as follows:

l The Iur-g interface is configured inside the MBSC.That is, the intra-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured in GU mode. In this case, the Iur-ginterface board is not required, and no data for this interface needs to be configured.

l The Iur-g interface is configured between the MBSCs.That is, the MBSC in GSM mode is connected to the MBSC in UMTS mode through theIur-g interface, or the MBSC in GU mode is connected to the MBSC in GSM or UMTSmode through the Iur-g interface. In this case, data for this interface must be configured,and an IP-based Iur-g interface board, such as FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, and GOUc, must beconfigured in the two MBSCs that are connected to each other. The two interface boardscan be connected directly to each other or through a relay device.


1. Configure the neighboring cell relationship and the Iur-g connection. For details, seeConfigurations of Neighboring Cell Relation and Iur-g Connection.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable the inter-RAThandover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Ifmultiple neighboring cells are planned, repeat this step.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA to set the load balancedelta threshold. In this step, set CS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold torecommended value 110.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set the 2Gload adjustment coefficient. In this step, set 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient torecommended value 10. If multiple neighboring cells are planned, repeat this step.


1. Click the Trace tab on the main page of the LMT. The Trace tab page is displayed.2. Choose Trace > GSM Services, and then double-click BSC Trace. The BSC

Trace dialog box is displayed.3. Specify the parameter DPC, and then click Submit.

If... Then...

You view that theRANSP_COMM_MEAS_RPRTmessage is reported,

The data configuration is successful.

You do not view that theRANSP_COMM_MEAS_RPRTmessage is reported,

The data configuration fails.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to close theswitch for load balancing and set the load adjustment coefficient. In this step, setAllow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g/*Enable the inter-RAT handover.*/SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=4, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;/*Set the load balance delta threshold.*/SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;/*Set the 2G load adjustment coefficient.*/SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=4 G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;//Deactivating Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-gSET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;

7.177 Configuring NACC Procedure Optimization Based onIur-g between GSM and UMTS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS.



7-331


– The multi-mode base station controller (BSC6900) is required.

– The BSS and the RNS are connected properly through the Iur-g interface.


– None

l License


l GSM+UMTS multi-mode handsets are required.

l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.

l IP transmission is applied on the Iur-g interface.

l The UE needs to support NACC.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC must be activated respectively.

l The RNC can be configured with a maximum of 32 neighboring BSCs.

l The BSC can be configured with a maximum of 16 neighboring RNCs.

l If the inter-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured, the data for this interface must be negotiated and planned.

Context

With the Co-RRM feature, the common measurement procedure and interaction between GSMand UMTS cells is implemented on the Iur-g interface. In this manner, the NACC procedureoptimization is enhanced.

The connections of the Iur-g interface are described as follows:

l The Iur-g interface is configured inside the MBSC.

That is, the intra-MBSC Iur-g interface is configured in GU mode. In this case, the Iur-ginterface board is not required, and no data for this interface needs to be configured.

l The Iur-g interface is configured between the MBSCs.

That is, the MBSC in GSM mode is connected to the MBSC in UMTS mode through theIur-g interface, or the MBSC in GU mode is connected to the MBSC in GSM or UMTSmode through the Iur-g interface. In this case, data for this interface must be configured,and an IP-based Iur-g interface board, such as FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, and GOUc, must beconfigured in the two MBSCs that are connected to each other. The two interface boardscan be connected directly to each other or through a relay device.


1. Configure the neighboring cell relationship and the Iur-g connection. For details, seeConfigurations of Neighboring Cell Relation and Iur-g Connection.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable the inter-RAThandover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES. If multipleneighboring cells are planned, repeat this step.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GNRNC to allow NACC-relatedinformation exchange on the Iur-g interface. In this step, set Allow Info Exchange atIur-g to YES, and Info Exchange Content to NACCRELATED-1.


1. Click the Trace tab on the main page of the LMT. The Trace tab page is displayed.2. Choose Trace > GSM Services, and then double-click BSC Trace. The BSC

Trace dialog box is displayed.3. Specify the parameter DPC, and then click Submit.

If... Then...

You view that theRANSP_COMM_MEAS_RPRTmessage is reported,

The data configuration is successful.

You do not view that theRANSP_COMM_MEAS_RPRTmessage is reported,

The data configuration fails.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to close theswitch for load balancing and set the load adjustment coefficient. In this step, setAllow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTS/*Enable the inter-RAT handover.*/SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=3, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=4, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;//Allow NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface.MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=YES, INFOEXCHGLIST=NACCRELATED-1;//Deactivating NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and UMTSSET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;

7.178 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Basedon Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.




7-333

– The BSC model is the BSC6900.

– A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.l Dependency on Other Features

– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.

– This feature depends on features WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load BalancingBased on Iur-g, WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package and WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.

l License

– The license is activated.l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.l The information element Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should be performed.l The information element Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message

sent from the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should beperformed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as theneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated respectively.

l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

Context

This feature is based on the internal information exchange mechanism of the MBSC. It enablesload to be distributed on the basis of service attributes and load conditions in GSM and UMTSnetworks when an MS accesses a network. Load is distributed through RRC redirection and theload-based inter-RAT handover. In this manner, load in GSM and UMTS networks is balanced.

Procedurel 3G-to-2G Load Balancing

1. Activation Procedure

(1) Configuration on the RNC side

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable loadbalancing and set the load difference thresholds. In this step, set ServiceDistribution and Load Balancing Switch to LOAD-BASED(LOAD-BASED), Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of CSService to 10, and PS Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2Gof Ps Service to 30.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH toenable the inter-RAT handover. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-down list box.

(2) Configuration on the BSC side




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable theinter-RAT incoming BSC handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSCHandover Enable to YES(Yes). If multiple neighboring cells are planned,repeat this step to enable the inter-RAT incoming BSC handover for all theneighboring cells.

2. Verification ProcedureNOTE

If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration is successful.Otherwise, the configuration is unsuccessful.

(1) Run the following commands to put a UMTS cell into the basic congestion state:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM. In this step, setDL LDR trigger threshold to 30 and DL LDR release threshold to 30.

b. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM. In this step, set Load Ratio(%) to 30.

(2) The verification procedure is divided into the RRC setup phase and RABconnection phase. The verification in the latter phase is divided into verificationof CS speech services and PS data services.

a. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell 1 is reselected to GSM cell2 during the RRC setup phase

1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell 1. The call issuccessfully established. Trace signaling on the Uu interface on theLMT. RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ andRRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messages are reported. TheRRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT message contains GSM-TargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell 2 is contained. Youcan infer that the MS accesses the network in cell 2.

b. Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell 1 is handed over to GPRS cell3 during the RAB connection phase

1) Use the MS to browse the Internet.2) Trace the Uu interface on the LMT. You can find that the

RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRLand RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN messagesare sent from the RNC to the MS or from the MS to the RNC. TheInterRATEvent in RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CN to theRNC and then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP message is sentfrom the RNC to the CN.

4) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND andRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from theCN to the RNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETEmessage is sent from the RNC to the CN.

5) When the MS attempts to reselect to cell 3, Internet browsing isaffected to some degree. After the MS reselects to cell 3, Internetbrowsing returns to normal.

c. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell 1 is handed over to GSMcell 2 during the RAB connection phase



7-335

1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell 1. The call issuccessfully established.

2) Trace the Uu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRLand RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM messages are sent fromthe RNC to the MS or from the MS to the RNC. The InterRATEventin RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from the RNCto the CN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND andRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND message is sent from the CNto the RNC.

4) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the RNCto the CN.

3. Deactivation Procedure

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSCLoad Balancing. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load BalancingSwitch to OFF(OFF).

l 2G-to-3G Load Balancing1. Activation Procedure

– Configuration on the BSC side

(1) Configuring neighbor relation on the BSC side(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to

enable load balancing and set the load adjustment coefficient. In this step, setAllow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based)and 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable theinter-RAT outgoing BSC handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSCHandover Enable to YES(Yes).

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, setCCS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to 110.

– Configuration on the RNC side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM. In this step, setService Distribution and Load Balancing Switch to LOAD-BASED(LOAD-BASED).

2. Verification ProcedureNOTE

If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration is successful.Otherwise, the configuration is successful.

(1) Run the MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to lock TCHs in theGSM cell and enable the load in the GSM cell to exceed the value of 2G CellUL Basic Congest Thred.

(2) Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell. The directed retry procedure istriggered so that the MS accesses the network in the UMTS cell. The call issuccessfully established. Trace signaling on the A interface. Check thatAssignment Request, Handover Required, and Handover Command




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

messages are reported and cause in the Handover Required message isdirected-retry(13).

3. Deactivation Procedure

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB todeactivate 2G-to-3G Load Balancing. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT LoadHO in Access State to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating 3G-to-2G load balancing //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling load balancing and setting the load difference thresholds*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=LOAD-BASED, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcCsDeltaThrd=10, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcPsDeltaThrd=30; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling the inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;//Deactivating 3G-to-2G load balancing SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;//Activating 2G-to-3G load balancing //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling load balancing*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting Load Balance Delta Threshold*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;//Configuration on the RNC sideSET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=LOAD-BASED;//Deactivating 2G-to-3G load balancing SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;

7.179 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Basedon Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.


– The base station controllers are multi-mode BSCs (MBSCs), namely, the BSC6900s.

– A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.


– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.



7-337

– This feature depends on features WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic SteeringBased on Iur-g, WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package and WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.


l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.l The information element Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should be performed.l The information element Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message

sent from the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should beperformed or Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should not be performed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as theneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated respectively.

l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

ContextWith the Co-RRM feature, service distribution is enhanced through common measurement andinformation interaction on the Iur-g interface.


1. Configuration on the RNC side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM enable servicedistribution. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load BalancingSwitch to SERVICE-BASED(SERVICE-BASED).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe inter-RAT handover. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-downlist box.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM to enable inter-RAT CS and PS handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT CS Handover Switchand Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON respectively. If multiple cells areplanned for service distribution, repeat this step.

2. Configuration on the BSC side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable the inter-RAT incoming BSC handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC HandoverEnable to YES(Yes).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In thisstep, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Service-based(Service-based).





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

1. Run the following commands to put a UMTS cell into the basic congestion state:

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM. In this step, set DLLDR trigger threshold to 30 and DL LDR release threshold to 30.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM. In this step, set Load Ratio (%)to 30.

2. The verification procedure is divided into the RRC setup phase and RAB connectionphase. The verification in the latter phase is divided into verification of CS speechservices and PS data services.– Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell 1 is reselected to GSM cell 2

during the RRC setup phase

(1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell 1. The call issuccessfully established. Trace signaling on the Uu interface on the LMT.RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ and RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECTmessages are reported. The RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messagecontains GSM-TargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell 2 is contained.You can infer that the MS accesses the network in cell 2.

– Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell 1 is handed over to GPRS cell 3during the RAB connection phase

(1) Use the MS to browse the Internet.(2) Trace the Uu interface on the LMT. You can find that the RRC_RB_SETUP,

RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRL andRRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN messages are sent fromthe RNC to the MS or from the MS to the RNC. The InterRATEvent inRRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

(3) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CN to the RNCand then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP message is sent from theRNC to the CN.

(4) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND andRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from the CN to theRNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sentfrom the RNC to the CN.

(5) When the MS attempts to reselect to cell 3, Internet browsing is affected tosome degree. After the MS reselects to cell 3, Internet browsing returns tonormal.

– Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell 1 is handed over to GSM cell 2during the RAB connection phase

(1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell 1. The call issuccessfully established.

(2) Trace the Uu interface on the LMT. You can find that the RRC_RB_SETUP,RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRL andRRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM messages are sent from the RNCto the MS or from the MS to the RNC. The InterRATEvent inRRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

(3) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from the RNC to theCN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND and



7-339

RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND message is sent from the CN to theRNC.

(4) Trace the Iu interface on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the RNC to theCN.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM to disable inter-RATCS and PS handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT CS Handover Switch and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to OFF respectively.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSC servicedistribution. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch toOFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating 3G-to-2G service distribution //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling service distribution*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=SERVICE-BASED; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling inter-RAT CS and PS handovers*/ ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling the inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;/*Enabling service distribution*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based;//Deactivating 3G-to-2G service distribution SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;

7.180 Configuring GSM and UMTS Intelligent ShutdownBased on RAT Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511206GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority.


– GRFUs and WBBPs must share the BBU.

– One set of battery group must be shared by GSM and UMTS modes.


– WRFD-070201 GSM and UMTS Intelligent Shutdown Based on RAT Priority

l License

– None




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

ContextWhen the power system becomes faulty and storage batteries are used, the GSM or UMTS carrierpower is cut off based on RAT priority.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set BackupPower Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power). Then set BackupPower Saving Policy to BYCOVER(Cover Priority)BYCAP(CapabilityPriority), or BYSAVING(Saving Priority) according to the actual situation.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSBAKPWR and check the returned

message.

If... Then...

Information about the switch forintelligent shutdown matches theconfiguration.

The configuration succeeds.

Information about the switch forintelligent shutdown does not match theconfiguration.

The configuration fails.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR. In this step, set BackupPower Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=123, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR, BAKPWRSAVPOLICY=BYSAVING, DROPPWRSTARTTIME=1, SHUTDOWNTRXSTARTTIME=2, DROPPWRINTERVAL=30, DROPPWRSTEP=2, MAXDROPPWRTHRESHOLD=20, PWROFFPROTECTSTARTTIME=30;//Verification procedure LST BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=123;//Deactivation procedure SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=123, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYTRX;

7.181 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTEThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.


– The MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR need to support this feature.



7-341



l Others– The MS supports both GSM and LTE and supports bidirectional cell reselection between

GSM and LTE.– The BSS and the NSS support bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and LTE.

ContextCell reselection between GSM and LTE enables an MS in an LTE network to reselect the GSMnetwork when the MS is in a blind zone of the LTE network coverage, or when the LTE cell isin an area with weak coverage. In this way, normal communication of the MS is ensured. Whena dual-mode MS reenters the coverage of the LTE network, or when the MS detects that an LTEcell is in strong coverage, the MS can reselect the LTE network if the cell reselection conditionsare met. Then, the MS can enjoy the abundant services provided by the LTE network.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add an external LTEcell. In this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set LTECell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, setall the parameters to the recommended values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL to add a neighboring LTEcell. In this step, set Source Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, NeighborCell Index to the index of the added LTE cell, and Support Cell Reselection toSUPPORT(SUPPORT).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the value of

LTE Cell Reselection Allowed.

The expected result: The value of LTE Cell Reselection Allowed is Yes.2. On the BSC6900 LMT, start the message tracing over the Abis interface by referring

to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Select RSL in the TraceType area.

3. On the RSL tab page, set Filter Flag to Cell and Cell ID(cell1,cell2,…cell16) to theID of the cell to be verified. Then, click Submit. The Abis Interface CS Tracemessage interface is displayed.

4. Enable a dual-mode MS to camp on a GSM cell. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, set GERAN Priority to 1 andEUTRAN Priority to 7.

The expected result: The MS reselects the LTE cell successfully. The Abis messagetracing result shows that BCCH Information is traced and its message type is SystemInformation 2Quater.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Optional: To disable cell reselection from a GSM cell to any LTE cell, run the

BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set LTE CellReselection Allowed to NO(No).

2. Optional: To disable cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific LTE cell, run theBSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL. In this step, set Support CellReselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).

----End

7.182 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTEBased on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.



– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.


l The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.l The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.l The SGSN support the PFC procedure.l The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells

support the cell reselection.l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports

the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

Contextl When an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells under the NSE support

the PS handover.l The BSC supports the PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN. In this way, the

access time of the MS to the target cell is reduced.


– Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command.– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).



7-343

– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).2. Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set Network Control

Mode to NC2(NC2).3. Run the SET GCELLNC2PARA command.

– Set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).– Set Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period as required, for example, 10.– Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.– Set Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold as required, for

example, 1.– Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.– Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.– Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.– Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.

4. Run the SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS command. In this step, set EUTRANPriority to 7.

– Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM

1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cellPS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the SET GCELLNC2PARA command. In this step, set Cell UrgentReselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection Allowedto FORBID(Forbid).

2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PSmessages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on theLMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that thelevel of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the followingmessages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage isenabled.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN

to BSC.– Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.

– Verifying the PS Handover from LTE to GSM

1. Use an MS that camps on the LTE serving cell to download or upload data. Tracethe PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interfaceon the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the UmInterface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

2. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so thatthe level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gbinterface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled.– Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to

SGSN– Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN

NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set SupportIn LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set Support Out LTE Inter-

cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELWATCHPERIOD=10, RESELWORSENLEVTHRSH=1, RESELINTERVAL=2;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

7.183 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTEBased on Quality

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.


– None



7-345


This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.l License

– The license has been activated.l The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.l The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.l The SGSN support the PFC procedure.l The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells

support the cell reselection.l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports

the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.






1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command.– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

2. Run the SET GCELLPSBASE command. In this step, set Network ControlMode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the SET GCELLNC2PARA command.– Set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).– Set MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold as required, for example, 200.– Set Cell Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold as required, for example, 30.– Set EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 7.– Set EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 16.– Set GPRS Quality Threshold as required, for example, 5.– Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.– Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.– Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.– Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.– Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

4. Run the SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS command. In this step, set EUTRANPriority to 7.


1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cellPS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).


– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the SET GCELLNC2PARA command. In this step, set Cell NormalReselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection Allowedto FORBID(Forbid).

2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PSmessages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on theLMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that thelevel of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the followingmessages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on quality isenabled.

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSNto BSC.

– Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.


1. Use an MS that camps on the LTE serving cell to download or upload data. Tracethe PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interfaceon the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the UmInterface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so thatthe level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gbinterface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on quality is enabled.

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC toSGSN

– Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN

NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover toUNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After theverification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.




7-347

1. Run the SET GCELLGPRS command. In this step, set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, MSRXQUALSTATTHRSH=200, CELLRXQUALWORSENRATIOTHRSH=30, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, EGPRSBEPLIMITGMSK=7, EGPRSBEPLIMIT8PSK=16, GPRSRXQUALLIMIT=5;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID;//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

7.184 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTEBased on Cell Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.


– None


– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.

l License

– The license has been activated.

l The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.

l The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.

l The SGSN support the PFC procedure.

l The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cellssupport the cell reselection.

l The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supportsthe feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)






1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS.– Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).– Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).– Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, setNetwork Control Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA.– Set Cell Load Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit).– Set Load Reselection Start Threshold as required, for example, 85.– Set Load Reselection Receive Threshold as required, for example, 6.– Set Load Reselect Level Threshold as required, for example, 40.– Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15.– Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30.– Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10.– Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4.– Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6.– Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step,set EUTRAN Priority to 7.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRSto SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cellPS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

l Verification Procedure– Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellNormal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Urgent ReselectionAllowed to FORBID(Forbid).

2. Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace thePS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface onthe LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.



7-349

3. Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.4. Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following

messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on cell load isenabled.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN– Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN

to BSC.– Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.


1. Use an MS that camps on the LTE serving cell to download or upload data. Tracethe PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interfaceon the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface andTracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2. Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.3. Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gb

interface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Uminterface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PShandover from LTE to GSM based on cell load is enabled.– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC– Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to

SGSN– Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN

NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover toUNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After theverification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support Out LTE Inter-cell PSHandover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), and Support In LTE Inter-cell PSHandover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example//Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, LOADRESELSTARTTHRSH=85, LOADRESELRXTHRSH=6, LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, LOADRESELMAXRXLEV=40;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSMSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;//Verification ProcedureSET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID;




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

//Deactivation ProcedureSET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

7.185 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTEThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.


– The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.

l License


l The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) andConfiguring the Gb Interface (over IP).


Contextl This feature can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection from

GSM to LTE for an MS.

l With this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal levelcan reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level.Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselectionconsiders factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, andsignal level of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS toSupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set NetworkControl Mode to NC2(NC2).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set CellNormal Reselection Allowed, Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed, andCell LoadReselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit). Set the related parameters as requiredaccording to network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS. In this step, setEUTRAN Priority to 7.




7-351

1. Make the MS camp on the serving GSM cell. Then, use the MS to perform GPRSservices, and trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PSDomain Messages on the Um Interface.

2. Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cellis higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the servingcell.

3. Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced,the eNC2 between GSM and LTE is enabled.– The Packet Measurement Report message from MS to BSC.– The Packet Cell Change Order message from BSC to MS.


SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating eNC2 Between GSM and LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES;SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2;SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT;SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7;//Deactivating eNC2 Between GSM and LTESET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;

7.186 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTEThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted CellChange.


– The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.l Dependency on Other Features

– The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete.This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.


l The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) andConfiguring the Gb Interface (over IP).





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Contextl The eNACC between E-UTRAN and GERAN supports only the relocation of MSs from

E-UTRAN to GERAN.l The eNACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the

period of service disruption caused by cell reselection.

NOTEThe verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure; otherwise, somemessages may not be traced.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support toYES(Support).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation whenthe traffic volume is low.

l Verification Procedure1. Trace SIG messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing SIG

Messages on the Gb Interface.2. Check the messages traced over the Gb interface. If the following messages are traced,

the eNACC between GSM and LTE is enabled.– The RAN INFORMATION REQ message from SGSN to BSC.– The RAN INFORMATION message from BSC to SGSN.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to NO

(No Support).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation whenthe traffic volume is low.

----End

Example//Activating eNACC Between GSM and LTEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;//Deactivating eNACC Between GSM and LTEMOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=NO;RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;

7.187 Configuring SRVCCThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).



7-353


– None


– None

l License


Contextl The SRVCC feature enables the speech services that are carried on the IP Multimedia

Subsystem (IMS) to be handed over to the GERAN. An MS accesses the IMS to maintainthe speech service through the CS domain in the GERAN or the PS domain in the E-UTRAN.

l The SRVCC feature supports only handover of speech services from E-UTRAN toGERAN. It is available only when the E-UTRAN and the GERAN cover the same area.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set SRVCCHandover Allowed to YES(Yes), and set LTE SAI MCC, LTE SAI MNC, LTESAI LAC, and LTE SAI SAC according to SAI settings on the GSM side.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query SRVCCHandover Allowed.

Expected result: The value of SRVCC Handover Allowed is Yes.

2. Tracing the A interface signaling on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages onthe A Interface. On the Basic tab page, specify the DPC of the test cell for the DPC(Hex) in the DPC Configuration. Click BSSAP tab in the Trace Type. On theBSSAP tab page, specify the ID of the test cell for the Cell ID(cell1,cell2,…cell16)in the Cell. Then click Submit.

3. After the A interface signaling tracing window is displayed, use a GSM/LTE dual-mode MS to camp on the LTE cell and then make a call.

Expected result: The Handover Request and Handover Complete messages aretraced over the A interface.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set the basichandover parameters of the cell, and then set SRVCC Handover Allowed to NO(No).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query SRVCCHandover Allowed.

Expected result: The value of SRVCC Handover Allowed is No.

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.188 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.


The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc/PEUa/POUc board is in position.l Dependency on Other Features

Nonel License


The UE supports both the GSM and the TD-SCDMA modes.The UE supports full-rate AMR.The related transmission parameters between the GSM and the TD-SCDMA are negotiated.

ContextThe Iur-g interface is used for information exchange between the BSC and the TD-RNC.Through the information exchange and common measurement procedures, the BSC and TD-RNC can obtain the capacity and load information of each other.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP type toIUR_G(IUR_G), and set DSP bear type to M3UA(M3UA).

2. Configure the M3UA local and destination entities by referring to Configuring theM3UA Local and Destination Entities.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an IP interface board.4. Configure the physical layer and data link layer.

– The FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc board is configured, when IP over FE/GEtransmission is used.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes ofthe Ethernet port.

(2) Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHREDPORT to addactive and standby Ethernet ports if active and standby Ethernet ports arerequired.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP to add an IP address for theEthernet port. In this step, set Local IP address as required. When multipleVLAN gateways are planned, run this command repeatedly until all the IPaddresses are added.



7-355

(4) Optional: When device IP is used in communication, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address for the interface board. Inthis step, specify Device IP Address Type and IP address.

– The PEUa/POUc board is configured, when IP over E1/T1 transmission is used.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP addressfor the interface board. In this step, specify Device IP Address Type and IPaddress.

(2) Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MP linkgroup) and perform the corresponding step.

If the E1/T1 link carries a/an ... Then...

PPP link Go to c

MP link group Go to d

(3) Run the ADD PPPLNK command to add a PPP link. In this step, set Board

type to PEUa or POUc. To add more PPP links, run this commandrepeatedly.

(4) Add an MP link group.

a. Run the ADD MPGRP command to add an MP link group. In this step,set Board type to PEUa or POUc.

b. Run the ADD MPLNK command to add an MP link. In this step, setBoard type to PEUa or POUc. To add more MP links, run thiscommand repeatedly.

5. Configure the control plane data (over IP).

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. Inthis step, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD), and setApplication type to M3UA(M3UA). To add multiple SCTP links, run thiscommand repeatedly.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set.

NOTE

l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP), set Work mode of theM3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP).

l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) and Destination entitytype is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA_SP), set Work mode of the M3UA link set toM3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). In other cases, set Work mode of the M3UA link setto M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route.(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. To add

multiple M3UA links, run this command repeatedly.(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command AADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node.

In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to IUR_G(IUR_G Interface).l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the SCCP DSP state. Inthis step, set DSP index to the index of the adjacent TD RNC. The result shows thatthe SCCP DSP is in the accessible state.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)


----End

7.189 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved HandoverBetween GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.



The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This featuredepends on the feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.


l Other PrerequisitesThe UE supports both the GSM and the TD-SCDMA modes.The UE supports full-rate AMR.The related transmission parameters between the GSM and the TD-SCDMA are negotiated.The neighboring cell relationship is properly configured on the TD-RNC. Iur-g InterfaceExistence Symbol is set to YES(Yes) and Iur-g Interface Supporting Inter-RAT CSHandover is set to YES(Yes).

ContextIn this feature, radio resource reservation is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handoverprocedure through the information exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and theTD-RNC. In this way, the resource reservation procedure is completed without CN forwarding.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set IndexType to BYID(By Index), specify the cell ID, and set Inter-RAT In BSC HandoverEnable to YES(Yes) and Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g to YES(Yes).

NOTE

Carry Speech Data at Iur-g can be set to YES(Yes) to enable the Iur-g interface to carry theuser plane data.

2. Set the local BSC as the neighboring BSC of the TD RNC and set Handover TypeSupported by the Iur-g Interface to Carrying Signaling Plane Handover on theTD-RNC side.




7-357

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC. The commandexecution result shows that Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g is Yes.

2. Use a UE to initiate a call in the TD-SCDMA network. The call is established.Attenuate the signal of the TD-SCDMA cell or add path loss between the UE and theTD-SCDMA cell until the UE is handed over from the 3G cell to a 2G cell.

3. Trace the messages transmitted on the interface between BSCs by referring to TracingMessages on the Inter-BSC Interface. You can view additional handover signaling inthe tracing window. Figure 7-12 shows the messages traced on the interface betweenBSCs.

Figure 7-12 Messages traced on the interface between BSCs

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Index

Type to BYID(By Index) and specify the cell index. In addition, set Allow IncomingBSC Handover at Iur-g to NO(No). If the user plane transmission over the Iur-ginterface needs to be deactivated at the same time, set Carry Speech Data at Iur-gto NO(No).

----End

7.190 Configuring Multiple CCCHsThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501Multiple CCCHs.



– Nonel License


ContextBased on configuration of BCCH TRX timeslot 0 as the BCCH physical channel, the feature ofMultiple CCCHs allows one to configure timeslots 2, 4, and 6 as BCCH physical channels. Thisincreases the number of CCCHs in a cell and thus improves the paging and random accesscapabilities of the cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify TRXID and Channel No., and then set Channel Type to BCH(BCH).




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

The main BCCH can be configured in only channel 0, and the extension BCCH can beconfigured in channel 2, 4, or 6.

If an extended BCCH is configured, the CCCH parameter in the system message data needs tobe configured accordingly. For example, if an extended BCCH is configured in timeslot 2, theCCCH parameter in the system message data needs to be configured as two uncombinedCCCHs.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify TRX

ID, set Channel No. to 2, and then set Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate)or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).

2. Make a call.3. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface.The expected result: The value of channel-no. in all paging messages is 0.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify TRXID. In addition, set Channel No. to 2, and set Channel Type to BCH(BCH).

5. Make a call.6. Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain

Messages on the Abis Interface.The expected result: In some paging messages, the value of channel-no. is 2.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, specify TRX

ID and Channel No.. In addition, set Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) orTCHHR(TCH Half Rate).

----End

7.191 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).

Prerequisite

l Dependency on Hardware

– Only the MRFU and the RRU3908 supports GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharingat present.


– GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing is not supported in GSM dynamic transmitdiversity.

– It is not recommended that GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing coexists with thebaseband frequency hopping algorithm involving two power amplifiers. Theircoexistence results in a certain level of performance loss.

– GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing under the MIMO is not considered.



7-359


ContextIn the case of a 3900 series multi-mode base station, the GSM and UMTS TRXs can share onepower amplifier. When there is unbalanced traffic in the GSM and the UMTS, the power can beused more efficiently in an effective way, namely, sharing the power amplifier. The overallnetwork quality of the GSM and the UMTS is thus improved.

NOTE

l The feature may fail to recall the shared power in one second when the GSM services increase suddenly.As a result, internal GSM peak clipping occurs, which affects service quality.

l Enabling the feature may cause the UMTS coverage to shrink and thus increase the drop rate. Theproblem can be addressed by handing over services in marginal coverage to a GSM/UMTS cell underthe same coverage as the original UMTS.

l The switch and other parameter configurations are performed only on the GSM side. The UMTS siderequires no configuration.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, setBoard Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set the period forenabling GU power sharing.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RXU BoardType to MRRU(MRRU) or MRFU(MRFU), set GU Dynamic Power SharingSwitch to YES(YES) and set other parameters according to actual conditions.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP and LST

BTSRXUBP and check the returned message.

If... Then...

Board Parameter ConfigurationEnabled is YES(YES).

The sharing period of GSM and UMTSDynamic Power Sharing is configuredsuccessfully.

GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switch isYES(YES).

GSM and UMTS Dynamic PowerSharing is configured successfully.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, setBoard Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set GU DynamicPower Sharing Switch to NO(NO).

NOTE

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can be deactivated by performing either of the twosteps discussed above.

----End




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Example// Activation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GUPWRSHARESTM1=07&00, GUPWRSHAREETM1=09&00, GUPWRSHARESTM2=10&00, GUPWRSHAREETM2=12&00, GUPWRSHARESTM3=14&00, GUPWRSHAREETM3=16&00, GUPWRSHARESTM4=20&00, GUPWRSHAREETM4=22&00; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=YES, GUPWRSHARETRXNUM=1, GUPWRSHAREPWRLOAD=80, GUPWRSHAREN=8, GUPWRSHAREP=6, GUPWRSHARERSVFACTOR=50, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLETH=12, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLEHS=2, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLERSVPWR=5, GUPWRSHAREGSMBUSYRSVPWR=10, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWR=15, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWRPD=5; // Verification procedure LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; // Deactivation procedureSET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=NO; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=NO.

7.192 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmissionon BS side (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).

7.192.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station SideThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.

7.192.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station SideThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.

7.192.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission onBase Station Side

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.

– A UTRP board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GE port.

– A UTRP9 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GEelectrical port.

– A UTRP2 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GEoptical port.




7-361

– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP– GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface


ContextThe feature requires a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on theGTMU and one FE port on the WMPT together and to share transmission ports on the UMTSside and the transmission network, therefore sharing transmission resources.

NOTEIn the scenario of GSM and UMTS co-transmission, transmission resource sharing can be achieved byconnecting FE, GE, or E1/T1 ports together. Connecting FE ports, however, is recommended.

Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 7-13,Figure 7-14, and Figure 7-15.

Figure 7-13 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

Figure 7-14 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Figure 7-15 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

Procedurel Procedure for Activating the BTS Data

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.

– It is recommended that BTS Communication Type be set to LOGICIP(LogicIP).

– It is recommended that Carry Flag be set to IPLGCPORTIP(Logic Port).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSDEVIP to add an IP address to the FE

interconnection port on the BTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP address ofthe FE interconnection port on the BTS side.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTSto the BSC6900.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).– Set Forward Route Address to the IP address of the port connected to the network

on the GBTS side.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the

BSC6900 to the GBTS.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of FE interconnection port

on the GBTS side.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the IP address of the port connected to the network

on the NodeB side.l Activating the NodeB data (IP over FE/GE)

1. If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, run the NodeBMML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the NodeB toBSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.



7-363

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 2.– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of

Peer SCTP Port.5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

NOTECCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. You can query theinformation about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side by running the BSC6900 MML commandLST UIUBCP.

7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,

and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and

Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.8. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP

relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.9. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP

server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.

l Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)

1. If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, run the NodeBMML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group (This operationis performed when E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side).

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link to the MP groupwhen E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side.

NOTE

l When the base station uses the E1/T1 transmission mode, the upper-layer link can be configuredas a PPPLNK or in an MP group. The MP group is recommended because it provides greaterbandwidth than the PPPLNK group.

l A maximum of eight MP links can be configured for the UTRP board, and a maximum of fourMP links are configured for the WMPT board. If the transmission requirement is not met, anotherWMPT or UTRP board can be added.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the NodeB toBSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 2.– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of

Peer SCTP Port.7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

NOTECCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. You can query theinformation about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side by running the BSC6900 MML commandLST UIUBCP.

9. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,

and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and

Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.10. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP

relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.11. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP

server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.

----End

Example//Activating the GBTS data //Add the ESN of the BTS ADD BTSESN:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";//Setting the BTS IP address SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the BTS side ADD BTSDEVIP:PN=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", AUTONEG=DISABLED, RATE=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE;//Adding an IP route from the BTS to the BSC6900 ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.2";//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the BTS(If the IP route has been added, skip this step): ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="17.0.0.13", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;//Activating the NodeB data (IP over FE/GE) //Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC



7-365

ADD IPRT: CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="17.0.0.17",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="70.20.3.51",PREF=80;//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a UCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, NODEBIP="199.2.2.2", RNCIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=0, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, NODEBIP="199.2.2.2", RNCIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=0, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: EnableSwitch=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.18";//Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1) //Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MP, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an MP group ADD MPGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, MPGRPN=0, MCPPP=DISABLE, AUTHTYPE=NOAUTH, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0", PPPMUX=DISABLE;//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC ADD IPRT: CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="17.0.0.17",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="70.20.3.51",PREF=80;//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a UCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, NODEBIP="199.2.2.2", RNCIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=0, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, NODEBIP="199.2.2.2", RNCIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=0, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: EnableSwitch=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.18";




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

7.192.2 Configuring IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission onBase Station Side

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


– A GSM and LTE dual-mode base station whose GSM and LTE modes share the BBUsupports this feature.

– A UTRP needs to be added at the eNodeB to support IP over E1/T1.


– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

– MRFD-211601 2G/3G Common Reference Clock (GBTS)

– MRFD-211501 IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side(GBTS)

l License


Context

The feature IP-Based GSM and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side requires a GSMand LTE dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on the GTMU and one FE port on theLMPT together and to share transmission ports on the LTE side and the transmission network,therefore sharing transmission resources.

NOTEIn the scenario of GSM and LTE co-transmission, transmission resource sharing can be achieved byconnecting FE, GE, or E1/T1 ports together. Connecting FE ports, however, is recommended.

Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 7-16 andFigure 7-17 respectively.

Figure 7-16 IP-over-FE/GE GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side



7-367

Figure 7-17 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Procedurel Activating the GBTS data

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS. Inthis step, set BTS Index Type and BTS Interface Board Bar Code 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.– Set BTS IP and BSC IP.– It is recommended that BTS Communication Type be set to LOGICIP(Logic

IP).– It is recommended that Carry Flag be set to IPLGCPORTIP(Logic Port).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT to set the IP address of FEinterconnection port on the GBTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP addressof FE interconnection port on the GBTS side.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTSto the BSC6900.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Next HOP IP Address to the IP address of the GBTS port connected to the

IP network, that is, the IP address of the LMPT port connected to the GTMU.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from BSC6900 to

the GBTS.– Set Destination IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the

GBTS side.– Set Next HOP IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC.

l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over FE/GE)

1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPTport connected to the GTMU.

NOTEWhen the GTMU is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/FULL mode.

2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to set the IP address of the maincontrol board on the eNodeB side and the IP address of the S1 interface on the CNside.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

– Set IP Address to the IP address of the S1 interface on the eNodeB side.

– Set Port Type to ETH(Ethernet Port).– Set Port No. based on the actual situation.

3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe MME.

– Set Destination IP Address to the destination IP address of the route.

– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).– Next Hop IP Address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of

the eNodeB.4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB to

the SGW.5. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPLGCPORT to add an IP logical port. In

this step, set Port Type to ETH(Ethernet Port).6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between the

eNodeB and the SGW.

– Set Join Logical Port to YES.

– Set PATH Type to ANY.7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link between

the eNodeB and the MME.8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.

l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)

1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPTport connected to the GTMU.

NOTEWhen the GTMU is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/FULL mode.

2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group.3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link and then add it

to the MP group.4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add an IP address for the main

control board on the eNodeB side and an IP address for the S1 interface on the CNside.

– Set IP Address to the IP address of the S1 interface on the eNodeB side.

– Set Port Type to MP(Multi-link PPP Group).– Set Port No. based on the actual situation.

5. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe MME.

– Set Destination IP Address to the destination IP address of the route.

– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).– Next Hop IP Address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of

the eNodeB.6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB to

the SGW.



7-369

7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPLGCPORT to add an IP logical port. Inthis step, set Port Type to MP(Multi-link PPP Group).

8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between theeNodeB and the SGW.– Set Join Logical Port to YES.– Set PATH Type to ANY.

9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link betweenthe eNodeB and the MME.

10. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.

----End

Example//Activating the GBTS data//Adding the ESN of the GBTS ADD BTSESN:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";//Setting the IP address of the GBTS SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the GBTS side SET BTSETHPORT:PN=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", AUTONEG=DISABLED, RATE=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE;//Adding an IP route from the GBTS to the BSC6900 ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.2";//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the GBTS (If the route has been added, ignore this step.) ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="17.0.0.13", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over GE/FE)//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the GTMU SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;//Adding an IP address for the eNodeB ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME ADD IPRT: CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="138.20.5.0",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="70.20.3.51",PREF=80;//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW ADD IPRT: CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="138.30.20.0",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="70.20.6.55",PREF=80;//Adding an IP logical port ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000, TXEBS=200000;//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", PEERIP="138.30.20.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;//Add a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907, PEERIP="138.20.5.60", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an S1 interface ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the GTMU




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;//Adding an MP group ADD MPGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, MPGRPN=0, MCPPP=DISABLE, AUTHTYPE=NOAUTH, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0", PPPMUX=DISABLE;//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Adding the IP address of the eNodeB ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=MP, PN=0, IP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME ADD IPRT: CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="138.20.5.0",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="70.20.3.51",PREF=80;//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW ADD IPRT: CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="138.30.20.0",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="70.20.6.55",PREF=80;//Adding an IP logical port ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=MP, PN=0, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000, TXEBS=200000;//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", PEERIP="138.30.20.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;//Adding a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907, PEERIP="138.20.5.60", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an S1 interface ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;

7.193 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS).


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.– When the TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission feature is suppported by a

GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, a UTRP should be configured for the BTS.The UTRP type must be UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4.

l Dependency on Other Features– WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface or WRFD-050411 Fractional

IP Function on Iub Interfacel License




7-371

ContextThis feature enables the BTS and NodeB to share E1/T1 transmission resources through abackplane clock channel with the effective TDM timeslot cross connection function.

Backplane-based co-transmission is classified into the following scenarios:l In the scenario of GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, E1/T1

timeslots on the UMTS side are transmistted to the GTMU through the backplane TOPchannel on the WMPT. E1/T1 ports on the GTMU are connected to the transmissionnetwork. The TDM timeslot cross connection function enables GSM data and UMTS datato be multiplexed on the transmission network. Therefore, E1/T1 transmission resourcesare shared by the GSM and UMTS modes by timeslot, as shown in Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-18 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

l In the scenario of GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, a

UTRP is configured on the GSM side. Therefore, extra E1/T1 resources can be shared bythe UMTS mode through the backplane TOP channel to extend E1/T1 transmissionresources for the UMTS mode, as shown in Figure 7-19.

NOTE

l The number of E1/T1 on the BTS backplane is within the range of 16 through 19. E1/T1 numbers 16 through19 on the BTS backplane correspond to E1/T1 numbers 0 through 3 on the NodeB backplane. Crossconnection is not supported. For example, E1/T1 No. 16 on the BTS backplane only corresponds to E1/T1No. 0 on the NodeB backplane.

l E1 timeslot numbers configured on the BTS side must be consistent with those configured on the NodeBside.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Figure 7-19 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

Procedurel Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connectionbetween a GTMU port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOPswitching parameters.

– Set Port Subrack No. and Port Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot wherethe BTS port connected to the NodeB interface board is located. Set TOP BoardSubrack No. and TOP Board Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot wherethe NodeB interface board is located.

– Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

– Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.

NOTEWhen E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type toTOPEXTOUTPORT.

l Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based)

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.

– Set Subrack No. and Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot that house theIub interface board.

– Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.

– Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the GTMU.

NOTESimilar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, andonline and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actualnetworking mode.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.



7-373

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add itto the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD orBASE_BOARD.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.– Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,

rate units in other configuration must be consistent.5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).– Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is

H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.– Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,

rate units in other configuration must be consistent.7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP(NCP Port).8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP(CCP Port).NOTE

Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP porton the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

l Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection

between a UTRP port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP

switching parameters.– Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.– Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.

NOTEWhen E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type toTOPEXTOUTPORT.

l Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.

– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.

– Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.– Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the UTRP.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTESimilar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, andonline and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actualnetworking mode.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add itto the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD orBASE_BOARD.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.– Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,

rate units in other configuration must be consistent.5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).– Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is

H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.– Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,

rate units in other configuration must be consistent.7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.NOTE

Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP porton the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

----End

Example//Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) //Configuring a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=OTHER;//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the GTMU and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the GTMU provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the GTMU ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;



7-375

//Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=6;//Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;//Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";//Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512;//Adding a NCPor CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;//Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)//Configuring a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=0, DESTNODE=OTHER;//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the UTRP and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the UTRP provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the UTRP ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)//Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=0;//Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;//Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";//Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512;//Adding a NCPor CCP link




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;

7.194 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common ReferenceClock (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS).

7.194.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GSM and UMTSCommon Reference Clock.

7.194.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and LTECommon Reference Clock.

7.194.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GSM and UMTSCommon Reference Clock.


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station whose GSM and UMTS modes share theBBU supports this feature.

– If Global Positioning System (GPS) or Building Integrated Timing Supply System(BITS) clock signals are shared, the USCU must be configured on the BBU.

l Dependency on Other Features– GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization– GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet– WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet


ContextThe feature GSM and UMTS common reference clock enables the GSM and UMTS modes toshare the same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for onemode while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.

Scenarios of this feature are as follows:l Common GPS reference clock

– Common GPS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)– Common GPS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)

l Common BITS reference clock– Common BITS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)



7-377

– Common BITS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)l Common E1/T1 reference clock

– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical

scenario)l Common Ethernet reference clock

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common Ethernet reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical

scenario)l Common IP reference clock

– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common IP reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical scenario)

NOTEFor non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.

Common GPS reference clock

When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-mode basestation, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The GSM and UMTSmodes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure7-20.

Figure 7-20 Common GPS reference clock

NOTEAs shown in Figure 7-20, only one USCU can be configured on either the GSM side or the UMTS side.

Common BITS reference clock




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-modebase station, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The GSM andUMTS modes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown inFigure 7-21.

Figure 7-21 Common BITS reference clock

NOTEAs shown in Figure 7-21, only one USCU can be configured on either the GSM side or the UMTS side.

Common E1/T1 reference clock

When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other modeis configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Followings are examples of commonE1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) and common E1/T1 reference clock on theUMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 7-22 and Figure 7-23.

Figure 7-22 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)



7-379

Figure 7-23 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common Ethernet reference clock

When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FEtransmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT), asshown in Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-24 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common IP reference clock

When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, the commonIP reference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with anIEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connectinga FE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configured toshare the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP reference clockon the UMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 7-25.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

Figure 7-25 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Procedurel Common GPS reference clock

1. Configuration on the GBTS side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP.– Set GPS or Glonass to GPS(GPS).– Set Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).– Set GPS Antenna Delay based on the actual situation.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set BTS clockparameters based on the actual situation.

2. Configuration on the NodeB side

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to configure the USCUGPS clocksource.– Set System Clock Working Mode to MANUAL.– Set Clock Source Type to USCUGPS(USCUGPS clock source).

l Common BITS reference clock1. Configuration on the GBTS side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set an external clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to EXCLK.


Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to configure the BITS clocksource.– Set System Clock Working Mode to MANUAL.– Set Clock Source Type to BITS(BITS clock source).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)1. Configuration on the GBTS side



7-381

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS to track the clocksignals received from the BSC. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK.


Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to configure the PEER clocksource.

NOTE

Before configuring on the NodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the GBTS side is E1/T1 clock.

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)


Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to configure the LINE clocksource.

NOTE

Before configuring the LINE clock source, ensure that an E1/T1 clock link is available.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER(PEER Clock).

l Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)


(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD LNKSRC to configure the Ethernet clocksource. In this step, set Port Type to ETH.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set Clock Source Typeto LINE(LINE clock source).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER(PEER Clock).

l Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)


(1) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set Clock Source Typeto IPCLK(IP clock source).

2. Configuring on the GBTS side

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST CLKMODE and the BSC6900 MMLcommand LST BTSCLK. Then, check the returned packets.

If... Then...

The clock source information matchesthe configuration.





Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

If... Then...

The clock source information mismatchthe configuration.


2. Check whether any alarm is generated.

If... Then...

The clock conflict alarm is generated. The configurations on the GSM andUMTS sides conflict with each other.Therefore, the configuration fails.

----End

Example//Common GPS reference clock//Configuring the GPS clock source on the GBTS side SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=2, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=0, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=2, CLKMOD=GPSCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;//Configuring the USCUGPS clock source on the NodeB side SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=USCUGPS;//Common BITS reference clock//Configuring the external clock source on the GBTS side SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;//Configuring the BITS clock source on the NodeB side SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)//Setting the BTS to track the clock signals received from the BSC on the GBTS side on BTS 120 SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;//Configuring the PEER clock source on the NodeB side SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEER;

//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)//Configuring the LINE clock source on the NodeB side SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;//Configuring the PEER clock source on the GBTS side SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)//Configuring the Ethernet clock source on the NodeB side ADD LNKSRC: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;//Configuring the PEER clock source on the GBTS side SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)//Configuring the IP clock source on the NodeB side SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;//Configuring the PEER clock source on the GBTS side SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;



7-383

7.194.2 Configuring GSM and LTE Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM and LTECommon Reference Clock.


– The GSM and LTE dual-mode base station whose GSM and LTE modes share the BBUsupports this feature.

– If Global Positioning System (GPS) or Building Integrated Timing Supply System(BITS) clock signals are shared, the USCU must be configured on the BBU.


– Common GPS reference clock

– GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization

– Common Ethernet reference clock from S1 interface

– GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet

– LOFD-00301301 Synchronization with Ethernet(ITU-T G.8261)

– LOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchroniztion

l License


Context

Huawei multi-mode BTS (MBTS) provides the common reference clock of GSM and LTE whenthe BBU is shared between GBTS and eNodeB. This feature helps save the Capital Expenditure(CAPEX) and Operational Expenditure (OPEX) during the GSM and LTE network deployment.

Procedurel Common GPS reference clock


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP to set the USCUparameters. In this step, set GPS or Glonass to GPS(GPS), set Antenna PowerSupply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power), and set GPS Antenna Delay basedon the practical condition.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS clock. In thisstep, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set the BTS clockparameters based on the practical condition.

2. Configuration on the eNodeB side

(1) Before configuring a reference clock, run the eNodeB MML command LSTBRD to check whether the USCU board is configured. If the USCU board is notconfigured, run the eNodeB MML command ADD BRD to add the USCU board.




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

NOTE

One eNodeB can be configured with a maximum of one USCU board.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock.

(3) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to activate the GPS clock.

l Common BITS reference clock


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD to add a USCU board.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS clock. In thisstep, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync clock).


(1) Before configuring a reference clock, run the eNodeB MML command LSTBRD to check whether the USCU board is configured. If the USCU board is notconfigured, run the eNodeB MML command ADD BRD to add the USCU board.

NOTE

One eNodeB can be configured with a maximum of one USCU board.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock.

(3) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to activate the BITS clock.

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS clock. In this step,set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).


(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer referenceclock.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to activate the peerreference clock.

NOTE

Before setting data on the eNodeB, ensure that the E1/T1 clock is active at the GBTS.

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the eNodeB side


(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD LINECLK to add an E1/T1 clock.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to activate the E1/T1 clock.

NOTE

Ensure that an E1/T1 clock link is available before adding the E1/T1 clock.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS clock. In this step,set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).

l Common synchronous Ethernet reference clock on the GBTS side




7-385

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS clock. In this step,set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock).


(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer referenceclock.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to activate the peerreference clock.

l Common synchronous Ethernet reference clock on the eNodeB side1. Configuration on the eNodeB side

(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronousEthernet clock.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to activate the synchronousEthernet clock.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS clock. In this step,set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the eNodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT and the BSC6900 MML command

LST BTSCLK. Check the results.

If... Then...

The clock source information matchesthe configuration.


The clock source information does notmatch the configuration.


2. Check the alarms.

If... Then...

The Inter-System BBU BoardParameter Settings Conflict alarm isreported.

The clock settings conflict between theGBTS and eNodeB sides, and thereforethe clock setting different from theconfiguration fails.

----End

Example// Common GPS reference clock// To add a USCU board to BTS 120 and configure a GPS clock, run the following commands:ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=2, BT=USCU;SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=2, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=0, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=12o, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=2, CLKMOD=GPSCLK,




Issue 05 (2011-03-07)

TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;// To add a GPS clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:ADD GPS:SN=4;// To activate the GPS clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;// Common BITS reference clock// To add a USCU board to BTS 120 and configure an external clock, run the following commands:ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=2, BT=USCU;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=166, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;// To add a BITS clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:ADD BITS:SN=4;// To activate the BITS clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;// Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side// To set ClkType of BTS 120 to TRCBSC_CLK on the GBTS side, run the following command: SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;// To add a peer reference clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:ADD PEERCLK: PN=0;// To activate the peer reference clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;// Common E1/T1 reference clock on the eNodeB side// To add an E1/T1 clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:ADD LINECLK: SN=6, PN=0;// To activate the E1/T1 clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINECLK;// To configure a peer reference clock on the GBTS side, run the following command:SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=166, ClkType=PEER_CLK;// Common synchronous Ethernet reference clock on the GBTS side// To configure a synchronous Ethernet clock on the GBTS side, run the following command:SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=166, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0;// To add a peer reference clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:ADD PEERCLK: PN=0;// To activate the peer reference clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;// Common synchronous Ethernet reference clock on the eNodeB side// To add a synchronous Ethernet clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:ADD SYNCETH: SN=6, PN=0;// To activate the synchronous Ethernet clock on the eNodeB side, run the following command:SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;// To configure a peer reference clock on the GBTS side, run the following command:SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=166, ClkType=PEER_CLK;



7-387

Date post:	08-Nov-2014
Category:	Documents
Upload:	iqbal-muhammad
View:	229 times
Download:	19 times

GBSS Reconfiguration Guide(V900R012C01_05)

Documents